PROJECT MANUALdhonore.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/07/000B_Linear_Park...05 12 13 ARCHITECTURALLY-EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 30 00 STEEL DECK 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05

NEW ORLEANS ERNEST N. MORIAL CONVENTION CENTER LINEAR PARK

New Orleans, Louisiana MCCNO Project No. CO0517 MCCNO Contract No. C-1391

PROJECT MANUAL

BID SET

VOLUME 2 of 3

DIVISION 02

Thru

DIVISION 14

DATE: 16 January 2018

New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear ParkNew Orleans, Louisiana© MA EDR N10.043.00\14027

Bid Set16 January 2018

VOLUME 1INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00 01 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS00 01 03 PROJECT DIRECTORY00 01 07 SEALS PAGE

COOPERATIVE ENDEAVOR AGREEMENT00 31 32 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDSINSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERSPROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURESBID FORMUNIT PRICE FORMBID BONDGENERAL CONDITIONS AIA A201 - 2007SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONSCONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA A101, 2007PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS, AIA A312, 2010AFFIDAVITS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY01 22 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT01 23 00 ALTERNATES01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION01 32 33 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 35 13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES01 35 19 OPEN ACCESS PLAN - SMALL BUSINESS01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS01 42 19 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS01 43 39 MOCK-UPS01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING01 73 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING01 74 00 CLEANING01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

[END OF VOLUME 1] Section 000101

TABLE OF CONTENTSPage 1 of 5



VOLUME 2DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS & MISCELLANEOUS SITE WORK

02 30 00 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION02 41 13 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 21 00 PLAIN STEEL REINFORCEMENT03 30 00 CIVIL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 33 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE03 31 13 CIVIL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 22 00 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 05 14 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS FOR METAL05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 13 ARCHITECTURALLY-EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 30 00 STEEL DECK 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING05 52 00 HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL ASSEMBLIES05 58 13 COLUMN COVERS05 75 00 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY06 16 43 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY06 74 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED GRATINGS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION07 27 00 WATER AND AIR BARRIER07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS07 42 16 METAL PLATE PANELS07 44 56 FIBER REINFORCED CEMENTITIOUS (FRC) PANELS07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

Section 000101TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 2 of 5



DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 31 00 FLOOR ACCESS HATCH08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS08 44 00 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD09 91 00 PAINTING09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 14 53 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (Not Used)

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 93 00 CUSTOM SITE FURNISHINGS12 93 13 BICYCLE RACKS12 93 43 SITE SEATING AND TABLES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 12 00 WATER FEATURE MECHANICAL13 12 15 WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 32 00 MOVING WALKS

[END OF VOLUME 2]


Page 3 of 5



VOLUME 3DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING (Not Used)

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Not Used)

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (Not Used)

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 74 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES ARC-FLASH STUDY26 06 50.16 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS26 24 16 PANELBOARDS26 27 13 ELECTRICITY METERING26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS26 50 10 ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS, BALLASTS26 55 61 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS27 05 29 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS27 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING27 16 00 COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS27 18 00 COMMUNICATIONS TESTING

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITYPATHWAYS AND CABLING

28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM


Page 4 of 5



DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 00 00 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING31 20 01 EARTHWORK FOR BUILDING FOUNDATIONS31 23 18 GROUNDWATER CONTROL31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL31 62 00 TREATED TIMBER PILES31 62 01 OPEN-END PIPE PILES

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 14 00 UNIT PAVING32 15 00 AGGREGATE SURFACING32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 92 00 TURFGRASSES32 93 00 PLANTS32 93 02 TREES32 93 13 BOLLARDS32 94 50 SILVA CELL 232 94 56 PLANTING SOIL FOR SILVA CELLS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 4610 LANDSCAPE UNDERDRAINAGE

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

34 41 00 DESCRIPTION OF WORK34 41 01 REGULATIONS AND CODES34 41 02 SUBMITTALS AND AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION34 41 03 MILL TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATIONS34 41 04 TRAFFIC SIGNAL ITEMS34 41 05 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLIES34 41 06 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABLE34 41 07 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONDUIT34 41 08 PAINTING AND SURFACE FINISHING34 41 09 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION SYSTEM34 41 10 RADIO-ACTIVATED GPS-BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL PREEMPTION AND

PRIORITY CONTROL SYSTEM34 41 11 COMMUNICATIONS34 41 12 SURGE PROTECTION34 41 13 SIGNAL TESTING34 41 14 LED TRAFFIC SIGNALS34 41 15 RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON SIGNALS

[END OF VOLUME 3]


Page 5 of 5

New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park Bid Set New Orleans, Louisiana 30-June-2017 © MA EDR N14023/14027

Section 02 30 00 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION Page 1 of 1

SECTION 02 30 00

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Soil boring logs are shown in the Geotechnical Investigation report entitled “New

Orleans Convention and Exhibition Facility, New Orleans, Louisiana, dated November 26, 1980, by Eustis Engineering Company and Subsoil Investigation – Ernest N. Morial Convention Center, Phase IV dated April 8, 2003, by Gore Engineering, Inc.”. This information may be obtained upon request at the offices of the ENGINEER.

B. This soil investigation information is offered as an aid in bidding only and is not a part

of the Contract Documents. The boring logs are available for the CONTRACTOR’s information, but are not a warranty of subsurface conditions. The Owner, Engineer and Geotechnical Engineer assume no responsibility for any variation between materials encountered during construction and those indicated on the boring logs, nor for any variation between the location of the water table encountered and that indicated on the boring logs at the date borings were taken.

C. Additional Investigation: The CONTRACTOR shall visit the site and become

acquainted with site conditions. Prior to bidding, prospective CONTRACTORS may make their own site and subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves with site and subsurface conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining rights of ingress and egress to private property for site and subsurface investigation and shall assume all responsibility for any damage to property caused as a result of the CONTRACTOR's investigation.

D. Location of Borings: CONTRACTORS shall be responsible for making their own

determination of the location of the soil borings on this Project. 1.02 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

A. All work performed under this section shall be in compliance with the most recent edition of the City of New Orleans General Specifications for street paving and the New Orleans Sewerage and Water Board Specifications.

B. If there is a conflict between this section and the Standard Specifications referenced above, the most stringent requirements shall apply, as determined by the ENGINEER.

END OF SECTION

27 September 2017

New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park Bid Set New Orleans, Louisiana 30-June-2017 © MA EDR N14023/14027

Section 02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 02 41 13

SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

The work in this Section consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor necessary for demolishing and disposing of designated facilities indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall submit a written request, to include a detailed demolition procedure, to the Owner for approval at least 10 days before demolition is started. The demolition procedure shall include a detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of work. The demolition procedures shall provide for safe conduct of work, protection of the property, which is to remain undisturbed and coordination with other work or operation which may be in progress.

1.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS



PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. All material shall be removed as necessary for construction, or in any event, to a

minimum depth of three feet below finished grades as shown on the Drawings. B. Any structure, or part thereof, remaining below grade shall be mechanically fractured

so that subsurface water will freely pass through the slab or floor of the structure, and so that no void will remain after backfilling the work site to grade as shown on the

27 September 2017

New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park Final Review Set New Orleans, Louisiana 07-June-2017 © MA EDR N14023/14027

Section 02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Page 2 of 2

Drawings. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all existing service connections to

the buildings or site and permanently plugging the pipes where required in accordance with requirements of the utility companies concerned.

D. The Contractor will be responsible for any damage caused to other structures, and

shall be held liable for any and all repairs, replacement of parts or renovations required to restore any structure, portion of structure, equipment or items, not intended for demolition. The Contractor shall restore any damaged facilities to their condition prior to demolition provided the damage was result of the demolition. If the Contractor does not repair any such damage immediately, or if the repairs are not suitable to the Owner, the Owner reserves the right to have such repairs made by another party and deduct the cost of required repairs from money due Contractor.

E. Salvage all equipment as directed by Owner and deliver to City of New Orleans. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. All materials, which are not delivered to the Owner as specified above, shall become

the property of the Contractor, and shall be demolished, moved or otherwise disposed of at the option of the Contractor by a method approved by the Owner.

B. All demolished structures, equipment and materials shall be removed from the work

site by the Contractor. C. All demolished structures, equipment and materials which are either left in place or

removed to the disposal site shall be in a non-hazardous condition. D. Manhole frames and covers to be removed are the property of the Owner and shall be

delivered to a place designated by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Bid Set27 September 2017

New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park Bid Set New Orleans, Louisiana 21-July-2017 © MA EDR N14023/14027

Section 03 21 00 PLAIN STEEL REINFORCEMENT BARS

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 03 21 00

PLAIN STEEL REINFORCEMENT BARS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Furnish and install the concrete reinforcement as shown and indicated on the

Drawings and specified in this Section, complete in place. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. All shop drawings shall be of the same size. Reproductions of the Drawings for

use as shop drawings is not permitted. Shop drawings shall include placing drawings, bending details, and bar lists with bar marks. All details and notes appearing on the Drawings, giving information for the placing of reinforcing steel, shall be shown on the shop drawings. Shop drawings will not be reviewed without such information.

2. Wall reinforcing shall be shown in elevation. 3. Show location and size of all penetrations greater than 6-inches in diameter or

across the opening with the corresponding added reinforcing around the penetrations.

4. Submittals shall be complete for each structure. Partial submittals are not

permitted and will be returned unmarked. Each submittal shall clearly indicate the structure and Drawing numbers that the work is for. The identifying numbers of the shop drawings for each structure shall be in numerical order.

5. Location and arrangement of accessories shall be clearly indicated. 6. All shop drawings shall be checked by the fabricator and CONTRACTOR

before being submitted to the ENGINEER. B. Mill tests of reinforcing steel shall be submitted prior to use for each 15 tons or less

shipped to the site. Tests shall be conducted in conformance with ASTM A 615, and methods prescribed therein.

1. Cost of mill tests shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 2. Three copies of each test report stating whether the material meets the

requirements of the ASTM specifications shall be submitted to the ENGINEER.




Page 2 of 5

3. Certified copies of the mill tests may be considered evidence of compliance

provided such tests are regularly conducted by the reinforcement supplier by experienced, competent personnel using adequate testing equipment. In case of doubt as to the adequacy or accuracy of the mill tests, the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish, at no additional cost to the Owner, test results from an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER on mill samples or delivered steel reinforcement.




PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING BARS A. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed-type bars conforming to ASTM A 615.

Reinforcement shall be manufactured from new billet steel of American manufacture, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing steel shall be shop fabricated to shapes and dimensions indicated on the

Drawings and in compliance with applicable provisions of ACI 315 and ACI 318. C. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars shall be pre-fabricated to detail and delivered on the job

plainly tagged and ready to set. 2.02 WELDED WIRE FABRIC Welded wire fabric shall be in flat sheets conforming to ASTM A 185, with wire

conforming to ASTM A 82. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. All chairs and bolsters shall have plastic-covered or galvanized steel legs at formed

slabs and beams. For slabs on grade, bare metal is acceptable. Concrete “dobie” blocks are acceptable.

B. For slabs on grade 10-inches or less, all reinforcing shall be supported as required to

properly position the bars or welded wire fabric. Chairs and/or bolsters shall be supported on precast concrete pads bearing on the subgrade. The concrete pads




Page 3 of 5

shall be at least 6 x 6-inches and be no more than 1-1/2-inches thick. Pads shall be cast from Class "A" concrete or from mortar made up of one part cement and two parts sand, with tie wires embedded.

C. For slabs on grade greater than 10-inches, reinforcing shall be supported directly on

concrete brick bearing on the subgrade or the system noted above for slabs 8-inches or less.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Reinforcing steel delivered to the site, not immediately placed in forms, shall be

protected from mud and excessive rust-producing conditions by storing in a well-drained area and supported off the ground. All reinforcing shall be properly tagged with their bar marks and location in the structure clearly noted.

3.02 TOLERANCES A. Allowable tolerances for fabricating steel reinforcement shall be as follows:

Item Maximum Tolerance, Inches

Sheared Length of Bars +1 -1

Depth of Truss Bars +0.0 -1/2

Outside Dimensions of Stirrups, Ties and Spirals +1/2 -1/2

Location of Bends +1 -1

B. Allowable tolerances for placing steel reinforcement shall be as follows:

Item

Maximum Tolerance, Inches

Concrete Cover from Outside of Bar to Finished Surface +1/4 -0.0

Lateral Spacing of Bars in Plane of Reinforcement in Beams and Joists +1/4 -0.0

Lateral Spacing of Bars in Plane of Reinforcement in Slabs and Walls +1 -1

Spacing of Stirrups, Ties and Spirals Along Longitudinal Axis of Member +1/2 -1/4

Height of Bottom Bars in Slabs, Beams and Joists +1/4 -1/4

Height of Top Bars in Slabs, Beams and Joists Depth 8" and Less Depth 9" - 24" Depths 25" & Greater

+1/4 +1/2 +1

-1/4 -1/2 -1




Page 4 of 5

3.03 FIELD FABRICATION Field fabrication of reinforcing steel is not permitted. 3.04 PLACEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Space metal chairs, bolsters, spacers and hangers in accordance with ACI 315. B. Reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free from rust scale or other

coatings that will destroy or reduce bond. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the plans shall not be used.

C. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with the Drawings and shall

be adequately secured in position with not less than 16 gauge annealed wire or suitable clips at intersections. Reinforcement shall be held securely at the required distance from the forms. Nails shall not be driven into outside forms to support reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric reinforcement for concrete slabs on ground and as otherwise

indicated. Lap all joints 6-inches and wire securely. Extend mesh to within 2-inches of sides and ends of slabs. Sheets that do not lay flat when in their intended position will be rejected. Tags designating the wire size and spacing shall be left on each sheet until ready for use. Tuck ends of welded mesh well down into edge of beams or walls. Do not leave unreinforced border strips. Welded wire fabric shall not contain loose rust. All welded wire fabric shall be supported and tied in its proper location.

E. Conduits: Where conduits are permitted in slabs, low conduit shall be wired to the

upper side of bottom reinforcing and top conduit shall be wired to lower side of top steel. Where parallel conduits occur, they shall be separated by at least 2-inches clear.

3.05 CONCRETE COVER Reinforcement shall be protected by concrete cover as shown and noted on the

Drawings. 3.06 SPLICING A. Splicing of reinforcement shall be as shown and indicated on the Drawings. Splices

not shown on the Drawings shall be Class "B" splice, in accordance with ACI 318. Any changes to the location and type of splices desired by the CONTRACTOR must be specifically requested and must meet with the acceptance of the ENGINEER before they can be used.

B. Splices shall not be made at point of maximum stress and shall provide sufficient lap

to transfer stress between bars by bond. C. Mechanical splices may be used instead of lap splices provided that their location and




Page 5 of 5

type meets with the acceptance of the ENGINEER. 3.07 INSPECTION Inspect all the work in accordance with these Specifications.

END OF SECTION



Section 03 31 13 CIVIL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Page 1 of 22

SECTION 03 30 00

CIVIL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Contractor shall provide cast-in-place concrete, joints in concrete, reinforcement steel and appurtenant work, formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, and shall design and construct falsework, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings.

1. Detailed Drawings of the falsework and or shoring method proposed to be used. Such Drawings shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the general layout, sizes of members, anticipated stresses, grade of materials to be used in the falsework, and typical soil conditions.

2. Shop bending diagrams, placing lists, and Drawings of reinforcing steel prior to fabrication.

3. Details of the concrete reinforcing steel and concrete inserts shall be submitted at the earliest possible date after receipt by Contractor of the Notice to Proceed. Details of reinforcing steel for fabrication and erection shall conform to ACI 315V and the requirements herein. The shop bending diagrams shall show the actual lengths of bars, to the nearest inch measured to the intersection of the extensions (tangents for bars of circular cross section) of the outside surface. Include bar placement diagrams, which clearly indicate the dimensions of each bar splice.

4. Where mechanical couplers are required or permitted to be used to splice reinforcing steel, submit manufacturer's literature which contains instructions and recommendations for installation for each type of coupler used; certified test reports which verify the load capacity of each type and size of coupler used; and, Shop Drawings that show the location of each coupler with details of how they are to be installed in the formwork.

5. If reinforcement steel is spliced by welding at any location, submit mill test reports that contain the information necessary for the determination of the carbon equivalent per AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel. Contractor shall submit a written welding procedure for each type of weld for each size of bar which is to be spliced by welding; merely a statement that AWS procedures will be followed is not acceptable. Contractor shall submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used and welder qualifications, for each welding procedure,




Page 2 of 22

and for each welder performing the Work. Such qualifications shall be as specified in AWS D1.4.

6. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance with requirements of the following:

a. List of form materials and locations of use.

b. Mill tests for cement.

c. Aggregate gradation test results and certification.

d. Materials and methods for curing.

7. Placement drawings showing the location and type of joints for each structure.

C. Mix Designs. Prior to beginning the Work, submit preliminary concrete mix designs, which shall show the proportions and gradations of materials, proposed for each class and type of concrete. The mix designs shall be checked by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. Costs related to such checking shall be the Contractors responsibility. When a water-reducing admixture is to be used, the Contractor shall furnish mix designs for concrete both with and without the admixture.

D. Delivery Tickets. Where ready-mix concrete is used, Contractor shall furnish certified delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete to Engineer. Each ticket shall show the state certified equipment used for measuring, and the total quantities, by weight, of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures, the amounts of water in the aggregate, added at the batching plant, and the amount allowed to be added at the Site for the specific design mix. In addition, each certificate shall state the mix number, total yield in cubic yards, and the time of day to the nearest minute, corresponding to the time when the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when it arrived at the Site, when unloading began, and when unloading was finished.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing of Reinforcing Steel.

1. If requested by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish samples from each heat of reinforcing steel in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests will be paid by the Owner. Costs of additional tests, if material fails initial tests, shall be Contractors responsibility.

2. If requested by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish samples of each type of welded splice used in the Work in a quantity and of dimensions adequate for testing. At the discretion of Engineer, radiographic testing of direct butt-welded splices will be performed. Contractor shall provide assistance necessary to facilitate testing. Contractor shall repair any weld that fails to meet the requirements of AWS D1.4. The costs of testing will be paid by the Owner; but the costs of tests that fail to meet requirements shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility.

B. Testing of Materials.




Page 3 of 22

1. Tests on component materials and for compressive strength of concrete will be performed as indicated herein. Tests for determining slump will be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. Samples for slump tests will be taken after all job-site water is added to the truck and thoroughly mixed.

2. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities, abrasion resistance, and soundness in accordance with ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.

3. The cost of laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete, will be paid by the Owner. However, Contractor shall pay the cost of any additional tests and investigations on Work that does not meet the Specifications. The laboratory will meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

4. Concrete for testing shall be furnished by Contractor at no cost to the Owner, and Contractor shall assist Engineer in obtaining samples and disposal and cleanup of excess material.

C. Inspections. Continuous inspection by a special inspector approved by the local building department having jurisdiction and by Engineer will be required where necessary to conform to code requirements. Costs of the special inspector shall be paid for by the Owner. Inspection reports shall be submitted to Engineer. The special inspector shall observe the following Work for conformance with the Drawings and Specifications:

1. During the preparation and taking of required test specimens.

2. Placing of concrete except sitework concrete fully supported on earth.

D. Field Compression Tests.

1. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first placement of each class of concrete herein and at intervals thereafter as selected by Engineer to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. Each set of test specimens will be a minimum of four cylinders.

2. Compression test specimens for concrete will be made in accordance with Section 9.2 of ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. Specimens will be 6 inches diameter by 12 inches high cylinders. Care shall be taken to protect concrete cylinders from freezing and any other damage.

3. Compression tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. One test cylinder will be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. The remaining cylinder will be held to verify test results, if needed.

E. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete.




Page 4 of 22

1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete will be according to the requirements of ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, Chapter 5 "Concrete Quality", and as indicated herein.

2. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be taken to increase the compressive strength for subsequent batches of the type of concrete affected.

3. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject to removal and replacement as part of the Work.

4. Concrete shall be designed for f’c = 4000 psi at 7 days.

F. Construction Tolerances: The Contractor shall set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations so that the concrete is within the tolerances herein. Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished from tolerances. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions indicated. Tolerances shall be in conformance with the requirements of Chapter 19 of the international Building Code.

1. The variation from required lines or grades shall not exceed ¼ inch in 10 feet and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface.

2. A rough broom finish shall be provided.




PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS

A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the Engineer, lumber brought on the Site for use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new material.

B. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.




Page 5 of 22

2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded; exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood for Concrete Forms, Class 1, and shall be edge sealed.

3. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line, and grade required. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with ¾ inch chamfers or be tooled to a ½ inch radius. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated.

D. Forms and falsework to support the roof and floor slabs shall be designed for the total dead load, plus a live load of 50 psf (minimum). The minimum design load for combined dead and live loads shall be 100 psf.

2.2 FORM TIES

A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties or other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section shall not exceed 1 1/2 inches; and such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. Form ties shall be Wrench Head Snap Ties by MeadowBurke, Snap Ties by Dayton/Richmond, or equal.

B. Removable taper ties may be used when approved by the Emgomeer. Taper ties shall be Taper Ties by MeadowBurke, Taper Ties by Dayton/Richmond, or equal.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT STEEL

A. General: Reinforcement steel for cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, for Grade 60 Billet Steel Reinforcement, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement, and the details indicated. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller shall be either furnished in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be furnished in flat sheets only.

3. Spiral reinforcement shall be cold-drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.




Page 6 of 22

B. Accessories.

1. Accessories shall include necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires, dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position reinforcement during concrete placement. Bar supports shall meet the requirements of the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice including special requirements for supporting epoxy coated reinforcing bars. Wire bar supports shall be CRSI Class 1 for maximum protection with a 1/8 inch minimum thickness of plastic coating, which extends at least ½ inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color.

2. Concrete blocks (dobies) used to support and position reinforcement steel shall have the same or higher compressive strength than required for the concrete in which they are located. Where concrete blocks are used on concrete surfaces exposed to view, the color and texture of the concrete blocks shall match that required for the finished surface. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports.

C. Epoxy coating for reinforcing and accessories, where indicated, shall conform to ASTM A 775 - Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.

D. If patching is necessary, provide a mix of cement and sand with just enough water to produce a workable mix. The surface to which the patch will bond shall be clean and free from debris, shall be of rough texture to provide a good bonding surface and shall be coated with an epoxy material especially made for bonding concrete.

2.4 MECHANICAL COUPLERS

A. Mechanical couplers shall be provided where indicated and where approved by Engineer. Couplers shall develop a tensile strength that exceeds 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars being spliced at each splice.

2.5 WELDED SPLICES

A. Welded splices shall be provided where indicated and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcement steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars that are connected.

B. Materials required to perform the welded splices to the requirements of AWS D1.4 shall be provided.

2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to prevent damage by water or breakage. Only one brand of cement shall be used. Cement reclaimed from cleaning bags or leaking containers shall not be used. Cement shall be used in the sequence of receipt of shipments.

B. Materials for the Work shall comply with the requirements of Sections 201, 203, and 204 of ACI 301- Structural Concrete for Buildings, as applicable.




Page 7 of 22

C. Storage of materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 205 of ACI 301.

D. Materials for concrete shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cement shall be standard brand Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement with Type SR (sulfate resistant) cement.

2. Water shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities. The water shall be considered potable, for the purposes of this Section only, if it meets the requirements of the local governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids (over 1000 mg/l TDS) shall not be used.

3. Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to Engineer, shall be non-reactive, and shall conform to ASTM C 33. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as indicated. Lightweight sand for fine aggregate will not be permitted.

4. Ready-mix concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.

5. Air-entraining agent meeting the requirements of ASTM C 260 – Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete shall be used. Sufficient air-entraining agent shall be used to provide a total air content of 4 to 7 percent. The Owner reserves the right, at any time, to sample and test the air-entraining agent. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. Air content shall be tested at the point of placement. Air entraining agent shall be Micro-Air by Master Builders, Daravair by W.R. Grace, Sika AEA-15 by Sika Corporation, or equal.

6. Admixtures: Admixtures may be added at Contractors option to control the set, affect water reduction, and increase workability. In either case, the addition of an admixture shall be at Contractors expense. The use of an admixture shall be subject to acceptance by Engineer. Concrete containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by Engineer. If the use of an admixture is producing an inferior end result, Contractor shall discontinue use of the admixture. Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. The required quantity of cement shall be used in the mix regardless of whether or not an admixture is used. Admixtures shall contain no free chloride ions, shall be non-toxic after 30 days, and shall be compatible with and made by the same manufacturer as the air-entraining admixture.

a. Concrete shall not contain more than one water-reducing admixture. Concrete containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by Engineer.

b. Set controlling admixture may be either with or without water-reducing properties. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently over 80 degrees F, a set retarding admixture such as Sika Corporation Plastocrete 161 MR, Master Builder Pozzolith 300R Dartard by




Page 8 of 22

Grace Construction Products, or equal shall be used. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently under 40 degrees F, a set accelerating admixture such as Sika Corporation Plastocrete 161FL, Master Builder Pozzutec 20, Polarset by Grace Construction Products, or equal shall be used.

c. Normal range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A. It shall be WRDA 79 by Grace Construction Products, Pozzolith 322-N by Master Builders, Plastocrete 161 by Sika Corporation, or equal. The quantity of admixture used and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

7. Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Materials for curing concrete shall conform to the following requirements and ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete:

1. Curing compounds shall be white-pigmented and resin-based. Sodium silicate compounds shall not be allowed. Concrete curing compound shall be Kurez VOX White Pigmented by Euclid Chemical Company, Cure R-2 by L&M Construction Chemicals, 1200-White by W.R. Meadows, or equal. When curing compound must be removed for finishes or grouting, curing compounds shall be Kurez DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Company, Masterkure-100W by ChemRex MBT, L&M Cure R by L&M Construction Chemicals, 1100-Clear by WR Meadows, or equal. Curing compounds shall meet local VOC requirements. A continuous coating without gaps or holidays is required.

2. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal thickness of 6 mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 156 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. The sheets shall be sealed and restrained at the edges.

3. Flooding is the preferred method of cure for concrete. Concrete shall be kept continuously wet and shall be made so as soon as practical after the finish is complete.

4. In no case shall the curing method be applied more than two hours after the concrete was placed.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Dampproofing agent shall be an asphalt emulsion such as Hydrocide 600 by ChemRex Sonneborn, Emulsified Asphalt by Euclid Chemical Company, Sealmastic by W. R. Meadows Inc., or equal.

B. Epoxy adhesives shall be the following products:




Page 9 of 22

1. For bonding freshly-mixed, plastic concrete to hardened concrete, Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod Epoxy Adhesive by Sika Corporation, Concresive Liquid (LPL) by Chem Rex MBT; BurkEpoxy MV by Burke by Edoco, or equal.

2. For bonding hardened concrete or masonry to steel, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation, BurkEpoxy NS by Burke by Edoco, Concresive Paste (LPL) by Chem Rex MBT; or equal.

C. Epoxy grout for grouting reinforcing bars shall be specifically formulated for such application, for the moisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled. Epoxy grout shall meet the requirements in Section 03315 - Grout.

2.9 CONCRETE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General.

1. Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water of the qualities indicated. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a concrete capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimum shrinkage, and where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximum smoothness of surface. The proportions shall be changed whenever necessary or desirable to meet the required results at no additional cost to the Owner. Mix changes shall be subject to review by the Engineer.

2. The Contractor is cautioned that the limiting parameters below are NOT a mix design. Admixtures may be required to achieve workability required by the Contractors construction methods and aggregates. The Contractor is responsible for providing concrete with the required workability.

B. Water-Cement Ratio and Compressive Strength. The minimum compressive strength and cement content of concrete shall be not less than the following tabulation.

Type of Work Class of Concrete Min

28-Day Compressive Strength, psi

Max Size Aggregate

in

Cement Content

Per cu yd, lbs

Max W/C Ratio (by weight)

Structural concrete

4,000 1 564 to 600 0.45

2.10 CONSISTENCY

A. Consistency of the concrete in successive batches shall be determined by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. The slumps shall be as follows:

Part of Work Slump (in




Page 10 of 22

All concrete unless indicated otherwise 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch

2.11 MEASUREMENT OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE

A. The amount of cement and of each separate size of aggregate entering into each batch of concrete shall be determined by direct weighing equipment furnished by Contractor and acceptable to Engineer; provided that, where batches are so proportioned as to contain an integral number of conventional sacks of cement and the cement is delivered at the mixer in the original unbroken sacks, the weight of the cement contained in each sack may be taken without weighing as 94 pounds.

2.12 MEASUREMENT OF WATER

A. The quantity of water entering the mixer shall be measured by a suitable water meter or other measuring device of a type acceptable to Engineer and capable of measuring the water in variable amounts within a tolerance of one percent.

2.13 READY-MIXED CONCRETE

A. At Contractors option, ready-mixed concrete may be used if it meets the requirements as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and the supplementary requirements as required herein, and is in accordance with ASTM C 94.

B. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the Work, and discharge shall be completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before the drum has revolved 250 revolutions, whichever comes first. In hot weather, under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F or above, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes. At Contractors option, ice may be added to the mix as a portion of the water to help control the temperature of the concrete.

C. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counter shall be actuated at the time of starting the mixer at mixing speed.

D. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. Materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing.

E. Each batch of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Work shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket furnished to Engineer in accordance with the requirements above.

F. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed




Page 11 of 22

concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the Engineer.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS

A. Forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines shall be used wherever necessary. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design of forms, and any forms that are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from the Work and replaced. A sufficient number of forms of each kind shall be available to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local, state and federal regulations. Design, construction, maintenance, preparation, and removal of forms shall be in accordance with ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete and the requirements herein.

B. Forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the established alignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Vertical Surfaces. Vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is indicated. Not less than 1 inch of concrete shall be added to the indicated thickness of a concrete member where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Permission to do this on other concrete members will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed.

B. Construction Joints. Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other than those indicated, except as may be acceptable to Engineer. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and anchor bolts shall be set in the forms where required.

C. Form Ties.

1. Embedded Ties: Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use of snap-ties, which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal, will not be permitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain




Page 12 of 22

embedded and shall terminate not less than 1 inch back from the formed face or faces of the concrete.

2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, after the taper tie is removed, the hole shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The hole shall be completely filled with non-shrink or regular cement grout or drypack. Exposed faces of walls shall have at least the outer 2 inches of the exposed face filled with a cement grout, which shall match the color and texture of the surrounding wall surface.

3.3 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to Engineer. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined as surfaces, which are permanently exposed to view. Forms shall be oiled as necessary to assure proper release.

3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this WORK shall be done with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. Members, which must support their own weight, shall not have their forms removed until they have attained at least 75 percent of the 28 day strength of the concrete or as approved by Engineer. Forms for vertical walls and columns shall remain in place at least 48 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms for parts of the WORK not specifically mentioned herein shall remain in place for periods of time as recommended in ACI 347. Any forms removed before three days after concrete placement shall receive cure as stated above.

3.5 GENERAL REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Reinforcement steel, welded wire fabric, couplers, and other appurtenances shall be fabricated, and placed in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and the supplementary requirements indicated herein.

3.6 FABRICATION

A. General.

1. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes indicated, and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings.

2. Contractor shall fabricate reinforcement bars for structures in accordance with bending diagrams, placing lists, and Placing Drawings. Said drawings, diagrams, and lists shall be prepared by the Contractor.




Page 13 of 22

3. Unless otherwise indicated, dowels shall match the size and spacing of the spliced bar.

B. Bending or Straightening: Reinforcement shall not be straightened or rebent in a manner that will injure the material. Bars shall be bent or straight as indicated. Do not use bends different from the bends indicated. Bars shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by Engineer. No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be field-bent except as indicated or specifically permitted by Engineer.

3.7 PLACING

A. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately positioned as indicated and shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections. Reinforcement steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or metal supports, spacers or metal hangers that are strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcement steel. Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to support the bars without settlement, but in no case shall such support be continuous. Concrete blocks used to support reinforcement steel shall be tied to the steel with wire ties which are embedded in the blocks. For concrete over formwork, Contractor shall provide concrete, metal, plastic, or other acceptable bar chairs and spacers.

B. The portions of accessories in contact with the formwork shall be made of concrete, plastic, or steel coated with a 1/8 inch minimum thickness of plastic, which extends at least ½ inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color.

C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the required concrete coverage.

D. Bars additional to those indicated which might be found necessary or desirable by the Contractor for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Work.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, reinforcement placing tolerances shall be within the limits specified in Section 7.5 of ACI 318 except where in conflict with the requirements of the Building Code.

F. The minimum spacing requirements of ACI 318 shall be followed for reinforcing steel.

G. Welded wire fabric reinforcement placed over horizontal forms shall be supported on slab bolsters having gray, plastic-coated standard type legs. Slab bolsters shall be spaced not more than 30 inches on centers, shall extend continuously across the entire width of the reinforcing mat, and shall support the reinforcing mat in the plane indicated.

H. Welded wire fabric placed over the ground shall be supported on wired concrete blocks (“dobies”) spaced not more than 3 feet on centers in any direction. The construction practice of placing welded wire fabric on the ground and hooking into place in the freshly placed concrete shall not be used. Reinforcing bars may also be supported on dobies at Contractors option.




Page 14 of 22

3.8 SPLICING

A. General. Reinforcement bar splices shall only be used at locations indicated. When it is necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than where indicated, the character of the splice shall be reviewed and accepted by Engineer.

B. Splices of Reinforcement.

1. The length of lap for reinforcement bars, unless otherwise indicated, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 12.15.1 for a Class B splice.

2. Welded splices shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.4.

3. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with the ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Reinforcement steel shall always be protected from conditions conductive to corrosion until concrete is placed around it.

B. The surfaces of reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in depositing concrete, reinforcing shall be reinspected and, if necessary recleaned.

3.10 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING

A. Proportioning. Proportioning of the concrete mix shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3 "Proportioning" of ACI 301.

B. Mixing. Mixing of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 7 ACI 301.

C. Slump. Slumps shall be as indicated herein.

D. Re-tempering. Re-tempering of concrete or mortar, which has partially hardened, shall not be permitted.

3.11 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING

A. General. Earth surfaces and forms shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing concrete thereon. The surface shall be free from excessive standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete.

B. Joints in Concrete. Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been stopped or interrupted so that, as determined by Engineer, the new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed, are defined as construction joints. The surfaces of horizontal joints




Page 15 of 22

shall be given a compacted, roughened surface for good bonding. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, the joint surfaces shall be cleaned of laitance, loose or defective concrete, and foreign material, and be roughened to a minimum ¼ inch amplitude. Such cleaning and roughening shall be accomplished by hydroblasting. Pools of water shall be removed from the surface of construction joints before the new concrete is placed.

C. Placing Interruptions. When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or other means, that will secure proper union with subsequent Work; provided that construction joints shall be made only where acceptable to Engineers.

D. Embedded Items.

1. No concrete shall be placed until formwork, installation of parts to be embedded, reinforcement steel, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been completed and accepted by Engineer at least 4 hours before placement of concrete. Surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with dried grout from previous usage shall be cleaned before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed.

2. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured in the forms at locations indicated or by Shop Drawings and shall be acceptable to Engineer before any concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the responsibility of Contractor.

E. Casting New Concrete against Old Concrete. Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (defined as any concrete which is greater than 3 days of age), the surface of the old concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by hydroblasting (exposing aggregate) prior to the application of an epoxy bonding agent. Application shall be according to the bonding agent manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

F. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or has been diverted by pipes, or other means, and carried out of the forms, clear of the Work. No concrete shall be deposited underwater nor shall the Contractor allow still water to rise on any concrete until the concrete has attained its initial set except as specifically allowed by Engineer. Water shall not be permitted to flow over the surface of any concrete in such manner and at such velocity as will injure the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removing ground water, if required, shall be subject to the review of Engineer but shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor.

G. Corrosion Protection. Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete that there will be a minimum of 2 inches clearance between said items and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Securing such items in position by wiring or welding to the reinforcement will not be permitted.

H. Openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and anchors shall, where practicable, be provided during the placing of concrete.




Page 16 of 22

I. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set and shall be maintained in position by templates while being embedded in concrete. Puddling of bolts shall only be allowed at discretion of Engineer

3.12 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING

A. General. Placing of concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and the requirements of this Section. No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete.

B. Non-Conforming Work or Materials. Concrete which during or before placing is found not to conform to the requirements indicated herein shall be rejected and immediately removed from the Work. Concrete which is not placed in accordance with these Specifications or which is of inferior quality shall be removed and replaced.

C. Unauthorized Placement. No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of a duly authorized representative of Engineer. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing at least 24 hours in advance of placement of any concrete.

D. Placement in Wall and Column Forms.

1. Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form nor shall concrete be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the form surfaces above the placed concrete. In such cases, some means such as the use of hoppers, tremies, and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in a manner that it may reach the place of final deposit without separation. In no case shall the free fall of concrete exceed 4 feet in walls and 8 feet in columns below the ends of ducts, chutes, or hoses, etc. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed during the process of depositing and in no case after depositing shall any portion be displaced in the forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction. Concrete in wall forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet; and care shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where such are required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while the previous layer is still soft. The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of forms so that the concrete at the places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway.

2. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To insure a level, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least ¾ inch thick shall be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be carried about ½ inch above the underside of the strip. About 1 hour after the concrete is placed, the strip shall be removed and any irregularities in the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel, and laitance shall be removed.

E. Conveyor Belts and Chutes. Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge throughout Contractors conveying, hoisting, and placing system shall be so designed and arranged that concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyor belts, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to Engineer. Chutes longer than 50 feet will not be permitted. Minimum




Page 17 of 22

slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the required consistency will readily flow in them. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. Conveyor belts and chutes shall be covered.

F. Temperature of Concrete. The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 90 degrees F or less than 40 degrees F in moderate weather, and not less than 50 degrees F in weather during which the mean daily temperature drops below 40 degrees F. Concrete ingredients shall not be heated to a temperature higher than that necessary to keep the temperature of the mixed concrete, as placed, from falling below the required minimum temperature. If concrete is placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90 degrees F, Contractor shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice, or placing at night, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete, as it is placed, below 90 degrees F. Contractor shall be entitled to no additional compensation because of the foregoing requirements.

G. Cold Weather Placement.

1. Placement of concrete shall conform to ACI-306.1-Cold Weather Concreting, and the following.

2. Earth foundations shall be free from frost or ice when concrete is placed upon or against them.

3. Maintain the concrete temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 72 hours after placement.

3.13 PUMPING OF CONCRETE

A. General. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the Contractor shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods.

B. Pumping Equipment.

1. The pumping equipment shall have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, Contractor may have a standby pump on the Site during pumping.

2. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.2R - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.

3. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced.

4. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be permitted.




Page 18 of 22

3.14 TAMPING AND VIBRATING

A. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and compacted, throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete. Vibrators shall be high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient number and with at least one standby unit as required.

B. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly. Vibrators of subsequent layers shall not be allowed to penetrate the prior layer more than 6 inches or enough to provide a continuous mass. Vibrators shall not be forced to the bottom of previously placed layers as form failure and deterioration of concrete can result. Vibrators shall be provided in sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the required results within 15 minutes after concrete of the prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall not contact the surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents.

3.15 FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES

A. General. Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of any kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions indicated are defined as tolerances and are indicated above. These tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as described herein. Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used.

B. Formed Surfaces. No treatment is required after form removal except for curing, repair of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects.

C. Unformed Surfaces. After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, unformed top surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs shall be brought to a uniform surface with suitable tools. Whenever the air temperature exceeds 85 degrees F or the wind speed exceeds 25 mph at the time of placement, the concrete shall be treated as follows. After preliminary screeding the concrete shall be tamped with rectangular tool approximately 8” x 36” in size with an expanded metal surface. The purpose of this tamp is to lower coarse aggregate and improve the finish surface. Immediately after the concrete has received final screeded, it shall be treated with a liquid evaporation retardant. The retardant shall be used again after each WORK operation as necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. The classes of finish for unformed concrete surfaces are designated and defined as follows:

1. Finish U1: Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface with surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8 inch. No further special finish is required.




Page 19 of 22

2. Finish U2: After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, surfaces shall be float finished with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades. Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry cement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted. Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. Surface irregularities shall not exceed ¼ inch. Joints and edges shall be tooled where indicated or as determined by the Engineer.

3. Finish U3: After the Finish U2 surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel troweling shall be performed with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture of the floated surface and produce a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks. The finish shall be smooth and free of irregularities.

4. Finish U4: Trowel the Finish U3 surface to remove local depressions or high points. In addition, the surface shall be given a rough broom finish with brooming perpendicular to the direction of traffic unless otherwise indicated. The resulting surface shall be rough enough to provide a nonskid finish.

D. Unformed surfaces shall be finished according to the following schedule:

UNFORMED SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE

Area Finish Pavement slabs U4

3.16 CURING AND DAMPPROOFING

A. General. Concrete shall be cured for not less than 7 days after placing, in accordance with the methods indicated below for the different parts of the Work.

Surface to be Cured or Damp proofed Method

Unstripped forms 1

Construction joints between footings and walls, and between floor slab and columns

2

Encasement and duct bank concrete and thrust blocks 3

Concrete surfaces not specifically provided for elsewhere in this Paragraph

4

Buried slabs and backfilled walls 5




Page 20 of 22

B. Method 1: Wooden forms shall be wetted immediately after concrete has been placed and shall be kept wet with water until removal. If steel forms are used, the exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet until the forms are removed. If forms are removed within 7 days of placing the concrete, curing shall be continued in accordance with Method 4 below.

C. Method 2: The surface shall be covered with burlap mats, which shall be kept wet with water for the duration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been placed. No curing compound shall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2.

D. Method 3: The surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours or more than 24 hours after the concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage the concrete shall not begin until at least 7 days after placement of concrete.

E. Method 4: The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound.

1. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions at a maximum coverage rate of 200 sq. ft. per gallon and in such a manner as to cover the surface with a uniform film that will seal thoroughly.

2. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the seal during the 7 day curing period. If the seal is damaged or broken before the expiration of the curing period, the break shall be repaired immediately by the application of additional curing compound over the damaged portion.

3. Wherever curing compound has been applied by mistake to surfaces against which concrete subsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, compound shall be entirely removed by wet sandblasting just prior to the placing of new concrete.

4. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and within 2 hours after removal of forms. Repairs required to be made to formed surfaces shall be made within the said 2 hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs, which cannot be made within the said 2 hour period, shall be delayed until after the curing compound has been applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing compound has been applied, the area involved shall first be wet-sandblasted to remove the curing compound.

5. During the curing period, no traffic of any nature and no depositing of any materials, temporary or otherwise, shall be permitted on surfaces coated with curing compound. Foot traffic and the depositing of materials may be allowed after 3 days if the surface is covered with 5/8 inch plywood placed over polyethylene sheets.

F. Method 5: This method applies to both buried slabs and walls to be backfilled.

1. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of at least 7 days beginning immediately after the concrete has reached final set or forms have been removed.




Page 21 of 22

2. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing medium, the entire surface shall be kept damp by applying water through nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred or washed.

3. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during the curing period. The curing medium shall be weighted or otherwise held substantially in contact with the concrete surface to prevent being dislodged by wind or any other causes. Edges shall be continuously held in place.

4. The curing blankets and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or other means both during and after normal working hours.

5. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing period, the curing medium shall be removed, any dry spots shall be rewetted, and curing compound shall be immediately applied in accordance with Method 4 above.

6. The Contractor shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation to avoid damage to the Work.

7. Damp proofing: The exterior surfaces of buried roof slabs and backfilled walls shall be damp proofed as follows.

a. Immediately after completion of curing, the surface shall be sprayed with a damp proofing agent consisting of an asphalt emulsion. (See Section 9800) Application shall be in two coats. The first coat shall be diluted to one-half strength by the addition of water and shall be sprayed on so as to provide a maximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon of dilute solution. The second coat shall consist of an application of the undiluted material, and shall be sprayed on so as to provide a maximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon. Damp proofing material shall be as indicated above.

G. The Contractor may submit alternate methods of curing which maintain the concrete in a continuously wet condition for acceptance by the Engineer.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect concrete against injury until final acceptance.

B. Fresh concrete shall be protected from damage due to rain, hail, sleet, or snow. The Contractor shall provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever precipitation is imminent or occurring.

3.18 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS

A. As soon as forms are removed, exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully examined and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the Engineer. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be permitted. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar




Page 22 of 22

depression defects shall be repaired as indicated below. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects, shall be completely removed and replaced. Repairs and replacements shall be performed promptly.

B. Repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed Work will conform to the requirements of this Section as applicable, using approved methods which will not disturb the bond, causes sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Surfaces of repairs shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in the repaired section.

3.19 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE

A. The Contractor shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed Work, which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete.

- END OF SECTION -


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park

New Orleans, Louisiana © MA EDR N14023\14027

Bid Set 27 September 2017

Section 033033 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Page 1 of 15

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: The work to be done under this section of the specifications includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for cast-in-place concrete including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, finishes, as indicated on drawings and herein specified.

1.2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Includes the following:

A. Foundations and footings.

B. Structural Slabs-on-grade.

C. Columns, Girders, Beams and Elevated Slabs.

D. Foundation walls.

E. Equipment pads and bases.

1. Include all concrete pads and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment where indicated. Unless otherwise shown, these pads shall include concrete of the size required to support the equipment purchased and 500 lbs. of reinforcing steel per cubic yard of concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.

C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. Reproductions made from contract documents will not be allowed. Submit one (1) electronic print for review and comment. The Engineer will have up to ten (10) working days from the time of receipt of the submittal to complete his review and return the submittal to the Architect. Review of shop drawings by the Architect/Engineer will be for general compliance with contract documents. No responsibility will be assumed for correctness of dimensions, and quantities.

D. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions.






Page 2 of 15

E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.

F. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301-10, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," current edition. 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice," current

edition.

B. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to review concrete mix designs for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. The testing lab shall be in compliance with ASTM E 329 “Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing” and ASTM C 1077 “Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation”.

2. The testing laboratory shall submit a certificate of accreditation and the scope of accreditation that indicates compliance with the above standards.

C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Retesting of rejected materials for installed Work shall be done at Contractor's expense.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.






Page 3 of 15

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 1064, welded steel wire fabric. Flat sheets only. Rolls are not permitted.

D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1).

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete.

1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling.

2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect.

C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.

D. Water: Potable.






Page 4 of 15

E. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type approved by Architect.

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type C or E.

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder conforming to ASTM E1745, Class A, 15 mil., with a permeance of less than 0.01 Perms. Include manufacturer’s recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. Material shall be by Stego Wrap, Raven Industries, W.R. Meadows, or approved equal.

B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

D. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g per liter.

E. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

F. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.

G. Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based compound for applications from 1 inch thick to feathered edges.

H. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.

I. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.

J. Waterstops: Volclay RX-101RH by CETCO, or approved equal.






Page 5 of 15

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The independent testing agency shall review and approve the proposed mix design.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been submitted to Architect.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete or light weight concrete with the 28-day compressive strength as indicated on drawings.

D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Not more than 4 inches.

E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 40 deg F (10 deg C) and falling.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. Ice can be added to concrete so that delivery time can remain at 1-1/2 hours.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL






Page 6 of 15

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:

1. Provide Class A tolerances for other concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.

D. Formwork for Grade Beams and Pile Caps: Provide vertical formwork at the perimeter of grade beams and pile caps. Contractor shall install formwork as described here-in to ensure plumbness of cast vertical surfaces.

E. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION






Page 7 of 15

A. Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643. 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete

placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever possible.

2. Vapor barrier shall be neatly placed. Follow the profile of the bottom of the slab and beams, and be in intimate contact with the fill. Stop at impediments such as piles, dowels, and waterstops.

3. If arranging placement of vapor barrier perimeter/edge seals prior to placement of concrete, seal vapor barrier to scheduled wet-cast slab perimeter/edge using Manufacturer’s recommended adhesive product designed for this use, and remove dirt, debris, and mud from this adhesive product prior to concrete placement.

4. Seal vapor barrier to footing/grade beam with double sided tape, termination bar, or both. 5. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape. 6. Apply tape to a clean and dry vapor barrier. 7. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. 8. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent

utilities. 9. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6

inches and taping all sides with tape.

3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.

1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.

D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

1. Install only flat sheets. Rolls are not permitted.

F. Where not specifically detailed on the drawings, support slab top reinforcing bars with continuous #4 reinforcing bars. Slab top reinforcing bars less than 6 feet in length shall have






Page 8 of 15

two support bars and slab top reinforcing bars greater than 6 feet in length shall have support bars spaced at no more than 3’-0” o.c. These bars shall be equally spaced along the length of the slab top reinforcing bars.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide keyways as indicated on drawings or at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.

C. Provide waterstops at all construction joints in areas indicated on the drawings.

D. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.

E. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.

F. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement.

1. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact

with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions.






Page 9 of 15

2. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified.

1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.

D. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.

2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Floor Slab Tolerance: Floor finish tolerances of floor slabs shall conform to the

requirements of the specified finish floor manufacturers, and in accordance with ACI 117 and ASTM E 1155 Standard Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness using the F-Number System.






Page 10 of 15

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.

1. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces to be exposed to view, covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections. These projections shall be completely removed and smoothed. Repair all other surface defects in accordance with Concrete Surface Repairs, as specified herein.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.

1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.






Page 11 of 15

C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance.

D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom.

E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive old or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.






Page 12 of 15

B. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.

1. Provide moisture curing by the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.

b. Use continuous water-fog spray.

c. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed

in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and Curb as follows: a. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations

are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

b. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete.

C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.

1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover,

unless otherwise directed.

3.13 REMOVING FORMS






Page 13 of 15

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.

C. Comply with ACI 301-10, Chapter 2, Article 2.3.3 – Reshoring and Backshoring.

3.14 REUSING FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.

B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.

1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids, and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to Solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush






Page 14 of 15

out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.

1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall include the following, as directed by Architect.

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.






Page 15 of 15

5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

C. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

END OF SECTION



Section 03 31 13 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 03 31 13

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Furnish and install the concrete formwork as required by the concrete outlines shown

and indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section, complete. 1.02 FORM DESIGN Provide the design of all forms for this work. Formwork shall comply with ANSI A10.9

and OSHA Construction Standards, Part 1926, Subpart Q, Concrete, Concrete Forms, and Shoring. In addition, the form designs shall meet the requirements of ACI 347.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Do not provide submittals for the structural design of forms. B. Form Tie Assemblies: Manufacturer's product data sheets fully describing the form tie

assemblies. C. Form Releasing Agent: Manufacturer's product data sheets fully describing the form

coating. D. Plywood Panels: Certification that the plywood panels for use on this work meets the

specified standard. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION All form materials and accessories shall be stored above ground on framework or

blocking, shall be protected from precipitation and shall have adequate air circulation and ventilation.







Page 2 of 6

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Form Finish: Forms for this finish shall be applied to surfaces specified in

Section 03300 of these Specifications. Some of these surfaces will receive a rubbed stone finish as specified in Section 03300 of these Specifications.

1. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, dense, uniform texture on the

concrete. Form facing shall be one of the following: a. Plywood, meeting the requirements of U.S. Department of Commerce

Product Standard (PS). PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood, B-B Concrete Form Panels. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly with the number of seams kept to a practical minimum.

b. Patented forms may be used, subject to acceptance by the Engineer,

provided they produce a smooth, even surface. This acceptance is for the finish these forms will leave on the contact surfaces and will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the design and structural soundness of the forms. Patented forms shall be lined with the specified plywood. Plywood panels and form liners shall not be used more than three times unless further use is acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Rough Form Finish: Forms for this finish shall be applied to the surfaces specified in

Section 03300 of these Specifications. Forms for this finish may be the same as specified for the Smooth Form Finish or may be constructed of used plywood panels, unlined steel forms or straight dressed lumber.

2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Form ties for use in all liquid containment structure walls shall be one of the following: 1. Form clamp assemblies with smooth tie rods with a waterstop at their centers;

or “she bolt” tie assemblies with a waterstop at their centers.

2. Both of the assemblies shall permit tightening of the forms and be of such type that leaves no tie metal, or any other tie material, within 1-1/2-inch of the surface after use. The assemblies shall provide cone-shaped depressions at the surface of the concrete at least 1-inch in diameter to allow filling and patching with the specified grout.

B. Form ties for use in all other walls shall be one of the assemblies specified in Article

2.02, Paragraph A, except that waterstops are not required. C. Form releasing agents for liquid containment vessels in water treatment plants shall

be equal to Sealtight Duogard by W.R. Meadows.




Page 3 of 6

D. Form releasing agents shall permit coating the concrete surface without additional surface preparation.

E. Form releasing agents shall be a non-staining form coating compound. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Formwork shall be in accordance with ACI 347 and as follows: 1. Forms shall conform to shape, lines, and dimensions of members indicated and

shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent leakage of mortar. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together so as to maintain position and shape. Construct forms so that they can be removed readily without hammering or prying against the concrete. Forms for exposed concrete shall be carefully made and accurately placed to obtain correct shape and lines.

2. Joints shall be butted tight. Arrangements of panels shall be orderly and

symmetrical, and use of small pieces shall be avoided. Forms shall be chamfered 1-inch for external corners of concrete, including top of walls, which will be exposed to view in the finished work.

3. Provide adequate formwork in its entirety. Forms shall safely support loads

they will sustain and shall maintain their dimensional and surface correctness to produce members required by the Drawings. Form ties shall be spaced close enough to avoid bulges and variations in the required cross-sectional dimensions shown on the Drawings for the members being cast.

4. Box out for chases, recesses or other openings required in the completed work. 5. Install all the items (sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchors, etc.), to be supported by

the formwork as required by the work. 6. Install pipe sleeves, wall pipes and wall sleeves, as shown or specified, for all

piping penetrating walls and slabs. The use of block-outs in walls is prohibited. Pipe sleeves shall be used in slabs for plumbing pipes and wiring conduits.

7. Provide a sufficient number of cleanout doors at the base of walls and columns

to facilitate cleaning and the application of grout to the column bases. 8. The use of reinforcing steel, partially embedded in concrete, as toe pins or form

spacers is prohibited. 3.02 TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES A. Variation from Plumb




Page 4 of 6

1. In the Lines and Surfaces of Columns, Piers, Walls:

a. In any 10 Feet of Height: 1/4-inch (walls 1/2-inch). b. Maximum for the Entire Height: 1-inch. 2. For Exposed Corner Columns, Construction and Expansion Joint Grooves and

Other Conspicuous Lines: a. In any 20 Foot Height: 1/4-inch. b. Maximum for the Entire Height: 1/2-inch. B. Variation from the Level or from the Grades Shown on the Drawings: 1. In Slab Soffits, Beam Soffits and Tops of Slabs, Measured Before Removal of

Supporting Shores: a. In any 10 Foot Length: 1/4-inch. b. In any Bay or in any 20 Foot Length: 3/8-inch. c. Maximum for the Entire Length: 3/4-inch. 2. In Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous

Lines: a. In any Bay or in any 20 Foot Length: 1/4-inch. b. Maximum for the Entire Length: 1/2-inch. C. Variation of the Linear Building Lines from Established Position in Plan and Related

Position of Columns, Walls and Partitions: 1. In any Bay: 1/2-inch. 2. In any 20 Foot Length: 1/2-inch. 3. Maximum for the Entire Length: 1-inch. D. Variation in the Sizes and Location of Sleeves for Plumbing Pipes and Electrical

Conduits, Floor Openings and Wall Openings: +1/4-inch. E. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions of Columns and Beams and in the Thickness

of Slabs and Walls: -1/4-inch, +1/2-inch. F. Variation in Sizes of Pipe Sleeves, Wall Pipes and Wall Sleeves: None.




Page 5 of 6

G. Variation in Location of Pipe Sleeves, Wall Pipes and Wall Sleeves: +1/8-inch. H. Footings 1. Variations in Dimensions in Plan: -1/2-inch, +2-inches. 2. Misplacement or Eccentricity: Two percent of the footing width in the direction

of misplacement but not more than: 2-inches. 3. Thickness: Decrease in specified thickness - none; increase in specified

thickness 25 percent unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 4. Tolerances above apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of

vertical reinforcing steel, dowels or embedded items. I. Variation in Steps 1. In a Flight of Stairs: a. Rise: +1/4-inch. b. Tread: +1/4-inch. 2. In Consecutive Steps: a. Rise: +0-inch, -1/8-inch. b. Tread: +1/8-inch. 3.03 APPLICATION OF FORM COATING Before the placing of reinforcing, faces of all forms to be in contact with the concrete

shall receive a thorough coating of the liquid form-releasing agent specified, applied in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 INSPECTION Inspect all the work in accordance with Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications. 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Forms shall be removed in a manner that will insure the complete integrity of the structure. The forms and shoring shall remain in place for the following minimum periods of time after the casting of the concrete is completed (see chart on next page):

Form Removal, Days Shoring, Days




Page 6 of 6

Form Removal, Days Shoring, Days

Beams and Slabs (Soffits) 7 14

Walls 1 0

Columns 1 0

B. Formwork for beam and slab soffits shall be designed so that they can be removed

without removal of sufficient original shores to adequately support the work until such time that the concrete strength reaches its specified 28 day strength.

C. Removal of forms shall be coordinated with the selected specified method of curing

concrete. D. Wood forms shall be completely removed from all the work to avoid termite

infestation.

END OF SECTION


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park New Orleans, Louisiana

Bid Set21 July 2017

© MA EDR N14023\14027

Section 042200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT

Page 1 of 11

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Concrete masonry units.2. Mortar and grout materials.3. Reinforcing steel.4. Water management flashing and weeps.

B. Related Sections:1. 014500 – Structural Testing Inspection and Quality Assurance: Special

inspection requirements.2. 047200 – Cast Stone Masonry3. 055000 – Metal Fabrications4. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Sealant and backer rod.

1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compressive Strength: Provide unit masonry that develops a minimum installed designcompressive strength f'm with special inspection of 1,500 psi. Develop the compressivestrength of masonry by meeting the minimum unit and mortar strengths specified in thedocuments or by prism testing in accordance with ASTM C1314.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit product data for masonry unit, masonry reinforcing and othermanufactured products.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement ofmasonry reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice forDetailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules, splices, diagrams ofbent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies asrequired for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. Showadjacent construction assemblies including building envelope components.

D. Material Certificates: Submit written material certificates signed by manufacturer andContractor certifying that each material complies with requirements specified.1. Each type of concrete masonry unit required.2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.3. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of

manufacturer, brand and type.4. Anchors, ties, fasteners, and metal accessories.5. Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each type, provide statement of average

net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



Bid Set 21 July 2017

© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 2 of 11

E. Product Test Reports: Submit the following test reports from a qualified independenttesting laboratory certifying strengths of materials:1. Concrete Masonry Units: Submit compressive strength of concrete masonry

units when tested per ASTM C140.2. Mortar: Submit compressive strength of mortar when tested per ASTM C270

and evaluated per ASTM C780.3. Grout: Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.

F. Qualification Data: Submit evidence of compliance with Quality Assurance requirementsfor installer qualifications.

G. Samples: Submit full size samples in selected colors of integral colored concretemasonry units, split face concrete masonry units, and pre-glazed concrete masonry unitsfor approval.


A. Single Source for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality fromone manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producerfor each aggregate.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where fire-resistance ratings are required forconcrete masonry work, provide materials and construction which are identical to thoseof assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in compliance withASTM E119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization or by another means,as acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

C. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be Commercially Licensed Masonry Contractor asdefined by the LA R.S. 37. This requirement will not be waived.

D. Special Inspection and Testing: Refer to article entitled "Field Quality Control" of thisSection for special inspection and testing which will be performed by IndependentTesting Agency.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in Section 016000 – ProductRequirements.

B. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. Deliver exterior concretemasonry units on wood pallets, polyethylene protective wrapped. Store and handlemasonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, contaminants,corrosion or other causes.

C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location. Storeaggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained andcontamination avoided.

D. Store reinforcing steel in a manner which will ensure that no damage shall occur to itfrom moisture, dirt, grease, or any other cause that might impair bond. Identification ofsteel shall be maintained after bundles are broken.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 3 of 11

A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover top of walls and projections withwaterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry whenwork is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and holdcover securely in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be leftexposed. Remove immediately any mortar and soil that comes in contact with suchmasonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means ofcoverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

C. In exposed work, do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration orother defects which might be visible or cause staining in the finished work.

D. Cold Weather Protection: Do not lay masonry when temperature of air or masonrymaterials is less than 40 degrees F without taking precautions to prevent damage tomasonry such as heating of materials, enclosures and auxiliary heat, etc. in accordancewith IBC Section 2104 Construction requirements. No masonry work shall be allowedwhen air temperature is at 32 degrees F or below. Adding of anti-freeze ingredients shallnot be permitted.1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.2. Remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top

surface is dry to the touch.3. Remove masonry determined to be damaged by freezing conditions.4. Comply with "Quality Control All-Weather Construction" from Masonry Institute of

America.5. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following

manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures.a. 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Protect masonry from rain or snow for at

least 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.b. 32 degrees F to 20 degrees F: Completely cover masonry with weather-

resistive insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48hours for grouted masonry.

E. Hot Weather Protection: Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials and usecool water for mortar whenever ambient air temperature is 90 degrees F, or greater, etc.in accordance with IBC Section 2104 Construction requirements. Do not spread mortarbeds more than 4 feet ahead of masonry.1. At mean daily temperatures of 100 degrees F, or above, or exceeding 90

degrees F with a wind in excess of 8 miles per hour, provide protection by usingfog spray until masonry is damp, repeat at least three times a day until themasonry is three days old.

2. Comply with "Quality Control All-Weather Construction" from Masonry Institute ofAmerica

F. Rainy Weather: Do work only under cover. Take particular care to see that backing andsubstrate surfaces are dry and free from surface moisture.

G. Furnish and install all temporary bracing required to prevent damage or stress tomasonry work by reason of wind or other loads which may be superimposed on thework. All bracing shall be rigid, secure, and solidly anchored against movement. Removewhen no longer required. Be solely responsible for any damage incurred by failure toproperly brace and protect against external forces.




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 4 of 11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage ofunits to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Donot use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements forfire resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, byequivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated.1. Sizes: Nominal dimensions as indicated on drawings.2. Moisture Content: Linear dry shrinkage shall not exceed 0.065 percent when

tested in accordance with ASTM C426 within 12 months prior to delivery of units.

B. Concrete Masonry Units typical for Interior Surfaces: Provide units complying withcharacteristics indicated below for grade, type, exposed face, and weight classification.1. Grade and Weight Classification: ASTM C90; Medium Weight units. At

Contractor’s option, lightweight units may be used for interior areas.2. Color: Provide manufacturer’s standard gray color.3. Exposed Faces: Units shall have smooth face finish.4. Sizes (Depth): As indicated on the drawings.

C. Special Shapes: Provide special shapes where required for bond beams, lintels,corners, and other special conditions whether or not specifically indicated on thedrawings. Provide bond beam units at courses requiring horizontal reinforcing. Providelintel units at door, window, louver and other openings as indicated on drawings.1. Finish exposed ends of corner blocks to match exposed face.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I (low alkaline), except Type III may be usedfor cold weather construction. Use natural grey color cement.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404; maximum 3/8 inch size.

E. Water-Reducing Admixture (grout, Contractor's option): ASTM C494, Type A (lowrange) or Type F (high range).

F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compoundedfor use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance inmasonry mortar.




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 5 of 11

G. Water: Clean and potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT & ANCHORS

A. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60; sizesas indicated on drawings. Shop-fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to bebent or hooked.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, for Type S mortar (averagecompressive strength at 28 days of 1,800 psi).1. Do not add other admixtures, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. If

approved, additives may only be used in mortar to compensate for weatherconditions in obtaining a workable mix. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.

B. Mortar Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water andaggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards formixing time and water content.1. Measure ingredients accurately (a measuring box must be used).2. Mortar that has stiffened because of loss of water through evaporation may be

re-tempered only with approval of the Testing Agency by adding water to restorethe proper consistency and workability.

3. Mortar which has reached its initial set, or that has not been used within 2 hoursafter mixing shall be discarded.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476 for grout used in construction ofreinforced unit masonry; provide grout of consistency (fine or coarse) at time ofplacement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. Combine andthoroughly mix cementitious materials, aggregates and water mechanically for at least 5minutes using the established mix design. Grout shall have a minimum compressivestrength of 2,000 psi at 28 days.1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in least horizontal dimension; use

coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension.2. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required

proportions can be accurately controlled and maintained.3. Mix grout with sufficient water to obtain a fluid pouring consistency without

segregation of materials. A low or high range water reducer may be used.4. Slump shall be between 8 and 11 inches at point of placement.5. Sika Grout Aid Type II shall be used and shall be added to the grout after

delivery, but before placement per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Noother additives or other chemicals are to be added to the design mix withoutapproval by the Architect and Structural Engineer.

6. Grout which has hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement shall notbe used, but in no case shall grout be used 1 hour after initial mixing water hasbeen added to the dry ingredients.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D2287, Type PVC65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateralstability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 6 of 11

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affectingperformance of the unit masonry. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected.

B. Coordinate rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of plumbing,electrical or other features integral with the masonry construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Establish lines, levels and coursing indicated; protect from displacement.

B. Cut masonry units using motor-driven, dry cutting saws designed to cut masonry withclean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern andto fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible.

C. Do not wet concrete masonry units.

D. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installing their work in order toavoid cutting and patching. Provide openings for ducts, pipe, structural members, andother penetrations. Cut neatly around all ducts, pipes, etc., where required. Mortar solidthe joints between cut openings and face of pipe sleeves, conduit runs and ductwork sothat no opening exists through the masonry.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls do not exceed 1/4 inch in10 feet, or 3/8 inch in a story height not to exceed 20 feet. For external corners andother conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum. Forvertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 1/2 inchmaximum.

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels and other conspicuoushorizontal lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 1/2 inch in40 feet or more. For top surface of walls do not exceed 1/8 inch between adjacent floorelements in 10 feet, or 1/16 inch within width of a single unit.

C. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by morethan plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more thanplus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3.4 LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns withuniform joint widths and to accurately locate openings, returns and offsets. Avoid theuse of less-than half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 7 of 11

locations. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.

B. Pattern Bond: Lay masonry units in bond pattern indicated with vertical joints in eachcourse centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated ondrawings. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special-shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, lintels, bond beams andother special conditions.1. Bond Pattern: Running Bond.2. Maintain vertical continuity of cores or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced

and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provideminimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keepcells free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforcedcores or cells.

3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special unitsto allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars.

C. Extent: Limit extent of masonry construction to sections which do not exceed themaximum pour requirements as hereinafter specified. Provide temporary dams orbarriers to control horizontal flow of grout at ends of wall sections. Build dams full heightof grout pour. If masonry units are used, do not bond into permanent masonry Wythes.Remove temporary dams after completion of grout pour.

D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do notpound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. Ifadjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.

E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; donot tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, and remove loose masonry units andmortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

F. Built-In Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and othersections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar.2. Where built-in items, including anchors are to be embedded in cores of hollow

masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar orgrout into core.

3. Should cuts be required in face shell of units for the passage of conduit, boxes,etc., the entire core at the cut out shall be filled with mortar.

G. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor orroof structure above unless otherwise indicated.1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of

structure above.2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition.

Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubesdown into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchorrod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces oftile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structureabove approaches final position.




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 8 of 11

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside ofstructure above to comply with Section 078400 "Fire-stopping and SmokeSeals."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses where

adjacent to cells to be filled with grout.3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full

mortar bed, including areas under cells.

B. Joints: Maintain joint widths, except for minor variations required to maintain bondalignment. Lay concrete masonry units with 3/8 inch joints. Cut joints flush for masonrywalls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, including masonrywalls behind face brick veneer. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointerlarger than joint thickness.

3.6 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Do not usereinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on final shop drawings, or bars withreduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing as indicated on the drawings. Theminimum clear distance between bars and masonry units shall be 1/2 inch; and betweenparallel bars, the minimum clear distance shall be one bar diameter. Provide bars invertical and horizontal directions as indicated. Reinforcement shall be held in place withcentering clips or caging devices. Support and secure bars against displacement;secure vertical bars near each end and at intermediate intervals not exceeding 192 bardiameters. Set horizontal reinforcement in a full bed of mortar.

C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptableto the Architect. Provide contact lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. In splicingvertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. Lap ends notless than 40 bar diameters, unless otherwise indicated, or required by governing code.

D. Secure reinforcement to insure final position after grouting in accordance with the designrequirements.

E. Bends, extensions, etc. shall comply with IBC requirements.

F. Tolerances:1. Tolerances for the placement of steel in walls and flexural elements shall be ±1/2

inch when the distance from the centerline of steel to the opposite face ofmasonry, d, is equal to 8 inches or less, ±1 inch for d equal to 24 inches or lessbut greater than 8 inches, and ±1-1/4 inch for d greater than 24 inches.

2. Place vertical bars within 2 inches of the required location along the length of thewall.

3. If it is necessary to move bars more than one bar diameter or a distanceexceeding the tolerance stated above to avoid interference with other reinforcing




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 9 of 11

steel, conduits, or embedded items, notify the Architect/Engineer for acceptance of the resulting arrangement of bars.

3.7 CONTROL JOINTS

A. General: Install control joint gaskets to separate segments of concrete masonry toprevent cracking and control joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Donot allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry by installing preformed control-joint gasketsdesigned to fit standard sash block. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar forapplication of sealant.

C. Control Joint Application: Install in typical locations as follows or as indicated inDrawings:1. Wall Opening.2. Changes in wall height or thickness.3. Wall Intersections.4. A distance of not over one-half the allowable joint spacing from all corners.5. Vertical panel joints, not more than 46 feet on centers, unless otherwise

indicated.

3.8 GROUTING

A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Grout all cells andspaces containing reinforcing bars, including non-reinforced cells where indicated ondrawings and as required to achieve the required fire rating; elsewhere, grout cells andspaces which contain reinforcing steel and build-in items.

B. Low-Lift Grouting:1. Use low-lift grouting technique for all reinforced masonry construction and place

in lifts not to exceed 5 feet in height.2. Construct low-lift masonry by placing reinforcement, laying masonry units and

pouring grout as the work progresses.3. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and clear area of 8 square inches

in vertical cores to be grouted.4. Place vertical reinforcement bars and supports prior to laying of masonry units.

Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing.5. Do not lay masonry more than 12 inches above maximum grout pour height.6. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute and consolidate immediatelyby rodding; do not use trowels or mechanical vibrators. Place grout continuously;

do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at top of wall.

7. Wet surface of preceding grout pour before placing new pour.8. Bond Beams: Stop grout pour 1/2 inch below the top of the masonry. Place

horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections. Placegrout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.

C. Cleaning of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Removedust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials fromgrout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 10 of 11

structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes (if used) with masonry units to contain the grout.

D. Time Between Laying of Masonry and Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height ofmasonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonryunits and breaking of mortar bond; at a minimum, do no grouting of masonry for aminimum of 4 hours after completion of laying. Install shores and bracing, if required,before starting grouting operations.

E. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beamcourse to within 1 inch of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry.

3.9 MOISTURE CONTROL DETAILS

A. Strike grout off top of bond beam to slope ¼ inch per foot toward exterior.

B. Mortar Control: Install mortar control component in first course above flashing/weepingsystem.

3.10 REPAIR AND POINTING

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained orotherwise damaged, or if units do not blend with adjoining units as intended. Providenew units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminateevidence of replacement.

B. During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar.Point-up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat,uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.

3.11 FINAL CLEANING AND SEALING

A. Cleaning: Clean masonry at the end of each day's work and after final pointing by drybrushing; remove mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrapehoes or chisels. Interior masonry which is scheduled to receive paint must beacceptable to trade applying said paint or coating material.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: All masonry work shall be subject to special inspection and testing by anIndependent Testing Agency in conformance with Code and local governing authoritiesrequirements, and as specified herein; requirements for testing and inspections asspecified in this Section are minimums. Refer to Section 014500 – Structural Testing,Inspection, And Quality Assurance for requirements pertaining to services, reports,payments, Contractor's responsibilities, etc.

B. Special Inspection: Independent Testing Agency will perform the following periodicspecial inspection per IBC Section 1704.5, including following:1. Inspect in-place Work for compliance with specified workmanship requirements;

and inspect the overall progress of the Work for water resistant integrity.2. Check reinforcing steel in-place.3. Inspect grout space immediately prior to grouting.4. Inspect grouting operations.




© MA EDR N14023\14027


Page 11 of 11

5. Construction of mortar joints.

C. Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article will be performed by theTesting Agency during construction for each 2,500 square feet of wall area or portionthereof.1. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C270 and

evaluation per ASTM C780 “Standard Test Method for Preconstruction andConstruction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry”;Annex 4 for evaluation of mortar aggregate (M-A) ratio, and Annex A5 forevaluation of mortar water content.

2. Grout compressive strength will be sampled and tested per ASTM C1019.

D. Prism Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will betested per ASTM C1314. Prepare one (1) set of prisms for testing at 7 days and one (1)set for testing at 28 days.

E. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: In absence of other indications of non-compliancewith requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from constructionquality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.

END OF SECTION


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park New Orleans, Louisiana © MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cast stone panels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Mock Up Requirements."

2. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3. Division 07 Section “Water Repellents.”

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute.

B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Build full-scale mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution in accordance with Division 01 Section “Mock-Up Requirements.”


A. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.

1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.



Bid Set 30 June 2017

Section 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 2 of 5

2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast stone color indicated.

C. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.

D. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

E. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect.

1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used.

3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

F. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material.

1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M.

2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.





Page 3 of 5

G. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2.2 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hanover Architectural Products

2. Stone Castle Industries, Inc.

B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.

C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch.

2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch.

3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater.

4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.

E. Cure units as follows:

1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours.

2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:

a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above. b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above. c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above. d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.

F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

G. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.



Bid Set 30 June 2017

Section 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 4 of 5

B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place.

2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints.

B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between cast stone units and adjacent construction; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.

C. Fill anchor holes with sealant.

1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels.

D. Keep joints free rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5536&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456826167&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd






Page 5 of 5

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.

1. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

D. Final Cleaning: Clean exposed cast stone as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone.

2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

3. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

4. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

5. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Hall A Renovation New Orleans, Louisiana © MA EDR N10.043.00\10016


Section 05 0514 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS FOR METAL

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Baked on fluoropolymer coating systems (PVDF), factory applied, on aluminum surfaces specified in respective technical Sections of this Specification.

2. Repair or refinishing of damaged finishes.


1. 055813 – Column Covers.

2. 057500 – Decorative Formed Metal.

3. 074113 – Metal Roof Panels.

4. 074216 – Metal Plate Wall Panels.

5. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

6. 084113 – Aluminum Entrance Doors.

7. 084400 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall.

8. 099600 – High Performance Coatings for colors of coatings indicated as a match to specified PVDF.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): 2605-98 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and technical data for each coating system.

1. Application instructions including mixing, surface preparation, compatible primers and topcoats, recommended wet and dry film thickness, recommended application methods.

2. Manufacturer's recommendations for use; include limitations.

B. Qualification Data - Applicator: Submit certification from the manufacturer stating that the applicator is an approved applicator of the material for work of this Section.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each specified finish in selected colors on 12 inch long sections of extrusions and 12 inch square heavy gage sheet metal. Furnish additional samples as required until colors and finishes are approved. Label samples with color number, name and date.

D. Coating Touch-Up Procedures: Submit coating manufacturer's recommended touch-up procedures and instructions.

E. Warranty:

1. Draft: Submit draft of warranty with required inclusions for review. Submit draft warranty with product data.




Section 05 0514 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS FOR METAL Page 2 of 5

2. Submit signed warranty at time of Project Closeout; include warranty in "Warranties Manual".


A. Fluoropolymer Coating Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced coating applicator that is approved by fluoropolymer coating manufacturer. If requested, coating applicator shall furnish test results of previously tested production specimens within the last 6 months showing conformance with AAMA 2605

1. Coating system shall be factory applied and oven baked on pretreated and primed metal substrates. Coating on various portions of the work shall match in color and visual texture.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Wrap finished parts and package in such a way that exposed surfaces are protected.

1. Do not handle freshly painted members until paint has cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for "to handle" curing. Adjust time requirements for ambient and surface temperature and relative humidity.

2. Packing and Shipping: Provide protective wrappings, cartons, dunnage between members, crating and the like as required to prevent damage to coating in shipping, delivery, and handling at the site.

3. Lifting - Shop and site: a. Machine lifting: Use padded slings to lift members. b. Manual lifting: Use clean cotton gloves.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Submit written warranty for a period of ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion, stating that coating will not blister, peel, crack, chalk, change color or have other forms of degradation for the full warranty period.

1. For the purpose of this warranty, color change is defined as not to exceed 5 CIELAB or Hunter units as determined in accordance with ASTM D 2244. Chalking is defined as not less than a numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with ASTM D 659.

2. In the event that any of the above coating failures occurs within the warranty period, the Contractor shall replace said item showing such failure, and shall assume full costs of labor and materials for such replacement. Replacement item(s) shall be new and be finished with same type of fluoropolymer coating meeting the requirements of this specification. Any replacement item shall match its adjacent member within tolerances as specified herein.

3. Owner may, at his discretion, permit field repairs in lieu of replacement, provided the coating failure is minor in scope and the field repair material and method employed match its adjacent member.

4. Warranty shall be signed by the coating manufacturer, coating applicator and Contractor. Warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.





Page 3 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Resin - Provide Coatings manufactured with polyvinylidine flouride resin made by one of the following:

1. Arkema: “Kynar 500”

2. Solvay Solexis: “Hylar 5000”

B. Acceptable Coating Producers (Tradenames) Include

1. PPG (Duranar®)

2. Valspar (Fluropon®)

3. BASF (Fluoroceram®)

2.2 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS

A. General: Factory applied, baked on fluoropolymer coating containing minimum 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) by weight in resin system. Provide system consisting of primer and one or more topcoat(s) meeting or exceeding AAMA 2605.

B. Coil coatings: Dry film thicknesses specified below are spray coating thicknesses; manufacturer's standard thickness which meet performance requirements of AAMA 2605 are acceptable.

C. Spray (extrusion) Coatings: Meet or exceed AAMA 2605. Dry film thicknesses specified are minimum.

1. Powder coat systems containing 100 percent PVDF resin are acceptable in lieu of spray coatings, subject to color approval.

D. 3-Coat Metallic System: 0.25 mil (plus or minus 0.05 mil) primer coat, 1.0 mil color coat, 0.06 mil (plus or minus 0.02 mil) clear top coat.

1. Basis-of Design Metallic Coating: Provide PPG "Duranar XL" or comparable product by one of the following: a. Valspar: "Fluoropon”. b. BASF "Fluoroceram".

E. Touch-Up Material: Fluoropolymer air-dried system which is recommended and approved by fluoropolymer finish coating manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Spray or Coil Applied Systems: Pretreatment and coating application shall be in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Metal Preparation and Pre-Treatment: Remove organic and inorganic surface soil, grease, oils, and other foreign materials using a chemical cleaning and pre-treatment process as recommended by coating manufacturer.

1. Use a chemical conversion coating which conforms to ASTM D1730, Type B, Method 5 or Method 7.


http://www.linetec.com/Paint_Color_Cards/PPG_Valspar_Akzo_Nobel.htm

http://www.linetec.com/Paint_Color_Cards/PPG_Valspar_Akzo_Nobel.htm



Section 05 0514 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS FOR METAL Page 4 of 5

2. Weight of chemical conversion coating shall conform to ASTM B449, Section 6, Class 1.

3. Processing shall conform to ASTM B449, Section 5.

C. Finishing: Apply coating by conventional air or electrostatic spray or by coil coating process over surfaces which have been thoroughly cleaned, pretreated and primed according to specifications of the licensed formulator. Dipping and flowcoating are not permitted. Thermally cure (bake) coating immediately following application.

1. All coil coating shall be processed in one production lot to aid in eliminating color variations due to use of metallic coating.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Coating applicator shall maintain a Quality Assurance Log which reflects conditions under which production was made, including pretreatment cycles; coating conditions; cure temperature and time; random testing of dry film thickness, color and gloss; and selection of random production samples.

B. Surface Appearance: Cured coating must be visibly free from flowlines, streaks, blisters and other surface imperfections on exposed surfaces.

1. Surfaces shall have no signs of mill finish aluminum or galvanized material showing.

2. No "rack" or "gripper" marks caused by the finishing process on exposed aluminum surfaces will be permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND TOUCH-UP

A. Minor scratches and blemishes: Repair with coating manufacturer's recommended products, or system when approved in advance by the Architect. Adhere to manufacturer’s instruction. Provide repairs which:

1. Match original finish for color and gloss.

2. Adhere to original finish when tested as per AAMA 2605.

3. Are not discernable when viewed at a distance of 5 feet.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protection:

1. Shortly before final completion of the project, examine surfaces for damage to coatings and restore coatings to new, undamaged condition.

2. Touch-up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is not visibly different from surrounding surfaces. Where result is different either in color, sheen, or texture, recoat entire surface or provide new building component.

PART 4 - SCHEDULES

4.1 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide the following colors for the various substrates wherever these materials occur in the Contract Documents, except as noted otherwise. Unless otherwise specified, the





Page 5 of 5

following paint systems are made up of products identified by PPG (Duranar) trade names and numbers.

1. It is not the intent to limit products to manufacturer indicated, but rather to establish a quality which is required for this Project; other manufacturers not listed under PART 2 PRODUCTS shall submit a substitution request in accordance with Procurement Substitution Procedures.

B. PAINT-2a: Custom metallic color to match Architect’s control sample ‘vintage nickle’ for PERF-1, 2 and 3; and for Metal Panel 1.

C. PAINT-8: Custom metallic color to match Architect’s control sample ‘vintage nickle’ for composite metal panels, column covers and metal roof panels.

D. PAINT-13: Custom metallic color to match Architect’s control sample PVDF-3a “Bronze II” VC105536XL with VC51132 for curtain-wall and aluminum entrance doors to match existing.

E. PAINT-14: Metallic, custom color to match Architect’s sample of “anodized black acid etch,” for composite metal panels, column covers and metal roof panels.

F. PAINT-15: Metallic, custom color to match Architect’s control sample of bone white for composite metal panels, column covers and metal roof panels.

END OF SECTION



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 1 of 21

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

Work of this Section shall conform to requirements of Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections.

1.2 SCOPE

The work covered by this Section shall include all labor, material, equipment, permits, engineering and other services necessary for the fabrication and installation of structural steel and related work, complete, in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

Submittals Division 1

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL Division 1

Steel Deck Section 053000 Coating Division 9 AESS Section 051213

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Building Code: Structural steel work shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code identified on the Structural General Notes, and OSHA requirements, except where more stringent conditions or criteria occur in the standards referenced below and on the Drawings.

B. Standards:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (ANSI/AISC 360) "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" per Structural General Notes.

2. American Welding Society, AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code".

3. American Welding Society, AWS D1.6, “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel”

4. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) - "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".

5. American Society for Testing and Materials "ASTM Standards in Building Codes", various standards as referenced herein.

6. The Society for Protective Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council, “SSPC”) "Steel Structures Painting Manual".

C. Definitions:

1. The term “Contract Documents” in this Specification is defined as the design Drawings and the Specifications.

2. The term “SER” in this Specification is defined as the Structural Engineer of Record for the structure in its final condition.

3. The term “Design Professionals” in this Specification is defined as the Owner’s Architect and SER.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


4. The term “Contractor” in this Specification is defined to include any of the following: General Contractor and their sub-contractors, Construction Manager, Structural Steel Fabricator or Structural Steel Erector.

5. The term “Testing Agency” in this Specification is defined as an independent testing and inspection service engaged by the Owner for quality assurance observation and testing of steel construction in accordance with applicable building code provisions and any additional activities listed in the Contract Documents.

6. The terms “for record” and “submit for record” in this Specification are defined as Contractor submittals that do not require a response from the Design Professionals.

7. Working Days: Monday through Friday, except for federal or state holidays.

1.6 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. The term Structural Steel Contractor refers to any or all of the following parties, regardless of their contractual relationships: Structural Steel Fabricator, Structural Steel Detailer, Structural Steel Erector and Contractor’s Engineer.

B. Qualification Data: Submit qualification data (personnel and firm resumes, and project lists with references) for the Structural Steel Fabricator (“Fabricator”), Structural Steel Detailer (“Detailer”), Contractor’s Engineer(s) and Structural Steel Erector (“Erector”).

C. The Fabricator shall have 10 years of comparable experience in installations of this type and shall employ labor and supervisory personnel familiar with the type of installation, experienced in fabrication and erection of structural steel for projects of similar size and complexity. At the time of bid the Fabricator shall be AISC certified to the Standard for Steel Building Structures (STD) and must submit proof of these qualifications. The Fabricator’s qualifications shall be subject to review by the Design Professionals and Owner.

D. The Detailer shall have 10 years experience preparing detailed steel shop drawings and CNC downloads for structures of this type and complexity. The detailer’s qualifications shall be subject to review by the Design Professionals and Owner.

E. The Erector shall have 10 years of successful experience erecting structural steel for structures of this type and complexity in the region of the project. At the time of bid the Erector shall be an AISC Certified Steel Erector (CSE) and must submit documentation of this qualification.

F. Welding: Qualify the welding procedures, shop welders, field welders, welding operators and tackers in accordance with AWS D1.1 and for the following periods of effectiveness of certification:

1. Certification and qualification, including period of effectiveness of welding personnel shall be as specified by AWS D1.1. Certification shall remain in effect for duration of work provided welders are continuously engaged in performing the type of welding for which they are certified, unless welders fail to perform acceptable welding, as determined by the Owner’s Testing Agency. Certification and re-certification of welding personnel is subject to verification by the Testing Agency. Re-testing for re-certification will be the Contractor's responsibility.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Required Submittals - Where the SUBMITTALS section of this Specification is in conflict with Division 1 Submittals, the more stringent requirements for the Contractor apply. Required submittal items are listed here; see below for detailed requirements. Do not submit items not requested. Reproduction of structural drawings for shop drawings is not permitted. Building Information Models for contractor’s use may be provided as mutually agreed upon by Design Professionals.

(1) Submittal Schedule

(2) Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings

(3) Submittal Letters

(4) Pre-construction Survey

(5) Quality Control Program

(6) Product Data

(7) Samples

(8) Welding Procedures Specification (WPS)

(9) Welder Certifications

(10) Mill Reports

(11) As-built surveys

1. Submittal Schedule: The contractor shall submit for approval shop drawing submission schedule at least twenty (20) working days prior to commencing submission of connection design calculations and shop drawings.

a) This schedule shall include a list, in order of date to be submitted, of all drawings and other required submittal items scheduled to be submitted. The schedule shall list the proposed submittals for each week, including but not limited to the number of calculation sheets, erection drawings, and piece drawings, as well as their formats. Once shop drawing submissions have commenced any modification or addition to this schedule must be submitted for approval at least twenty (20) working days before the modification or addition is proposed to take place.

2. Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings (including Field Work drawings): Submit for approval required connection calculations, shop drawings and erection drawings for all structural steel indicated on the Contract Documents.

a) Material shall not be fabricated or delivered before the shop and erection drawings have been approved or approved as noted by the Design Professionals and returned to the Contractor.

b) Structural Steel Shop Drawings: Submitted shop drawings shall include layouts and details for each member showing the steel type and grade, size, connections, cuts, copes, holes, bolts, welds, surface treatments (cleaning, shop paint, etc.) and provisions for the connection of other work. Steel type, grade and size for all attached elements shall also be shown.

c) Shop and erection drawings shall contain complete dimensional and geometric information, based on established dimensions shown on Contract Documents, and shall not be scaled from Contract Documents. The shop drawings shall clearly distinguish between shop and field welds



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


and bolts, identify pretensioned high strength bolts and identify surface preparation requirements at slip critical connections.

d) Welds: All welds shall be indicated by standard welding symbols in the "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" or as accepted by the SER. Shop and erection drawings shall show the size, length, and type of each weld, including the electrode type to be used.

e) Bolts: Details for bolt assemblies shall indicate bolt size, length, type and the presence, type and location of washers where required as part of the assembly; distinguish between N and X bolts, distinguish between slip-critical and bearing bolts; specify approved slip critical coatings; and distinguish between shop and field bolts. Also, indicate bolt orientation where required by the Contract Documents.

f) Erection Drawings: The erection drawings shall include plans showing exact locations of base and bearing plates, and/or anchor rods and other embedded items. All field connections not specifically shown on shop drawings shall be shown on erection drawings, including field bolt size, type, number, location and any special installation requirements, and field weld size, type, length and location.

3. Preconstruction Survey: Submit for record. Where interface with existing construction occurs, before related shop drawings are prepared survey the existing construction and submit the survey prepared by a professional surveyor employed by the Contractor to the Design Professionals. For all steel construction, before steel erection commences, perform and submit to the Design Professionals a complete survey for position and alignment at all points where construction by other trades will support steel elements, including but not limited to pockets, embedded plates, anchor rods and base plates. Include plan location positions relative to the building gridlines, and elevations of bearing surfaces and tops of bolts relative to building Datum elevation.

4. Quality Control Program: Submit for record complete details of the Contractor's quality control program including the names of the personnel responsible for this work.

5. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' specifications, test reports and applicable standards for all products listed under Part 2: Products. Standard literature shall be edited to suit job conditions.

6. Samples: Submit (2) samples each, (2) of shop painted products and (2) of field touch-up painted products. Samples shall be steel material.

7. Welding Procedures: Submit for record written welding procedures for all AWS D1.1 prequalified joints, and qualification procedures for all joints not prequalified by Section 3 of AWS D1.1. For stainless steel welds or bimetallic welds between stainless and carbon steels, submit for review welding procedures and processes per AWS D1.6 requirements. Submit written welding procedures developed by Contractor’s welding consultant for heavy shapes and High Restraint Welds described in this Specification. Use the forms in AWS D1.1, Annex E. Submit all welding and qualification procedures to the Owner's Testing Agency for approval before submitting to the Design Professionals.

8. Welder Certification: Submit for record certification that the welders have passed qualification testsusing AWS procedures.

a) A certification shall be submitted in standard AWS format.

b) Each certification shall state that the welder has been doing satisfactory welding of the required type within the six-month period prior to the subject work.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


For any welder whose period of certification effectiveness has lapsed or whose workmanship is subject to question in the opinion of the Design Professionals or Testing Agency, immediate testing for recertification will be required. Tests, when required, shall be conducted at the sole expense of the Contractor.

9. Mill Reports: Submit for record certified copies of all mill reports, two (2) to the Design Professionals and one (1) to the Testing Agency, covering the chemical and physical properties of all structural steel and accessories (as defined in this Specification) for the project

a) Such certificates shall be obtained from the mills producing the steel and shall certify in a cover letter submitted with the certificates, that the steel meets the minimum requirements as to physical properties, inspection, marking and tests for structural steel as defined by the current edition of the relevant ASTM Standard Specifications. Any steel that does not meet the ASTM requirements must be clearly identified in a cover letter submitted with the certificates.

b) Prior to commencing steel erection, the contractor shall deliver certificates to the Owner in number and form as may be required by the local Building Department or other local and State agencies having jurisdiction.

10. As-Built Surveys: Execute and submit for record a comprehensive survey of steel structure at each level adequate to assess if the structure has been built within the tolerances specified in the Contract Documents. Each certified survey, performed by a professional surveyor employed by the Contractor, shall be submitted to the Contractor’s Engineer for their approval before proceeding to the next stage of erection. If deviations from the tolerances are discovered, the Contractor shall present corrective measures to the Design Professionals within 48 hours of completion of that stage of erection. Upon completion of steel erection, submit the complete package of steel surveys for record to the Design Professionals and the Owner.

B. Submittal Process

1. Submittal of shop and erection drawings and other submittals by the Contractor shall constitute Contractor's representation that the Contractor has verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated each drawing with other Drawings and other trades. The Contractor shall place their shop drawing stamp on all submittals confirming the above.

2. Shop and erection drawings: Submit in complete packages so that individual parts and the assembled unit may be reviewed together. This Specification Section and the applicable drawings used in the development of the shop and erection drawings shall be referenced on each shop and erection drawing to facilitate checking. Unless the piece marks are self-indexing, furnish index sheets with the shop drawings, relating piece marks for all beam, girder and column details to the sheet numbers on which they are located.

3. The Contractor shall submit to the Design Professionals one (1) electronic copy] for shop drawing review. If the Contractor and Design Team agree to process shop drawings electronically, Contractor shall submit one hardcopy and one electronic copy to the SER. The naming convention of each drawing must follow the submittal numbering system and include the submittal #, specification #, revision # and drawing # in the prefix of the drawing name.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


4. The Contractor shall allow at least ten (10) working days between receipt and release by the SER for the review of shop and erection drawings and submittals other than connection design calculations. .

5. All modifications or revisions to submittals, shop drawings, and erection drawings must be clouded, with an appropriate revision number clearly indicated. The following shall automatically be considered cause for rejection of the modification or revision whether or not the drawing has been approved by the Design Professionals:

a) Failure to specifically cloud modifications

b) Failure to submit calculations for the modifications

c) Unapproved revisions to previous submittals

d) Unapproved departure from Contract Documents

6. The Contractor shall deliver to the Design Professionals at the completion of the job two (2) electronic versions of the final as-built shop drawings on a CD-ROM or other media acceptable to the Design Professionals.

7. Resubmittals: Completely address previous comments prior to resubmitting a drawing. Resubmit only those drawings that require resubmittal.

8. Resubmittals Compensation: The Contractor shall compensate the Design Professionals for submittals that must be reviewed more than twice due to contractors’ errors. The Contractor shall compensate the Design Professionals at the standard billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%.

C. SER Submittal Review

1. The review and approval of shop and erection drawings and other submittals by the Design Professionals shall be for general conformance with the design intent of the work and with the information given in the Contract Documents only and will not in any way relieve the Contractor or the Contractor's Engineer from:

a) Responsibility for all required detailing.

b) Responsibility for the proper fitting of construction work in strict conformance with the contract requirements.

c) The necessity of furnishing material and workmanship required by contract Drawings and Specifications which may not be indicated on the shop and erection drawings.

d) Conforming to the Contract Documents.

e) Coordination with other trades.

f) Control or charge of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, for safety precautions and programs in connection with the work.

2. TYPE 1 Stamp - For shop drawings for building elements designed by the SER, the responses on the shop drawing review stamp used by the SER require the following actions:

a) APPROVED indicates that the SER has found that the information presented on the shop or erection drawing appears to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the Contract Documents.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


b) APPROVED AS NOTED indicates that the SER requires the shop or erection drawing to be corrected to reflect the notes and comments shown. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the notations shown on the shop drawings and the Contract Documents. Promptly resubmit the corrected shop or erection drawing for record.

c) REVISE and RESUBMIT indicates that the SER requires resubmission of the shop or erection drawing after correction per notes and comments. None of the elements of work shown on the shop drawing shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed until the Contractor has received a returned shop drawing marked Approved or Approved as Noted.

d) NOT APPROVED indicates that the shop or erection drawing does not conform to the Contract Documents and must be extensively revised before re-submittal. None of the elements of work shown on the shop drawing shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed until the Contractor has received a returned shop drawing marked Approved or Approved as Noted.

3. TYPE 2 Stamp - For submittals for building elements which are not designed by the SER but are performance specified, for items that do not form part of the completed structural system but impose loads on the structure, and for construction items or activities which have an effect on the final structure, a second stamp will be used. The responses on the stamp used by the SER require the following actions:

a) NO EXCEPTIONS indicates that the SER has found that the information presented on the submittal appears to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the Contract Documents.

b) EXCEPTIONS NOTED indicates that the SER requires the submittal be corrected to reflect the notes and comments shown. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the notations shown on the shop drawings and the Contract Documents. Promptly resubmit the corrected document for record.

c) REJECTED indicates that the SER requires resubmission of the submittal after correction per notes and comments. None of the elements of work shown on the shop drawing shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed. Contractor to revise and resubmit until SER response of No Exceptions or Exceptions Noted is received.

D. Substitution Request

1. Requests for any departure from Contract Documents must be submitted in writing by the Contractor and accepted in writing by the Design Professionals, prior to receipt of submittals.

2. All substitutions must be requested using the structural substitution request form included at the end of this section. Acceptance using the structural substitution request form indicates acceptability of the structural concept only. Contractor must submit shop drawings reflecting accepted substitutions for review in accordance with this Specification. The structural substitution request form, even if accepted, does not constitute a change order.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


3. Such substitutions or modifications, if acceptable to the Design Professionals shall be coordinated and incorporated in the work at the sole expense of the Contractor.

4. The acceptance by the Design Professionals of a specific and isolated request by the contractor to deviate from these requirements does not constitute a waiving of that requirement for other elements of, or locations in the project, unless specifically addressed as such and permitted by the Design Professionals in writing.

5. Compensation for Additional Services: Should additional work by Design Professionals such as design, drafting, meetings and/or visits be required which are necessitated for the review and/or incorporation of the Contractor-requested substitution, including indirect effects on other portions of the work, the Contractor is responsible for paying for additional work performed by the Design Professionals at the standard billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%. Additional costs for testing and inspection by the Owner shall also be compensated by the Contractor.

6. Contractor is responsible for means and methods and any impacts on other portions of the work that may arise from this substitution.

E. Request for Information (RFI)

1. RFI shall originate with the Contractor. RFI submitted by entities other than that Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Limit RFI to one subject.

3. Submit RFI immediately upon discovery of the need for interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. Submit RFI within timeframe so as not to delay the Construction Schedule while allowing the full response time described below.

4. The response time for answering an RFI depends on the category in which it is assigned.

a) Upon receipt by the SER, each RFI will be assigned to one of the following categories:

i. No cost clarification

ii. Shown in Contract Documents

iii. Change to be issued in future bulletin

iv. Previously answered

v. Information needs to be provided by others.

vi. Request for corrective field work

vii. Request for substitution

b) RFIs in categories 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 will be turned around by the SER on average of five (5) working days.

c) RFIs in categories 6 and 7 will be rejected and must be submitted as submittals or requests for substitution.

1.8 TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME

A. The structure as shown on the Contract Documents is designed to withstand the design loads only when all structural elements are installed and fully connected. The contractor shall be responsible for the analysis of all components and assemblies for stresses and displacements that may be imposed by fabrication, shipping, handling, erection,



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


temporary conditions, construction loads, etc. The analysis of such shall be performed by the Contractor’s Engineer.


A. Delivery: Unload all structural steel promptly upon arrival and store in an area designated and approved by the Owner at the site of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any charges from failure to unload material promptly.

B. Storage: Store structural steel to drain properly. Provide weep holes and clean out as required to keep steel free from water. Provide adequate protection and shoring to prevent distortion and other damage. Store structural steel on timber; do not lay on mud, directly on ground or cinders, or otherwise handle in a manner that damages finishes. Stored sections shall be readily accessible for inspection.

C. Store fasteners in a protected place.

D. Welding materials to be in moisture resistant, undamaged package. Maintain packages effectively sealed until electrode is required for use. Storage and handling shall be per AWS D1.1

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE BY OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY (SPECIAL INSPECTIONS)

A. Quality assurance is testing and inspection to assist the Owner in evaluating the Contractor's performance in the fabrication shop and field. It is not a substitute for the testing and inspection which is required as part of the Contractor's quality control program (see the following section on quality control).

B. Cost: Except as specifically noted otherwise, the testing agencies for quality assurance shall be engaged and paid by the Owner.

C. The Owner has negotiated inspection services based upon the assumption that all fabrication work shall be performed at one single fabrication shop. Costs associated with work being performed in additional shops will require reimbursement to the Owner.

D. Coordination with Owner’s Testing Agency: The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for coordinating their work with the testing agency to assure that all test and inspection procedures required by the Contract Documents and Public Agencies are provided. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owners testing agencies in the performance of their work and shall provide the following:

1. Information as to time and place of starting shop fabrication and a field construction and erection schedule, one week prior to the beginning of the work.

2. Site File: At least one copy of each approved shop drawing shall be kept available in the contractor’s field office and the drawings not bearing evidence of approval and release for construction by the Design Professionals shall not be kept on the job. Provide drawings for the work to be performed in the shop or field one week prior to the start of work.

3. Representative sample pieces requested by the inspection agency for testing, if necessary.

4. Full and ample means of assistance for testing and inspection of material.

5. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, safety equipment etc., for inspection of the work in shop and field.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


E. Duties of the Owner’s Testing Agencies:

1. Reports: The Testing Agency shall prepare daily reports of the structural steel work including progress and description/area of work, tests made and results. Reports of inspection of welding shall include deficiencies noted and corrections made, and other items pertinent to acceptance or rejection of the work. The reports shall state whether specimens comply with or deviate from contract requirements. The daily reports shall be collected and delivered to the Design Professionals and Owner weekly.

2. Rejection: The Owner’s Testing Agency has the right to reject any material, at any time, when it is determined that the material or workmanship does not conform to the Contract Documents. The Testing Agency shall report deficiencies to Owner, Design Professionals, and Contractor immediately.

3. Structural steel work and general testing requirements: The Testing Agency shall perform the following shop and field inspections in addition to any other inspections enumerated above or specified on the Contract Documents:

a) Shop inspection of steel shall include alignment and straightness of members, camber, preparation for connections, dimensional checks, testing of shop bolts, witnessing of welding procedures, testing of cuts, weld access holes and copes of heavy shapes as defined in this Specification, examination and testing of completed welds, headed studs and deformed bar anchors, cutting of heavy shapes, finishing of column ends, cleaning, painting and storage of material. All shop fabrication shall be inspected in the shop. Camber shall be verified in a minimum of 10% of all members requiring camber. If, in the opinion of the SER and Testing Agency this testing discloses a large ratio (10% or more) of unacceptable cambers, the required percentage of tested cambers may be increased by the SER to 100% at no expense to the Owner.

b) Field inspection of steel shall include connections, proper tensioning of bolts, levelness, plumbness and alignment of the frame, conformance to AWS welding methods, examination of surface before welding, examination and testing of completed welds, headed studs and deformed bar anchors and field painting, including touch-up.

c) Check qualifications of the following:

i. Shop welding procedures and personnel

ii. Shop stud welding setup and operators

iii. Shop bolting procedure and crew

d) Where testing is required for less than 100% of locations, select test locations at random and throughout the project.

e) Review mill certifications for compliance with the Contract Documents.

4. High Strength Bolting: The Testing Agency inspector shall inspect high strength bolted construction in accordance with RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts," including but not limited to:

a) Surface preparation and bolt type conforms to plans and Specifications prior to start of bolting operations.

b) Proper bolt storage and handling procedures per codes and standards referenced by this Specification are being followed.

c) Visually inspect all bolted connections.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


d) For all bolted connections that are indicated as snug tight, connections are properly compacted and brought to the snug tight condition progressing outward from the most rigid part.

e) For all bolted connections that are indicated as pretensioned or slip critical, pre-installation verification testing is performed by the inspector in cooperation with the contractor in accordance with RCSC section 9.2 and section 7.

f) For all bolted connections that are indicated as pretensioned or slip critical, through routine observation, as defined in RCSC 9.2.1, 9.2.3 or 9.2.4, that the pretensioning methods of RCSC 8.2.1, 8.2.3, or 8.2.4, as appropriate, are performed.

i. "Routine observation" is defined as observation of 10 bolts for every 100 bolts with a minimum of 2 bolts per connection.

g) Retest bolted connections that fail initial inspection after correction by the Fabricator or Erector.

5. Welding:

a) Review of submittals: Welding procedures including prequalification, qualifications test and, for heavy shapes and high restraint welds, the welding procedure prepared by the Contractor's Engineer or Welding Consultant.

b) Full penetration welds: Test all full penetration welds for soundness by means of either radiographic or ultrasonic testing in accordance with AWS D1.1 and ASTM E164 procedures. All flaws in plate or flange material revealed during such tests shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.

c) Partial penetration welds: Test all partial penetration welds for soundness by means of visual and magnetic particle inspection, unless other methods are specified in the Contract Documents. All flaws in plate or flange material revealed during such tests shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.

d) Testing of welds at heavy shapes and high restraint welds shall be performed not less than 48 hours after the weld has been completed.

e) Fillet welds: Visually inspect all fillet welds. In addition test ten percent (10%) of all fillet welds using a non-destructive method, such as dye penetrant or magnetic particle. Select test locations randomly throughout the structure, but test at least one weld in each location with 6 or more welds per connection. If, in the opinion of the SER and Testing Agency this testing discloses a large ratio (10% or more) of unacceptable welds, the required percentage of tested welds may be increased by the SER to 100%, all at the Contractor's expense.

f) Inspection and Testing by the Testing Agency of high restraint welds and where Heavy Shapes are to be joined by partial or full penetration welds in tension:

i. Joint Preparation: Monitor fit up and joint preparation (bevel angle, etc.) for conformance to the submitted welding procedures including preheat and interpass temperature. Monitor base metal temperature during welding operations.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


ii. Test Full Penetration Welds in accordance to the requirements of this Specification section, ultrasonically in accordance with AWS D1.1 procedures. On T or corner joints, pay careful attention to the heat affected zone and base metal where the weld shrinkage stresses are in the through thickness direction.

iii. Test Partial Penetration Butt Joints in accordance with this Specification section by the magnetic particle method. At T or corner joints, in addition to the magnetic particle testing, ultrasonically scan the heat affected zone and adjacent base metal from face "C" per AWS D1.1 Table 6.7 and Annex K-7 to detect lamellar tears and shall be done with a compression wave. The Testing Agency shall submit a testing procedure that includes evaluation (acceptance criterion) procedures to the Design Professionals for review.

6. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: Visually inspect all headed studs and deformed bar anchors for complete fusion and full 360-degree weld flash (or fillet).

a) Check all studs with incomplete fusion, and at random five studs at each of six beams per floor, by bending to an angle of 15 degrees from its original axis (away from any missing flash). If more than twenty percent of studs fail on one member, check all studs on member. In addition for each member with any defective studs, test an additional member.

b) Contractor to replace any studs that crack or break. Contractor to only straighten studs that would foul other work or have less than 1 inch (25mm) cover in bent position.

7. Remedial Work: The Testing Agency shall indicate to the Contractor where remedial work must be performed and will maintain a current list of work not in compliance with the Contract Documents. This list shall be submitted to the Design Professionals and Owner on a weekly basis.

8. Certification: When all work has been approved by the Testing Agency, the Testing Agency shall certify in a letter to the Design Professionals and Owner that the installation is in accordance with the design and Specification requirements (including applicable codes).

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall provide a program of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein and in related work are attained.

B. The Contractor shall immediately report to the Design Professionals any deficiencies in the work which are departures from the Contract Documents which may occur during construction. The Contractor shall propose corrective actions and their recommendations in writing and submit them for review by the Design Professionals. After proposed corrective action is accepted by the Design Professionals and Owner, the Contractor shall correct the deficiency at no cost to the Owner.

C. The Owner's general review during construction and activities of the Owner’s Testing Agency are undertaken to inform the Owner of performance by the Contractor but shall in no way replace or augment the Contractor's quality control program or relieve the Contractor of total responsibility for quality control.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


1.12 OBSERVATIONS AND CORRECTIONS BY DESIGN PROFESSIONALS

A. Review: The Design Professionals will observe the construction for general compliance with the provisions of the Contract Documents during various phases of construction.

B. Compensation for Additional Services: Should additional work by Design Professionals such as design, drafting, meetings and/or visits be required which are necessitated by failure of the Contractor to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for paying for additional work performed by the Design Professionals at their standard firm-wide billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%. Additional costs for testing and inspection by the Owner shall also be compensated by the Contractor.

1.13 PERMITS AND WARRANTY

A. Permits: The Contractor shall apply for, procure, renew, maintain, and pay for all permits required by City, State, or other governing authorities, necessary to execute work under this Contract. Contractor shall furnish copies of all permits to the Owner and Design Professionals.

B. Warranty: Upon completion of all work to be performed under this Contract, the Contractor shall execute and deliver in a satisfactory form a warranty that all workmanship and materials used in the performance of this Contract shall remain free from defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of execution of the Warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Structural steel and stainless steel shall conform to the requirements listed on the Structural General Notes.

2.2 SHOP COATINGS

A. Zinc Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I or Type II, Zinc rich primer utilizing either an organic or inorganic binder with a minimum zinc content of 80 percent by weight in the dry film. The primer shall provide a surface meeting AISC Slip Critical Class B (slip coefficient =0.50 min) requirements. Color to be determined by Architect. Primer shall be compatible with, and from the same manufacturer as, top coats specified in Division 9 specification.

B. Hot Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A123, weight of coating shall average not less than 2.3 oz per square foot (0.70 kg/ m²), with no individual thickness less than 2.0 oz per square foot (0.61 kg/m²).

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound, or other coating complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. High Strength Bolts: Conform to the provisions of the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" except that nuts shall be ASTM A563 Grades DH or DH3 (hardened) for both A325



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


and A490 bolts. Twist off type bolts (Tension Control bolts) shall additionally conform to ASTM F1852 or ASTM F2280.

B. All bolts shall be new, and not re-used.

C. Where A325 galvanized bolts nuts and washers are required, they shall be in accordance with ASTM F2329 and ASTM A153, Class C. Where A588 steel is used, bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 3.

D. Direct Tension Indicators: Meet requirements of ASTM F959.

E. Anchor Rods: Per Structural General Notes.

F. “Blind” Bolts for Hollow Sections: Per Structural General Notes

G. Washers:

1. Round washers shall conform to American Standard B 27.2 type b

2. Washers in contact with high-strength bolt heads and nuts shall be hardened in accordance with ASTM Standard F436.

3. Beveled washers shall be square, smooth and sloped so that contact surfaces of the bolt head and nut are parallel.

4. The diameter of the hole of square beveled washers shall be 1/16 inch (1.5mm) greater than the bolt size for bolts smaller than one inch (25mm), and shall be 1/8 inch (3.0mm) greater than the bolt size for bolts larger than one inch (25mm).

5. Comply with requirements of RCSC for all washers including thickness, size and hardness, depending on connection details.

H. Welding Electrodes: Electrodes shall be low hydrogen and shall be selected from Table 3.1 of AWS D1.1. For stainless steel welds, electrodes shall be selected in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.6.

I. Shielded Metal-Arc Welding: Welding electrodes for manual shielded metal-arc welding shall conform to the specification for Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.1 E70 or 80, or the specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrode, AWS A5.5.

1. Submerged-Arc Welding: Bare electrodes and granular flux used in submerged-arc welding shall conform to F70 or F80 AWS flux classifications of the specification for Gare Mild Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for submerged-arc Welding, AWS A5.17.

J. Headed Studs (shear connectors) shall be per Structural General Notes.

K. Deformed Bar Anchors shall be as specified in Structural General Notes.

L. Steel Castings shall conform to ASTM A27, Grade 65-35, medium strength carbon steel.

M. Grout: Refer to General Notes.

N. Post-installed Anchors shall be per Structural General Notes.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Work by Others: Examine all work prepared by others to receive work of this Section and report any defects affecting installation to Design Professionals. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for checking the dimensions and coordination of the structural steel work with other trades.

B. Anchor Rods: At least 20 working days prior to the start of the structural steel erection, the Contractor shall ascertain by accurate survey the existing location, alignment, and elevation of the anchor rods embedded in the concrete by others. The Contractor shall immediately bring to the attention of the Design Professionals any discrepancies observed between the Contract Documents and the as-built conditions. Steel erection shall not start until corrective measures, if required, have been performed.

3.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

B. Tolerances:

1. Conform to the tolerances of the AISC "Code of Standard Practice," compensate for the difference between the temperature at time of fabrication and the mean temperature in service.

2. Conform to the tolerances of the AISC "Code of Standard Practice", Section 10 (AESS) for architecturally exposed structural steel as indicated as “AESS” on the Drawings.

C. Holes: Holes shall be provided in members to permit connections to the work of other trades or contracts, and for passage through the member of work of other trades. All holes shall be accurately drilled or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal in accordance with AISC Specifications. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Burning or drifting unfair holes will not be permitted. Holes that must be enlarged shall be reamed. Drift pins will be allowed only to bring together the several parts for connection. Holes in base plates shall be drilled. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Outside burrs resulting from drilling operations shall be removed with a suitable tool.

D. Camber: Provide camber as indicated on the Contract Documents. Where no camber is indicated, provide natural camber up.

E. Cutting: Manual gas-cutting in the shop may be used only if automatic or semi-automatic methods are not possible. If manual shop cutting is required, it shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch, except that an unguided torch may be used where the cut is more than 1/2 inch (12mm) from the finished dimension and final removal is completed by means such as chipping or grinding to produce a gouge-free surface of quality equal to that of the base metal. At restrained joints and as indicated elsewhere, weld access holes shall be ground smooth.

F. Anchor Rods: Rigid steel templates and anchor rods shall be furnished, labeled and shipped in sets indicating sizes and locations of columns, together with instructions for setting of anchor rods. Plate washers per Typical Details shall be provided.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


G. Bolting: Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damaging the threads. Bolt heads shall be protected from damage during driving. Bolt heads and nuts shall rest squarely against the metal. Where bolts are to be used on beveled surfaces having slopes greater than 1 in 20 with a plane normal to the bolt axis, beveled washers shall be provided to give full bearing under the head or nut.

H. Bolts indicated as “finger tight” on the Contract Documents shall be prevented from backing off by using lock nuts, thread compound or deformed threads.

I. Installation of High Strength Bolts:

1. Except where "snug tight" installation is specifically permitted on design Drawings, all high strength bolts shall be installed with full pretension using Turn-of-Nut Pretensioning, Twist-Off Type Tension Control Bolt Pretensioning or Direct-Tension-Indicator (DTI) Pretensioning in accordance with the "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Calibrated Wrench Pretensioning shall only be used where specifically approved by the SER.

2. Comply with special washer requirements of the RCSC, such as those related to slotted and oversize holes, and tapered flanges. DTI "washers" shall not be substituted for such required washers.

3. All high strength bolt assemblies (including Tension Control bolts and DTI’s) used in pretensioned connections shall be verified in accordance with the Pre-Installation Verification section of the RCSC.

4. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use, except Tension Control bolts must be re-lubricated by manufacturer.

J. Welding of Structural Steel:

1. Pre-Weld Inspection: The surface to be welded and the filler material to be used shall be subject to inspection before welding is performed.

2. Welds indicated on the Contract Documents or the approved shop or erection drawings shall be created by electric arc welding processes that comply in all respects with the codes and specifications herein noted covering the design, fabrication, and inspection of welded structures and the qualifications of welders and supervisors. Control the heat input, weld length, weld sequence and cooling process to prevent distortion of the completed assembly.

3. Each welder’s work shall be traceable.

4. Special Requirements: For high restraint welds and welds at heavy shapes, follow approved welding procedures for weld process, sequence, pre-heating and cooling. Use stress relieving techniques where shown in the approved procedure developed by the Contractor’s Welding Consultant.

a) Special Procedures: Prior to the start of production welding, the contractor shall demonstrate to the Testing Agency that preheat can be maintained without relying on heat from the arc. For field welding, the contractor shall provide a shelter to protect each joint from inclement weather (rain, snow, etc.), from start until completion of the joint.

b) Preheat and Postheat: Preheat shall be sufficient to prevent cracking, but in no case less than required by AWS D1.1. For high-restraint welds, minimum preheat shall be 225 degrees F (105oC). The preheat shall be maintained throughout the thickness of the material for a distance equal to twice the material thickness on both sides of the joint at a minimum. Where different thicknesses of steel are being joined, the greater



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


thickness shall govern. Preheat shall be measured on the face opposite the side of the heat application. Preheat shall be applied uniformly in a manner that does not harm the surface of the material nor cause surface temperatures to exceed 1100 degrees F (600oC). Should stress relief heat treatment be required, the contractor shall submit a written procedure.

c) Prior to heat treatment on a production weld, prepare and treat a test sample per the contractor's written procedure for tensile tests in accordance with ASTM requirements.

5. Deficient Welds: Welds found deficient in dimensions but not in quality may be enlarged by additional welding. Any weld found deficient in quality shall be removed by grinding or melting and the weld shall be remade.

K. Bearing:

1. Bearing ends of columns shall be milled or sawn square perpendicular to axis of the column.

2. Finish bearing areas of base plates per AISC M2.8.

L. Stiffeners: Fitted stiffeners shall be ground to fit closely against flanges.

M. Cleaning and Preparation of Steel Surfaces for other than components specified in Section 051213

1. Clean all steel work in accordance with the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Method specified herein that corresponds to its location and exposure. Steel work to be painted shall be painted within the same day that it is cleaned.

a) Exterior (exposed to weather or in unconditioned space): SSPC-SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

b) AESS where referenced as 051213, see Section 051213.

c) Concealed members to be Hot Dipped Galvanized: SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning, before galvanizing.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Tolerances: Erect all work plumb, square and true to lines and levels in strict accordance with the structural requirements of the building within tolerances of the AISC Code of Standard Practice, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents. Compensate for the difference between the temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature in service.

B. Bracing: Brace the frame during erection in accordance with the Contractor’s erection procedure.

C. Errors: Immediately report to the Design Professionals any errors in shop fabrication, deformations resulting from handling and transportation, and improper erection that affects the assembly and fitting of parts. Prepare details for corrective work and obtain approval of the method of correction. Approved corrections shall be made expeditiously at the sole expense of the Contractor.

D. Column Base Plates: Support and align on steel shims or setting bolts. After the supported members have been plumbed and properly positioned, tighten anchor rod nuts



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


in preparation for grouting. Cut off wedges and shims flush with edges of plates and leave in place. The use of leveling plates will not be permitted.

E. Grouting: Refer to General Notes. Grout base plates immediately after the first tier of columns are plumbed. Do not proceed with steel erection above the first tier until base plates are grouted.

F. Bolting and Welding of Structural Steel: See Section on "Fabrication".

G. Bearing Surface: Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact before the members are assembled.

H. Splices: Splices will be permitted only where indicated on the Contract Drawings or the reviewed shop drawings. Fasten splices of compression members only after surfaces are cleaned and abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. Fill any remaining gaps with steel shims driven into place and cut flush. Tack weld shims to each other and to members. Use runoff tabs at bevel weld splices. Cut off runoff tabs and ground smooth after weld completion.

I. Driftpins: Driftpins may be used only to bring together the several parts, and shall not be used in such a manner as to distort or damage the metal. Correct poor matching of holes by drilling to the next larger size and using a larger size bolt. Plug welding and redrilling will not be permitted, unless a specific instance arises and is approved by the SER.

J. Erection bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. On non-exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts.

K. Hammering: Hammering which may damage or distort the members will not be permitted.

L. Do not use cutting torches in the field without the specific approval of the SER for each application. Where cutting torch use is permitted, all the requirements of the Section on "Fabrication" shall apply.

M. Additional Material and Labor: If the Contractor furnishes additional material and labor for the purpose of erection or if the erection method requires that material be added to certain members, the required modifications shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor.

N. Alignment: Following erection, accurately align, level, and adjust all members prior to final fastening. Conform to AISC standard tolerances unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents.

O. After erection, clean all damaged galvanized areas, welds and areas adjacent to welds and paint with the specified galvanizing repair paint.

P. Clean all steel members of mud and debris and construction residue prior to erection.

Q. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors:

1. End weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors with an automatic process in accordance with section 7 of AWS D1.1.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


2. Areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint etc. When mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in obtaining proper welds, remove by grinding or sand blasting.

3. Remove ceramic ferrules from studs and work after welding.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


Structural Substitution Request Form – to be completed by Contractor

Project:

Substitution Request # Date:

Requesting

Contractor: Pages Attached

(including this form)

1. Description of Requested Substitution: 2. Related Drawings and Specification Sections: 3. Rationale or Benefit Anticipated:

4. Effect on Construction Schedule1 (check one): NONE See Attached

5. Effect on Owner’s Cost2 attach data (check one): CREDIT TO OWNER EXTRA

6. Effect on Construction Documents3 (design work anticipated): NONE See Attached

7. Requesting Contractor Agrees to Pay for Design Changes (check): YES NO NOT APPLICABLE 8. Effect on Other Trades4:

9. Effect of Substitution on Manufacturer’s Warranty (check): NONE See Attachment Signature5: Date: Company: General Contractor Signature5: Date: Notes: 1. Contractor is responsible for means and methods and any problems that may arise from making the requested substitution. 2. This is NOT A CHANGE ORDER FORM. A separate form is required to adjust costs and/or schedules. 3. Contractor is responsible for any design impacts that may arise from this substitution, including redesign efforts. 4. Contractor is responsible for effects on other trades from this substitution; General Contractor must review and agree effects on other trades are fairly represented in items 4-9. 5. Signature by a person having authority to legally bind his/her company to the above terms. Otherwise this request is void 6. All items in form must be completed for substitution request to be considered.

Request Review Responses (completed by Architect and/or Engineer(s)):

ACCEPTED ACCEPTED AS NOTED

REJECTED INSUFFICIENT DATA TO SUPPORT REQUEST

ENGINEER / ARCH / MEP SIGNATURE

DATE

Engineer/Architect Comments:



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 051200


END OF SECTION




Section 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY-EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements regarding the appearance and surface preparation of architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS).

1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel" also apply to AESS.

B. Weather Protection: It is the intent of the Construction Documents that the AESS assemblies be protected from corrosion in their final installation. The proper use of certain processes such galvanization and application of zinc-rich shop primers are essential to ensure this performance. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review the Documents carefully and advise the Architect of any concerns or recommendations in regard to potential problem areas. It is also the responsibility of the Contractor, during construction, to coordinate the work to ensure that the integrity of the corrosion protection be maintained.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings" for zinc-rich primer and final finish of AESS assemblies.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel" for additional requirements applicable to AESS.

3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural, or AESS steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AESS: Structural steel and canopy assemblies referencing this Section, including steel components within 120 inches vertically and 36 inches horizontally of a walking surface, visible to a person standing on that walking surface.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate surface preparation of AESS with powder coating requirements to ensure that materials are compatible with one another.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Qualification Data: Per Section 05 12 00.

B. Samples: Submit Samples of AESS to set quality standards for exposed welds.

1. Two steel plates, 3/8 by 8 by 4 inches, with long edges joined by a groove weld and with weld ground smooth.




Section 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY-EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 of 5

2. Steel plate, 3/8 by 8 by 8 inches, with one end of a short length of rectangular steel tube, 4 by 6 by 3/8 inches, welded to plate with a continuous fillet weld and with weld ground smooth and blended.

3. Square steel tube or pipe, minimum 8 inches in diameter, with end of another square steel tube or pipe, approximately 4 inches in diameter, welded to its side at a 45-degree angle with a continuous fillet weld and with weld ground smooth and blended.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).

B. Mockups: Build mockups of AESS to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical portion of AESS as shown on Drawings.

2. Coordinate final finish requirements with Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings."

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. In accordance with Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel.”

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite erection.

B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.





Page 3 of 5

2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of AESS to remove burrs and provide smooth surfaces and edges.

3. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names and stamped or raised identification.

4. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.

5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and powder coating.

6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that permits full removal after erection.

7. Fabricate AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.

8. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch closure plates for AESS.

C. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch with a tolerance of 1/32 inch.

D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.3 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply with the following:

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding specified tolerances.

2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions to allowable tolerances.

3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where AESS is exposed to weather.

4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where AESS is welded.

5. Grind butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus zero inch for AESS.

6. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus zero inch for Category 1 AESS. Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

7. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for AESS.




Section 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY-EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 4 of 5

8. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of AESS occurs, grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material.

9. Make fillet welds for AESS oversize and grind to uniform profile with smooth face and transition.

10. Make fillet welds for AESS of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

2.4 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to shop-fabricated structural steel and canopy assemblies according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with powder coating adhesion.

2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2.5 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Finish Coating: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, profile and treat with etching cleaner in accordance with ASTM D7803.

2.6 PRIMING AND FINISHING

A. In accordance with Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.





Page 5 of 5

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

1. Erect AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.

B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified and in accordance with Section 05 12 00.

1. Joint Type: As indicated on the Drawings.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect AESS as specified in Section 051000 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency is not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.

B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with material compatible with, and matching coating.

END OF SECTION



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000

STEEL DECK Page 1 of 10

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections.

1.2 SCOPE

The work covered by this Section shall include all labor, material, equipment, permits, engineering and other services necessary for the installation of composite and non-composite structural steel floor deck systems, steel roof deck systems and related work with all attachments, flashings, metal closures, concrete stops, accessories and fittings as required for a complete installation in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:

Submittals Division 1 Quality Control Division 1 Structural Steel Section 051200

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Building Code: Steel deck work shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code identified on the Structural General Notes, and OSHA requirements, except where more stringent conditions or criteria occur in the standards referenced below and on the Drawings.

B. Standards:

1. All steel roof deck manufacturers shall be listed in the Underwriter's Laboratories "Fire Resistance Index of Companies".

2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

3. American Welding Society AWS D1.3 , “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.”

4. American Society for Testing and Materials "ASTM Standards in Building Codes", various standards as referenced herein.

5. Steel Deck Institute (SDI) “Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks”.

C. Definitions:

1. See Section 051200.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


1.5 STEEL DECK MANUFACTURER AND CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Manufacturer and the Steel Deck Erector (“Erector”) shall each demonstrate a minimum of ten (10) years of experience with the specified steel deck systems.

B. The Erector shall use prequalified welding processes in accordance with the AWS Structural Welding Code and shall provide certification that those welders to be employed in the Work are currently qualified for those processes and have satisfactorily passed the applicable AWS qualification tests.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Required Submittals - Where the SUBMITTALS section of this Specification is in conflict with Division 1 Submittals, the more stringent requirements for the Contractor apply. Required submittal items are listed here; see below for detailed requirements. Do not submit items not requested.

(1) Submittal Schedule (2) Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings (3) Manufacturer’s Certification (4) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions (5) Welder Certifications

1. Submittal Schedule: The Steel Deck Contractor shall submit a schedule of drawing and calculation submissions at least twenty (20) working days prior to commencing submission of drawings and calculations. The schedule will indicate the number of drawings and calculations proposed to be submitted each week. Any modifications to the schedule shall be submitted for approval at least twenty (20) working days prior to modification is proposed to take place.

2. Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings (including Field Work Drawings): Submit for record manufacturers standard load tables and calculations for items designed by the Contractor’s Engineer. Submit for approval shop drawings and erection drawings for all steel deck indicated on the Contract Documents.

a) Materials shall not be fabricated or delivered to the site before the shop drawings have been approved or approved as noted by the Design Professionals and returned to the Contractor.

b) Shop Drawings shall clearly indicate:

i. Deck types (profiles), steel gauges, and deck finishes. ii. Deck layout, including panel locations, number of deck

spans per panel, structural support locations and joint locations.

iii. Deck dimensions and sections keyed to layout plans, including side and end details and bearing requirements.

iv. Deck fastener types (welds, screws, pins, proprietary systems) and layout patterns at panel sides, ends and interior supports.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


v. Deck manufacturer, profiles, properties, vertical load capacity and in-plane diaphragm shear capacity for all as-detailed conditions.

vi. Details and locations of accessories including hardware, framing reinforcement anchorage, sump pans, cant strips, ridge plates, valley plates and closure plates.

vii. Fabrication necessary to incorporate steel deck into the job.

viii. Correlation with other requirements, openings and flashings.

ix. Fully dimensioned layout of field-installed headed studs (shear connectors).

x. Contractor-coordinated openings for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection and other trades.

c) The Contractor shall have reviewed and approved the shop drawings prior to submission to the Design Professionals for their review, representing that the Contractor has verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog number and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated each drawing and sample with the work of other trades and with the requirements of the project and the Contract Documents.

3. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit for record a letter of certification from the deck manufacturer stating that the design, the detailing and fabrication of the steel deck to be installed under this Section are in accordance with the SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks.

4. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit for record Manufacturer’s literature providing recommended installation instructions.

5. Welder Certifications: Submit for record welder certificates signed by the Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Submittal Process: See Section 051200

C. Substitution Request: See Section 051200

D. Request for Information (RFI): See Section 051200

1.7 COORDINATION AND TEMPORARY SUPPORT

A. Consult and cooperate with Contractors for other trades whose work affects or is affected by work under this Section in order that all phases of the work are properly coordinated to avoid delays, errors, omissions, or damage to any part of the work.

B. Steel Deck Contractor shall inform General Contractor of any special support requirements such as shoring of deck for wet concrete loads.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


C. General Contractor shall coordinate with Steel Deck Contractor regarding any construction loads on deck before concreting, and on completed deck in excess of the design loads shown. Such conditions may include both gravity and lateral loads.


A. Do not bend or mar decking.

B. Store off ground with one end elevated for drainage.

C. Cover decking with waterproof material, ventilated to avoid condensation.

D. Do not store deck bundles on framing unless material is securely tied down and the framing has been analyzed to ensure that such storage will not cause an overload.

1.9 STRUCTURAL STEEL PRE-ERECTION CONFERENCE

See Section 051200

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE BY OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY

A. Owner’s Testing & Inspection Agency (“Testing Agency”):

1. Reports: The Testing Agency shall include in the daily reports of the structural steel, steel deck progress and description/area of work, tests made and results.

2. Coordination: The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for coordinating his work with the Testing Agency to assure that all test and inspection procedures required by the Contract Documents and/or Public Agencies, are properly provided. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Testing Agency in the performance of their work.

3. Cost: Except as specifically noted otherwise, the Testing Agency shall be engaged and paid by the Owner.

B. Decking is subject to inspection and testing once connected in place:

1. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if connections are found to be satisfactory.

2. Contractor shall remove work found to be defective and provide acceptable work at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Field Inspection:

1. All steel deck shall be inspected after erection to ascertain the following relative to approved shop drawings:

a) Deck profile, type (acoustic, cellular, vented), gage and finish b) Deck orientation, alignment, bearing and laps (if applicable)



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


c) Supplementary items including secondary supports, closures, pour stops, sumps and their connections to deck and to other members

d) Damage of members during transportation, storage and erection e) Installation for proper erection f) Connections (for quantity, size and spacing, and quality of welds)

including continuous inspection of deck welding

D. Testing Agency Reports & Certifications:

1. Indicate to the Contractor where remedial work must be performed. Track and retest all locations of remedial work.

2. Upon completion of work and resolution of remedial items, certify in a letter to the Design Professionals and Owner that the installation is in accordance with the design and Specification requirements (including applicable codes).

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR

See Section 051200.

1.12 OBSERVATIONS AND CORRECTIONS BY DESIGN PROFESSIONALS

See Section 051200.

1.13 PERMITS AND WARRANTY

See Section 051200.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

The work specified herein is based on the products of Vulcraft, in order to establish design quality and function in the installed work. Products of other manufacturers shall be subject to the approval of the Design Professionals. All steel deck units shall be of the same depth and profile as shown on the Drawings and the product of one manufacturer.

2.2 DESIGN

A. Section properties of the steel deck units shall be calculated in accordance with the AISI “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”. The minimum positive and negative section moduli so obtained shall be used in calculations involving positive and negative moments, respectively, in determining the required gauges of steel deck units.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


2.3 MATERIALS

A. Prime Painted Cold Rolled Steel Sheet for deck and accessories: ASTM A1008 SS Grade 33 (minimum) with minimum yield strength of 33ksi (230MPa). Surface in contact with concrete (typically top) to be phosphatized. Exposed surface (typically bottom) to have oven cured gray or white lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer to 0.3 mil nominal dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Steel: roof steel deck, floor galvanized steel deck and all closures and flashings shall be formed from steel sheets conforming to ASTM A653, Structural Quality Grade 33 (minimum) with minimum yield strength of 33 ksi (230MPa). Before forming, the steel sheet shall be coated with a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A653 Zinc coated per ASTM A653 G60.

C. All steel decking shall be roll formed for uniformity in dimension and strength.

D. Floor and roof decking shall be classified by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. Each unit or bundle shall be labeled and marked as required by UL, indicating manufacturer, testing, and inspection.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.

B. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. Where Factory Mutual is indicated in the Contract Documents, fasteners must be approved by Factory Mutual as a method for securing steel roof deck for Class indicated.

C. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, of same material as deck panels, and of thickness and profile indicated, but not less than the deck gauge.

D. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material and thickness as deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Hanger Tabs: Manufacturer's standard UL rated piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for floor deck panels.

F. Recessed Sump Pans: Manufacturer's standard size, single piece steel sheet 0.071-inch (1.8mm) thick minimum, of same material as deck panels, with 1-1/2-inch (40mm) minimum deep level recessed pans and 3-inch (75mm) wide flanges. Cut holes for drains in the field.

G. Flat Receiver Pan: Manufacturer's standard size, single-piece steel sheet, 0.071” (1.8mm) thick minimum units, of same material as deck panels.

H. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Steel sheet ridge and valley plates, finish strips, and reinforcing channels, of same material and thickness as roof deck unless otherwise indicated.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


I. Steel Sheet Accessories: ASTM A 653, galvanized to G 90 coating class.

J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94% zinc dust by weight.

K. Flexible Rib Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

L. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: As required by the Contract Documents, provide manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip glass fiber or mineral fiber.


A. Arc-Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1 E60XX or E70XX Series, as required for the conditions of use.

B. Touch Up Paint: use galvanized repair paint specified above.

C. Closure Tape as required to maintain cells clear of concrete at abutting panel ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Work by Others: Examine all work prepared by others to receive work of this Section, especially plan and elevation locations of supporting frames and walls. Report any defects affecting installation to Design Professionals. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for checking the dimensions and coordination of the steel deck work with other trades.

B. Do not place deck units on supports with debris or unapproved coatings that could affect full, level bearing and proper connections.

C. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structures until concrete has cured and is dry.

D. Coordinate the location of decking bundles with a structural steel erector to prevent overloading of structural members.

3.2 ERECTION – PLACEMENT

A. Erect steel deck in accordance with the decking manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of the Drawings and these Specifications.

B. Place steel deck on the supporting framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before making permanent connections. Do not stretch or contract sidelap interlocks.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


C. Place deck units flat, square, without warping or excessive deflections, in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between the cells at ends of abutting units.

D. Abutting ends of deck panels shall occur over supports. End bearing shall be a minimum of 2 inches (50mm), or greater if required (web crippling) by deck manufacturer.

E. Where deck panels nest, laps shall be a minimum of 2" (50mm) and shall occur over supports. Nesting is permitted only where profiles are designed to nest and are fabricated with offset ends.

F. Install slab edge closures and pour stops at the theoretical position with maximum tolerance of + 3/8" (10mm). Closures and pour stops shall have adequate adjustments to maintain this tolerance while accommodating the structural steel frame tolerances.

3.3 ERECTION - CONNECTIONS

A. Connect steel deck to the steel framework at ends of units and at intermediate supports as shown on the Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.

B. Deck to support welds shall be puddle welds of diameter and spacing shown on Contract Documents and/or approved shop drawings.

C. Use welding washers for puddle welding at deck thinner than 22 gauge (0.85mm) and where recommended by the manufacturer

D. Where headed studs occur, if fused to deck for full weld perimeter each headed stud may be considered to replace one puddle weld

E. Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports by button punching, side seam welding or screws, or as noted on Construction Drawings.

3.4 ERECTION – OPENINGS AND CLOSURES

A. Contractor to coordinate location of all openings with other trades (see Submittals).

B. Cut and install sleeves and holes through decking for openings indicated on the Architectural, Structural, and/or Mechanical-Electrical-Plumbing-Fire Protection Drawings. Cost shall be paid by the trade requiring such sleeves and holes. Sleeves will be furnished by the various trades requiring them. Provide and install reinforcement as required around sleeves. Where possible, leave deck intact and use block outs to hold back concrete at openings. Cut deck after concrete cures.

C. Provide miscellaneous headers and other steel reinforcing and supports welded to decking and structural steel as required at penetrations, around columns, etc. per typical details and manufacturer’s recommendations.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


D. Field cutting parallel to flutes shall be done in the low flutes, taking care to leave sufficient horizontal material to permit satisfactory welding of deck to supporting steel.

E. Openings required for work of other trades and not indicated on Architectural, Structural, Mechanical / Electrical / Plumbing / Fire Protection / Telecom Drawings shall be permitted only upon approval of the Design Professionals as to size and location.

F. Furnish and install tight-fitting closures at locations including but not limited to

1. Open ends of flutes and sides of decking (neoprene or sheet steel) 2. Open ends of all flutes at columns, walls and openings shown on

Contract Drawings 3. Panel ends where panels change direction or abut (sheet steel or closure

tape) 4. Between deck units and columns (sheet steel) 5. Between columns and exterior cladding (sheet steel) 6. Welding hole cover, with friction fastening, to close excess holes when

required (sheet steel).

3.5 WELDING

A. Welding of steel deck shall follow the technique outlined by the steel deck manufacturer.

B. Welding of headed studs shall conform to all AWS requirements, including workmanship, quality control, and inspection, which shall be performed by the Contractor and observed by the Owner’s testing agency.

3.6 ROOF SUMP PANS

Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12 inches (300mm) o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in roof sump bottom to accommodate drain size shown, coordinate with Plumbing Drawings.

3.7 TOUCH-UP

A. After installation touch-up welds on galvanized decking with specified galvanized repair paint to a dry film thickness of 2 mils, at all locations that will not receive concrete fill.

B. Touch-Up Painting: Where exposed to view, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on both surfaces of installed deck panels.

1. Touch up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

2. Where shop-painted surfaces are exposed in-service, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces.



© MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 053000


END OF SECTION



Bid Set 16 January 2018

Section 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

Page 1 of 10

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cold formed metal framing consisting of structural studs, joists and channel bracing as required for support of exterior metal cladding and wall assemblies, including parapets, infill panels and bracing as indicated and as required to meet System Requirements below.

B. Products Supplied, But Not Installed:

1. Anchor Bolts.

C. Products Installed, But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1. Insulation in inaccessible framing spaces.

2. Isolation gasket under sill plates and adjacent materials.

D. Related Sections:

1. 061643 – Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: Sheathing over structural metal studs.

2. 072100 – Building Insulation: Thermal insulation, including polyethylene foam, Isolation gasket for installation under this section.

3. 074216 – Metal Plate Wall Panels: For exterior wall panel joint channels.

1.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Reference Standard: SSMA – Steel Stud Manufacturers Association; ICC-ES ER-4943P S1, Product Technical Information for framing and joints.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Fabricator is responsible for designing framing systems to stud depth(s) as indicated, including bracing and anchorage to structural systems to support design loads transferred from exterior finished wall and roof assemblies, embedded anchors for cast-in-place concrete, and necessary modifications to meet specified design load requirements and maintain visual design concepts.

2. Employ registered professional engineer, licensed to practice structural engineering in jurisdiction where Project is located, to engineer each component of steel stud framing system.

3. Size components to withstand design loads, anticipated building movement and deflection of spandrel beams as indicated on Structural Drawings.

4. Where stud depths are indicated on the Drawings, fabricator shall design to maintain the walls depth(s) and clear spans as shown.

5. Maximum Allowable Deflection for metal framing: a. Remaining Systems (Wall and Roof): 1/360 of span, unless noted otherwise.

6. Anticipated Live Load Deflection of Internal. Beams: 1/240 of span.

7. Where supplementary structural framing is not provided at base of edge slab, windows, doors, louvers, exterior building features, etc., the stud wall system shall be designed accommodate contributed loads (wind, and dead loads).



Section 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING Page 2 of 10

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Fabricate and assemble systems to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

2. Fabricate and assemble system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue stain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 degrees F.

D. Interface With Adjacent Systems:

1. Integrate design and connections with adjacent construction.

2. Accommodate allowable tolerances and deflections of structural members in installations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for studs, fasteners, anchors, and accessory items to show compliance with this specification.

C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Mill Tests for sheet materials.

2. Expansion anchors.

3. Power-actuated anchors.

4. Mechanical fasteners.

5. Horizontal drift deflection clips

6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit signed and sealed shop drawings from a licensed professional engineer in the State of Louisiana showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of structural studs; show fastening and anchorage details, welding procedures and electrodes, and all erection accessories required.

1. Show supplemental strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories and details required for proper installation.

2. Shop drawings shall indicate where piping, major conduit runs, etc., may interrupt required stiffeners, etc.

3. Layout framing at wall penetrations to allow uniform clearance from effects of wind and thermal movement.

4. Detail critical connections between support steel, embedments, outrigger where cold formed metal framing is offset or interrupted and supplementary framing where cold formed framing ties back to structural steel; show weld-on studs connectors, etc., as required.

E. Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings for fabrication of embedded inserts and anchors as requirement for installation by other trades.




Page 3 of 10

F. Welding certificates: signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under Article entitled “Quality Assurance”.

G. Material Certificates: Signed by framing/accessory manufacturer certify compliance with material requirements.

H. Design Data: Submit structural analysis with calculations for steel framing assemblies stamped and signed by a professional structural engineered as indicated below.

1. Include a insurance certificate of coverage.

I. Research/Evaluation Reports: Current ICC-ES reports with installation instruction for each component.


A. Engineer Qualifications: Registered professional engineer licensed to practice structural engineering in jurisdiction where Project is located, with minimum of 5 years experience in design of steel stud framing system. Design framing in accordance with the following standards of practice:

1. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Compute structural properties of studs in accordance with AISI "Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Structural Members".

2. Component Design for Headers: Design according to AISI’s “Standard for Cold-formed Steel Framing – Header Design.”

B. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience on comparable steel stud framing projects.

C. Welders: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel".

D. Fasteners: Powder driven fasteners shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the framing and fastener manufacturer's current ICC-ES Reports.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Allowable Tolerances: Provide framing fabricated and erected to conform with the following allowable tolerances:

1. Variation From Plumb, Level and True To Lines: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960).

2. Member Spacing: Not more than 1/8-inch plus or minus from spacing indicated, but none accumulative.

3. Squareness: Not more than 1/8 inch, maximum of out square, each framing assembly.

G. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at Project site with installers of other work in accordance with requirements of Section 013100 – Project Management and Coordination. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work.




1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in Section 016000 – Product Requirements.

B. Protect metal framing from rusting and damage. Deliver to Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or with suitable waterproof coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet:

1. Studs and Runners: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M (ASTM C955), structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, steel of grade and coating as indicated. a. Grade: As required by structural performance. b. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.

2. Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A653/A653, structural steel, zinc coated, grade 50, Class 1 or 2, G90 (Z275) zinc coating. a. Grade: As required by structural performance. b. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.

B. Grade Limitations for Studs:

1. Grade: ST33H; Fy = 33 ksi minimum for 43 mils (nominal 18 ga.) and lighter.

2. Grade: ST50H; Fy = 50 ksi minimum for 54 mils (nominal 16 ga.) and heavier.

2.2 STUDS, JOISTS AND RUNNERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Scafco

2. Cemco

3. Dietrich Metal Framing

4. The Steel Network (TSN)

5. or approved equal

B. Studs and Joists: Thickness and grade as required by structural design calculations, except for following:

1. ‘C’-shape design, roll formed with punched web with manufacturer's standard return lip.

2. Sheet Metal Thickness: Not less than 43 mils (nominal 18 ga.).

3. Stud and Joist Web Depth: As indicated on drawings.

4. Flange Width: 2 inch, minimum.

C. Runners: Same width as studs, tight fit; solid web.

1. ‘U’-shaped steel channel.

2. Sheet Metal Thickness: Same as studs.




Page 5 of 10

3. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches, minimum; coordinate actual width with related sections where direct anchoring is required.

D. Steel Box or Back-To Back Headers: Manufacturer’s standard ‘C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges.

1. Sheet Metal Thickness: As required to carry loading, but not less than that required for studs.

2. Flange Width: Same as studs.

3. Provide minimum 16 gage studs (double at) jambs and at headers for door openings.

4. Optional Proprietary Products for Framed Openings: Jambs and headers as “JamStud” manufactured by Steel Network, Inc., thickness and grade as required to meet structural design requirements.

5. Provide Rough Opening framing with solid web members at sills, jambs, and bottom of headers to fully support flashings

2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips:

1. Manufacturer’s standard head clips, capable of accommodation upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment of stud web.

2. Connection products must have a valid ICC ES Report (or equivalent) complying with ICC Acceptance Criteria AC261.

3. Basis of Design Product: “VertiClip” and “DriftClip” by The Steel Network, Inc.

B. Framing Accessories: Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Steel Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade, coating weight and manufacturer used for framing members; thickness required by structural design calculations. Provide with manufacturer’s name stamped on each component. Connector devices shall include supplementary framing; bracing, bridging, and solid blocking; web stiffeners; anchor clips; end clips; foundation clips; gusset plates; stud kickers, knee braces, and girts; joist hangers and end closures; hole reinforcing plates and backer plates.

1. Concealed Backing Strip: Refer to Architectural drawings. a. Thickness: .0635” (16ga), minimum, G-60 galvanized.

2.4 ANCHORS, CLIPS AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; refer to section 055000 – Metal Fabrications.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel, hex-headed bolts, headless, hooked bolts, headless bolts, with encased end threaded, and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Provide bolts listed or approved by one or more of the following and of diameter and length as required by structural design calculations.




1. Underwriters Laboratory.

2. Factory Mutual.

3. International Code Council.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Provide fasteners listed or approved by one or more of the following and of type, diameter and length as required by structural design calculations:

1. Underwriters Laboratory.

2. Factory Mutual.

3. International Code Council.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere

F. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.3.


A. Galvanizing Touch-Up Paint: One of the following High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds complying with SSPC-Paint 20 DOD-P-210035, Spray–Can applicator (95%, minimum zinc residual –dry film):

1. ZRC Worldwide “Galvilite” Galvanizing Repair Compound.

2. Welco Alloys "Cold-Galv".

3. Rust-Oleum "7085 Zinc Rich Cold Galvanize Compound".

B. Grout: Select from one of the following:

1. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

2. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multi-monomer plastic, nonleaching.

D. Isolation Gaskets: Refer to Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation; closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch thick, manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

B. Fabricate in accordance with requirements of ASTM C955; and ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria AC-46 and AC261.




Page 7 of 10

C. Cut framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened.

D. Fabricate studs of sizes and sheet metal thicknesses as required by design requirements.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Exterior (Applications) Wall Components: Galvanized, ASTM A1003/A1003M, G90 (Z275) minimum coating.

B. Interior (Applications) Wall Components: Galvanized, ASTM A1003/A1003M, G60 (Z180), minimum coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General:

1. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

2. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this Section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this Section.

B. Coordination:

1. At Load Bearing Sill Plates: Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

2. Isolation Between Concrete/Masonry and Sill Plates and Vertical Walls: Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations, and between vertical framing and concrete/masonry wall or structure.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits and walls, verifying that spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions.

4. Coordinate installation of studs with spacing of exterior wall panel joint channel spacing.

C. Preparation For Spray Applied Fireproofing:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

2. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-




resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General Requirements: Install metal framing systems in accordance with AISI’s Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions, ASTM C1007 and manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations and approved shop drawings.

1. Use saw or shear for cutting of steel framing members; torch cutting is not permitted.

2. Bearing surfaces shall provide complete uniform and level bearing support for bottom tracks.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as indicated under installation requirements. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and

complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

H. Erection Tolerances: Refer to Part 1 requirements.

3.4 EXTERIOR WALL INSTALLATION

A. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks, sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches on center spacing for nail or powder-driven fasteners; provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.

1. Secure top runner track to building construction by welding or other method best suited to conditions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.




Page 9 of 10

2. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural element or they shall be butt welded or spliced together.

3. Install continuous length by full width Isolation gasket under all exterior facing sill, end and top runners, as applicable to reduce thermal bridging.

B. Studs: Set studs plumb and true with the stud web and flanges abutting the track web with the open side of studs facing in the same direction. Use full length studs between runner tracks with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track.

1. Space studs not to exceed 16 inches on center and to align with exterior wall panel joint channel spacing, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

2. Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by welding at both inside and outside flanges. Use fillet welds for attachment; size of welds as indicated on drawings.

3. Align all punch-out holes in studs within a continuous length of wall to receive utilities and horizontal stiffeners within plus or minus 1/2 inch.

4. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

5. Frame wall openings larger than 3 feet wide with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions, or approved optional proprietary products. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated.

6. Construct corners using minimum 3 studs. Provide double studs at wall openings, and at door and window jambs, except where more than 3 studs are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions, or approved optional proprietary products.

C. Supplementary Framing: Install bracing and blocking in stud framing as indicated on approved shop drawings and as required for wall supported materials as fixtures, equipment, services, casework. heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work. Where type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer’s recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

1. Brace studs that support fixtures, mechanical and electrical items with stud sections or channel bridging as required by design to support applied loads without excess deflection or stress. Install additional framing members as required for attachment of fixtures.

D. Horizontal Stiffeners: Install 1-1/2 inch cold rolled steel channels or flat steel sheet straps horizontally, spaced as indicated on approved shop drawings. Secure channels and straps at each stud intersection.

E. Diagonal Bracing: Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps where indicated on approved shop drawings to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom track.

F. Bridging: Provide bridging at following locations and elsewhere as required by design:

1. For Non-Load bearing Exterior Walls:

G. Walls less than 10'-0" in height: 1 row mid-height of wall.

H. Walls greater than 10'-0" in height: Maximum 5 feet on center.

1. For Load bearing Exterior Walls:




a. Walls less than 10'-0" in Height: 2 rows equally spaced. b. Walls greater than 10'-0" in Height: Maximum 3'-4" on center.

I. Miscellaneous Framing: Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing systems.

J. Welding: All welding shall be done by certified welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.3.

3.5 TOUCH-UP OF WELDS & ABRADED AREAS

A. General: Comply with ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

1. Treat field welds and abraded areas using wire brush or other means to remove slag, and clean with a phosphoric acid base compound or strong solvent as recommended by manufacturer of touch-up material.

2. Apply touch-up material with brush over affected areas per manufacturer's directions to achieve a dry film thickness of 3 mils.

END OF SECTION



Section 055200 HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL ASSEMBLIES

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide custom exterior rails as indicated on the Drawings.


1. 014000 – Quality Requirements: Governing codes and standards.

2. 055000 – Metal Fabrications: For cast- in sleeves for mounting posts.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide guardrail assemblies which, when installed, are capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated when tested per ASTM E935 and meeting IBC Section 1607.7.1.

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. 50 plf. applied in any direction at the top and transfer load to supporting member,

and a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the rail. 1) Deflection Limitation for Handrail Assembly: L/360 maximum between

supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications for all products.

B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer installation instructions for all field assembled components.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of handrail and guardrail assemblies. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections and any other pertinent information. Show anchorage and accessory items.

1. Drawings shall show type and grade or strength of steel for each fabrication item.

2. Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for design loadings, include structural computations, material properties and other information needed for structural analysis.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWI symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

4. Indicate all bolted and mechanically fastened connections showing type, alloy, and size of fasteners for anchoring components included under Related Sections.

5. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of sleeves, anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.

D. Samples: Submit representative samples of prefinished materials and products in related section and as may be requested by Architect.




Section 055200 HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL ASSEMBLIES Page 2 of 5


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator or firm supervised by the fabricator of assemblies specified in this Section.

C. Handrail and Guardrail Design: Comply with requirements of IBC, Section 1607.7.1 “Handrails and Guards”.

D. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". Welders to be employed in work shall be certified by AWS within the previous 12 months.

E. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

F. Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.


A. Verification of Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication, obtain measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details for accurate fit. Allow sufficient time for taking field measurements so that fabrication and installation are within construction schedule. Exact measurements are the Contractor’s responsibility.

B. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Embedded Anchorages: Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction before start of such work. Coordinate placement and schedule with respective trades. Provide setting diagrams and instructions as required for installation.

B. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed stair constructions. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. General: Comply with requirements specified in Section 016000 –Product Requirements.

B. After fabrication, provide PVC film on handrails and other Prefinished exposed to view components, and remain in place after installation, until Substantial Completion.





Page 3 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel (SST):

1. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304L, Schedule 40.

2. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304L.

B. Fasteners, Washer And Pads:

1. General: Provide low–profile, plain finished fasteners as standard with fabricator, or otherwise specified. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. Fasteners to remain exposed shall be AISI 300 Series Stainless Steel.

2. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A.

3. Screws and Finish Washers: 300 series stainless steel where indicated.

4. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

5. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

6. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

7. Pads: Neoprene washers, type as recommended by the panel manufacturer.

8. Specialty Hardware: Type as indicated.

9. Finish For Exposed Fasteners: Match adjacent finish.

C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

D. Miscellaneous: Provide other materials shown or required for complete fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metals.

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Fabrication and Erection Requirements: Sizes of handrails and guardrail members indicated on the drawings are minimum. Fabricator shall be responsible for fabricating assemblies that meet the “Structural Performance” requirements as specified. Minor adjustments to material thickness and configurations will be acceptable when in the fabricator's experience overall performance will be achieved. All such modifications will be indicated on the submittal drawings and will be approved by the Architect prior to fabrication.

B. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of work. Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise.

1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

2. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion




Section 055200 HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL ASSEMBLIES Page 4 of 5

resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

4. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

5. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.3 RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS (GENERAL)

A. General: Fabricate railings and guardrails to design, dimensions, and details indicated. Provide railings and handrail members formed of shapes and sizes indicated or required to meet the requirements previously specified.

B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At tee provide seamless welded joints.

C. Form simple and compound curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross-section throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.

D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, except where otherwise indicated.

E. Mountings:

1. For wall mountings provide wall stainless steel brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for inter- connections of attachments for railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and guardrails to concrete or masonry work.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHING

A. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.

B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured polished with silicone carbide to produce finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

1. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.

2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.





Page 5 of 5

B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)

A. General: Install work as detailed and as follows:

1. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, and other connectors as required.

2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Except where shop finishing is required, weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

4. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation.

B. Guardrails and Handrails:

1. Adjust prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction.

2. Anchor posts in concrete by means of core-drilling or pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

C. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off excess grout and leave 1/8" build-up, sloped away from post. For installation exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal grout to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

1. Anchor posts by welding or mechanical fastening directly to steel supporting members, indicated on approved drawings for type and materials indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect pre-finished metal fabrications from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




Section 055813 COLUMN COVERS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior aluminum column covers indicated on drawings.

2. Sealant and backer rods between column cover sections at exterior locations.

B. Related Section:

1. 050514 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

2. 054000 - Cold Form Metal Framing: Support framing.

3. 074216 – Metal Plate Wall Panels

4. 079200 – Joint Sealants.

5. Division 26 – Miscellaneous items to be coordinated and installed in column covers.


A. Wind Loads: Minimum design wind pressures, both inward and outward acting perpendicular to column covers shall satisfy all load requirements. Design to withstand positive and negative wind pressures as indicated on the Drawings with maximum deflection of any supporting member shall not exceed L/240 of the span.

B. Anchorage: Design, furnish and install anchor assemblies, reinforcements and support framing, including related connections, embedments, and/or fasteners for column covers as required for full compliance with the specified Performance Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing size and length of column covers, thickness of materials, method of attachment to structure, location and type of joints within assembly, and other pertinent information. Show details at vertical joints and transmissions to adjacent substrates and assemblies to prevent weather and water intrusion.

B. Calculations: Submit structural calculations for anchorage’s demonstrating compliance with the structural criteria specified in article entitled “Performance Requirements”.

C. Certifications: Submit written certification from coating manufacturer’s stating that the coating applicator is approved, and that the finish coating will be warranted as specified.

D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit 12 inch square samples of aluminum sheet with specified finish in selected color; include coating manufacturer’s technical data sheets verifying compliance with this Specification. Submit additional samples if required for approval.

E. Warranty Draft: Submit draft of warranty with required inclusions for review. Submit draft warranty with shop drawings.

F. Contract Closeout Submittal: Include the following at time of Project Closeout:




Section 055813 COLUMN COVERS Page 2 of 4

1. Submit executed warranty; include in "Warranties Manual" specified in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.

2. Submit coating manufacturer's recommended touch-up procedures and instructions for cleaning, including acceptable materials, as well as those which should not be used; include in "Materials, Equipment, and Finishes Manual" specified in Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals.


A. Fabricator/Installer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work and must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in erection of ornamental metals similar to that required for this Project.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE


B. Protect all members from damage during shipping, handling and installation. Provide non-abrasive packaging material between sections to prevent damage.

1. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store in a manner to prevent water and/or condensation from being trapped between adjacent surfaces.

2. Do not store stack or column covers in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

C. Protective Wrapping: Painted panels shall be shipped with plastic sheeting or a strippable film coating. Remove strippable film or coating prior to installation. Do not allow the strippable film or coating to remain on the panels in extreme heat, cold, or in direct sunlight or other UV source.


A. Verification of Measurements: Before fabrication, verify all measurements at the job site to ensure proper fit. Allow sufficient time for taking accurate field measurements so that fabrication and installation are within construction schedule.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. General: Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.

B. Sealant Warranty: Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants for warranty requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM COLUMN COVERS

A. Product: Aluminum column covers (exterior and interior) shall be fabricated to sizes and shapes as indicated on drawings. Covers shall be completely shop fabricated, finished, and shipped ready for field installation.

1. Wall Thickness: Minimum 0.125 inch thick.




Section 055813 COLUMN COVERS

Page 3 of 4

2. Approved Manufacturers include but aren’t limited to: Firestone Metal Products, Inc., Baker Metal Products, Inc., Pittcon, and Custom Enclosures.

B. Aluminum Sheet: Sheet material, 5052 alloy H32, or 3003 alloy, H14 temper conforming to ASTM B209.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: Extruded shapes, 6063-T5 or T-6 or 6061 alloy conforming to ASTM B221.

2.2 FABRICATION:

A. Fabricate from two-pieces for full covers, from one-piece for half covers. Form covers in a manner to achieve smooth shapes. Provide in continuous vertical lengths without horizontal joints, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

1. Vertical Joints:

a. Exterior Locations, Free–Standing: Similar to UNA-CLAD “Series 200 Hairline Joint System”, or approved equal.

2. Edges: Fabricate with edges bent at 90 degrees for attachment to clips, allowing covers to be installed without the use of exposed fasteners; secure attachment clips to panel edges using stainless steel screws.

3. Base Collars and Trim: Fabricate sections from same material as covers with top and bottom flange or stiffener for anchoring. Side seams shall align with cover above.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings.

C. Support Framing: Provide all required stainless steel or aluminum shapes, angles, channels, etc. for the installation of covers, complying with Section 054000. Prime steel surfaces.

D. Reinforcement and Stiffeners: Provide stainless steel at stacks and extruded aluminum stiffeners on backside of stacks and column covers as determined by the Fabricator to meet the required wind load deflection criteria, and to achieve a smooth surface free of waves and buckles. Stiffener sizes, thickness and bearing surfaces as determined by Fabricator.

1. Apply stiffeners, if required, using structural silicone sealant adhesive.

2. After stiffeners have been installed, there shall be no telegraphing or visible signs of their placement.

E. Fasteners: All attachment screws shall be Series 300 stainless steel; sizes as determined by manufacturer to meet the Performance Requirements as previously specified.


A. Sealants: Sealant for use between column cover sections shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealants; sealant shall be Type “A” as specified.

2.4 FINISH AND COLOR

A. Finish column covers including all trim members and flashing members, indicated to match, as specified in Section 050514 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.




Section 055813 COLUMN COVERS Page 4 of 4

1. Color: Paint-8.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install column and stack covers plumb and true in accordance with approved shop drawings. All fasteners shall be concealed in the finish work.

B. Sealant: Installation of sealant, including joint preparation and sealant backing shall conform to requirements specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Architect and that column covers remain without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




Section 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Composite metal panel used for canopy soffit panels and miscellaneous formed metal trim or soffit panels as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Wire rope at Green Wall.



2. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: for items made of formed metal for flashings and trim.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for composite metal panel.

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For composite metal panel, provide sample color chips in a range of three colors to match Architect’s sample. If sample colors are not approved during verification, provide three additional colors at Architect’s request.

D. Samples for Verification: Using the three colors approved for initial selection, provide samples of size indicated below. If sample colors are not approved, provide three additional samples using colors requested for a second round of initial selection.

1. 6-inch- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing composite metal panels similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.


A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.

B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.



Section 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL Page 2 of 5


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Composite Panels:

1. Aluminum faced panel with thermoplastic core. a. Overall Panel Thickness: 0.157 inches. b. Aluminum Face and Backer Sheet Thickness: 0.0197 inches. c. Aluminum Alloy: AA 3003 at coated finish.

2. Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching core of extruded thermoplastic (polyethylene) material formed in continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Products laminated sheet by sheet or in batch process using glues or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers include, but aren’t limited to: a. Alucobond, Alusuisse Composites, Inc. b. Alpolic, Mitsubishi Chemical Company. c. Custom Metal Contracting Ltd., Calgary, Alberta. d. UNA-FAB Composite Panels, Copper Sales, Inc. e. Reynobond, Reynolds Metals Company. f. Miller Clapperton.

4. Finish: Three-coat metallic fluoropolymer Coating in accordance with Section 05 05 14.




Page 3 of 5

a. Colors: 1) PAINT - 8 at Multimodal Structure(s). 2) PAINT - 14 at Moving Walk Structure(s).

B. Wire Rope and Fittings:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide all components by Jakob Rope Systems or comparable.

2. Wire Rope: 6-by-7 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316. 3. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel, and

with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. a. Types:

1) Eye end / swaged internal thread end. 2) Clevis with support washer. 3) Wall anchor with internal thread. 4) Lock nuts and washers.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Panel Stiffeners: As recommended by panel system manufacturer.

B. Silicone Sealant and Backer Rod: Comply with Section 079200 - Joint Sealants.

C. Supplementary Framing (Subgirts): Minimum 0.048 inch thick galvanized steel meeting ASTM A653, Grade 230 with G90 galvanized coating; refer also to related sections.

D. Shims: Non-Ferrous, non conduction spacers as recommended by the panel manufacturer.

E. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items and for attaching them to other work unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.

C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) and support with concealed stiffeners.

D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9042&mf=04&src=wd&mf=&src=wd



Section 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL Page 4 of 5

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and support other construction.

F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.

G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.

1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of metal being joined.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 FABRICATION, WIRE ROPE

A. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations.




Page 5 of 5

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal.

1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.


A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



Section 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood nailers used in canopy assemblies and similar locations subject to moisture intrusion; pressure treated (PT).

2. Plywood sheathing used in canopy assemblies.


1. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Wood-Preservers' Association:

1. AWPA C27: Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process

B. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology:

1. DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood

2. DOC PS 2: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.

3. DOC PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard.

C. National Forest Products Association - National Design Specification for Wood Construction and Supplement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide product data and ICC-ES engineering evaluation reports for engineered wood products, power driven fasteners, adhesives, and wood treatment materials.

C. Submit following Informational Submittals:

1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article.

2. Manufacturer's instructions for re-treatment of field cut (PT) materials.

3. Certify fastener type and coating thickness for each application.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors.




Section 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 5


A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20; and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.

1. Inspection Agencies: a. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. b. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). c. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. d. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. e. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

B. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with DOC PS 1, or, for products not manufactured under applicable APA Performance Standard for type of panel indicated.

C. Grade Marks:

1. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.

2. Lumber: Include symbol of grading agency, mill name, grade, species, grading rules, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacturer.

3. Plywood: Include type, class identification index, and agency mark.

4. Pressure treatment: Include quality mark of grading agency which maintains continued supervision, testing, inspection, and re-examination service over product quality as described in AWPA standards.

D. AWPA Use Categories:

1. (PT) Treatment: UC2, Interior, subject to dampness.

E. Certificates of Compliance:

1. Submit manufacturer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed specified requirements.

2. Provide proof of Compliance with EPA directive to eliminate chromated copper arsenate (CCA) treated wood products.

F. Anchoring for Canopy Nailers: Factory Mutual, Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet - I-49, “Perimeter Flashing”, Latest Edition”. Submit installation drawings in accordance with requirements of related canopying Section.



B. Delivery: Deliver treated materials bundled and marked to identify treatment.

C. Storage: Store treated materials for easy identification and protect from moisture; provide well-ventilated dry storage.

D. Handling: In accordance with AWPB standards. In addition to materials used in treatment, furnish additional material for field treatment of cuts.





Page 3 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber, General:

1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use.

2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide seasoned lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

4. All nailers shall be of sufficient thickness so as to be flush with the insulation/membrane.

5. Wood nailers, blocking, cants and other rough carpentry shall be chamfered, beveled, shaved, planed, or shimmed as necessary to provide smooth transition to adjacent materials.

B. Lumber: Provide No. 2 Grade Mixed Southern Pine. Pressure treat all lumber in contact with concrete or masonry and lumber used at canopy construction.

C. Plywood: Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark.

1. Plywood for use at canopy assemblies: Exterior, Structural I; 3/4 inch thick with span rating not less than 16/0.


A. Anchorages and Fastening Devices:

1. Provide all anchoring devices required for proper installation and anchorage of work. Use only hot-dipped galvanized fasteners for exterior locations, except as indicated otherwise. Use anchor bolts and expansion shields for anchoring wood members to concrete, size and quantity required or as shown, to draw and hold members rigidly and permanently in place. a. Screws: ASME B18.6.1; galvanized sheet metal screws, self-tapping, intended for

use with studs shown. b. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex

nuts and, where indicated, flat washers

2. Hot-Dip Zinc Coating: Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for weight of zinc coating on individual components, except use Type 304 stainless steel where exposed in cavities or where chemical formulations of wood preservatives include one of the following: a. Alkaline copper quat (ACQ) b. Copper azole (CA types A and B), and c. Sodium borate (SBX).

B. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material for Exterior Applications: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.




Section 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 5

C. Shapes and Connectors: Commercial Quality: ASTM A653, G90, zinc coating, hot dip galvanized, flattened sheets, except G185, minimum wherever ACQ, CA and SBX wood preservatives are used.

D. Other Materials: Provide other miscellaneous materials shown or required for rough carpentry installation.

2.3 WOOD TREATMENTS

A. Preservative Treatment (PT): Treat all miscellaneous canopying nailers, curbs and similar wood materials related to canopy construction. Treatment shall comply with the applicable requirements of the American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB).

1. Provide water-borne treatment in accordance with AWPB LP-2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). Pressure treatment in accordance with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Minimum preservative retention shall be 0.25 pounds per cubic foot.

2. Pressure treated lumber shall bear AWPB quality and meet the appropriate AWPB quality control procedures.

3. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

4. Field treat field cuts and penetration damage in accordance with AWPB Standard M-4. a. Manufacturer: Green “EndCoat”, Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc. Griffin, GA., or

approved equal.

B. Inspect each piece of treated lumber and plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Carefully cut, lay out and fit carpentry work indicated on drawings and specified hereinafter; use sufficient bolts, screws, nails, spikes and other rough hardware to insure permanent attachment. Drive nails perpendicular to grain in lieu of toe nailing, unless otherwise directed. Install all work in accurate locations to true lines, plumb and level.

1. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. a. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

B. Blocking & Bracing: Provide rough lumber members in sizes as noted on drawings or as required for the conditions of the installation.

C. Nailers: Provide rough lumber members, nominal 2-inch stock. Install to true lines in accurate locations and elevations for attachment of other materials as indicated on drawings.

1. Canopy Nailers: Secure nailers to resist a minimum force of 300 lbs. per linear foot, according to requirements of FM I-49.





Page 5 of 5

D. Shims: Provide rough lumber members formed and shaped for tight wedge fit where required for installation of materials or equipment in proper alignment, level, and plumbness.

E. Plywood: Install in areas as indicated on drawings; securely attach to metal studs with Tek type screws. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

3.2 TOLERANCE

A. Lumber Framing Members: 1/4-inch, maximum from true position.

B. Plywood: 1/16 inch plus of minus, maximum from true plane.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect products from moisture absorption and subsequent warping or deterioration until subsequent construction can proceed.

END OF SECTION




Section 061643 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Gypsum sheathing board and accessories behind exterior wall and soffit systems to receive direct application of water and air barrier indicated in related section, and used behind:

1. Metal siding and cladding assemblies as indicated.

2. Solid Composite wall panel assemblies as indicated


1. 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Wall framing, blocking and nailers.

2. 072700 - Water And Air Barrier: Semi-impermeable and UV-resistant-type membrane systems for application over gypsum sheathing to receive metal wall panels assemblies.

3. 074216 – Metal Plate Wall Panels

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 1002 Standard Specifications for Steel Drill Screws for application of Gypsum Board.

2. ASTM C 1278 Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panels.

3. ASTM C 1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.

4. ASTM D 7273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

5. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

6. ASTM E 119 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

B. Gypsum Association (GA): GA-253 Recommended Specifications for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature on products handling, storage, and installation (cutting and fastening) requirements to be used under this Section, clearly marked and fully described and as required under material exposure warranty.

C. Product Certificates: Submit performance data showing compliance with article Quality Assurance.


A. Performance Criteria: Exterior sheathing rated in accordance with meeting the following:

1. Fastener Holding Strength (lbs.): 240, minimum per ASTM C473, based upon 5/8 inch thickness. a. Corrosion Resistance: Rated for 2,000 of salt-spray testing per ASTM B117.


Linear Park



Section 061643 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING Page 2 of 4

b. Negative Wind Load Resistance (based on 16 inch span): 200, minimum per ASTM E330, based on 8 inch spacing.

2. Fire Resistance: a. ASTM E 84: Flame Spread 5, Smoke Developed 0. b. ICC-ES Report: ER 5578 (USG Fiberock Brand). c. UL Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 1 2001

1) U419 - Metal Stud, Non-Load Bearing 2) U423 - Metal Stud, Load Bearing

3. Moisture Resistance: Meet or Exceeds ASTM C 1396.

4. Mold-Resistance: Rating of 10 per ASTM D3273.

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Installation Precautions: Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions including the following:

1. For installation of surface applied flashings, trim and membrane waterproofing flashing, coordinate locations of concealed blocking and nailers for full support of applied materials with structural stud installer.

2. For in-place exposure up to six-months, fill all gaps resulting from cuts, corners, joint and machine cuts with manufacture’s recommended exterior caulking at time of erection, except where water and air barrier follows installation within manufacturer’s acceptable exposure limitations.

3. Within 30 days of sheathing installation cover the sheathing with specified water and air barrier.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver gypsum sheathing board and related materials in original packages bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer.

B. Store gypsum sheathing board so that it is protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum sheathing boards flat on leveled supports off the ground under protective covering. Handle gypsum sheathing board to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Comply with Warranty provisions specified Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.

B. Provide sheathing manufacture’s written 1-year ‘Weather Exposure” warranty against dimensional changes in board or the loosening of fasteners due to moisture migration and provide extended warranty as indicated below.

C. Manufacturer’s standard 10 year Warranty against manufacturing defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Sheathing Board: Fire resistant Type “X”, formulated water resistant throughout entire panel meeting performance criteria.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers include, but aren’t limited to:


Linear Park



Section 061643 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

Page 3 of 4

a. Georgia-Pacific “Dens-Glas Gold” b. BPB America, Inc. "Glas-Roc Sheathing"

2. Product Standard: ASTM C1177, Type X, and exceeding the properties of ASTM C1396.

3. Thickness/Width: 5/8 inch thick by 48 inches wide; maximum permissible lengths, except as otherwise indicated.

4. Finish Edge and End Configuration: "Square" shaped edges and ends.

5. Weight: 3.0 psf for 5/8 inch thick panel.

6. Mold Growth: Rating of ‘10’ per ASTM D3273.

B. Basis-of-Design Accessories:

1. Screws: USG self-drilling, self-tapping, sheathing screws, Type SF-Steel Framing, self-driving wafer head design, minimum 0.40 inch diameter with driving recess, No. 2 “Phillips” design, or approved equal meeting performance requirements. a. Length as required by sheathing manufacturer, but not less that 1-1/4 inch long as

required to obtain 3/8 inch penetration in metal studs per ICC Legacy Report ER-5578; provide corrosion resistant finish in form of cadmium plating or proprietary coating.

b. Finish: Packaged with “Green Coating”; ASTM B117, corrosion-resistant coating, rated 2000 hours of salt-spray before developing 5% red rust.

2. Metal Trim, Concealed: a. At Control Joints: USG No. 093 with 3/32 inch grounds, zinc alloy. b. Panel Corners: USG “Dur-A-Bead”, galvanized coated.

3. Sealant For Joint Seams: One-part, low modulus silicone sealant for use as air and water-resistant barrier for panels joint, seams and transitions in sheathing; complete with primer as recommended by the sealant manufacturer and compliant with AAMA 808.3-92.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine metal framing to ensure concealed blocking and nailers are in place, and that framing is ready for installation of sheathing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions, GA-253, and the following for the installation of gypsum sheathing.

1. Cut boards using manufacturer’s approved method at penetrations, edges and other obstructions of the work; fit tight against abutting work.

2. Coordinate installation of sheathing with installation of flashing, joint sealers and water and air barrier installation so that these combined materials are installed in the sequence and manner which prevents exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior gypsum assembly to the interior.

3. Apply fasteners so that screw heads bear tightly against face of gypsum sheathing boards, but do not cut into substrate.


Linear Park



Section 061643 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING Page 4 of 4

B. Installation of Sheathing: Apply sheathing in longest lengths as practicable with orientation of boards running in manufacturer’s approved direction, either vertically or horizontally and with smooth face to exterior.

1. All finish edges shall occur centered over flanges of metal framing; staggering of joints in adjacent rows is not required, unless required to achieve component wind resistant data submitted as part of system design. Minimum gage for framing shall not be less than following”

2. At end joints; bring end joints into contact with each other without forcing. Cut and fit snugly around all openings.

3. Fasten sheathing to metal framing with specified fasteners. Drive fasteners in field of panel first, working toward ends and edges. Space fasteners max. 12” o.c. for walls and soffits with perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inch from edge and less than 5/8 inch from ends and edges with framing at maximum 24” o.c. for walls and 12” for soffits. Drive screws so heads are flush with surface.

4. Install metal accessories and trim as work progress in accordance with manufacturer’ recommendations and requirements of Section 092900 – Gypsum Board, for locations and spacing.

3.3 COORDINATION WITH SECTION 072700 - WATER AND AIR BARRIER

A. Mandatory Requirements: Treat cut and raw edges of exterior gypsum sheathing with flexible flashing membrane at end of each days installation to prevent exposure to moisture in accordance with Section 072700 – Water and Air Barrier.

B. Joint Seam And Terminations: Refer to Section 072700 – Water and Air Barrier for requirements

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior gypsum sheathing, exposed to weather, from damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Method of protection (e.g., tarps, plastic sheets, etc.) is optional.

END OF SECTION


Linear Park



Section 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Finish carpentry items.

B. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on wood treatment.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.

C. Samples: Submit two samples of wood slats 24 inch long.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.


A. Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Exterior Woodwork Items:

1. Wood cladding for concrete seat wall.

2. Wood service counter-top.

2.2 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Wood Slats:

1. Product: KEBONY – Southern yellow pine; Quality J10 (EN 942) or better, impregnanted with a water-based furfuryl alcohol solution in a full-cell impregnated procedure.

2. Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Moisture Content: 19 percent, maximum.

2.3 FASTENINGS

A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; zinc plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.

1. Power actuated fasteners are not acceptable.

B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.




Section 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 2

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site.

B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION




Section 067413 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED GRATINGS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) gratings, with all appurtenances, accessories and incidentals necessary to produce a complete, operable and serviceable installation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below (latest revision applicable) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced herein. The publications are referred to within the text by the designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) Test Methods:

a. ASTM D 635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position

b. ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish manufacturer's shop drawings clearly showing material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers, complete details for the fabrication and erection of components including, but not limited to, location, lengths, type and sizes of fasteners, clip angles, member sizes, and connection details.

B. Submit the manufacturer’s published literature including structural design data, structural

properties data, grating load/deflection tables, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports as applicable, concrete anchor systems and their allowable load tables, and design calculations for systems not sized or designed in the contract documents.

C. Submit sample pieces of each item specified herein for acceptance as to quality and color.


A. All items to be provided under this Section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems. Additionally, if requested, a record of at least five (5) previous, separate, similar successful installations in the last five (5) years shall be provided.

B. Manufacturer shall offer a 3 year limited warranty on all FRP products against defects in

materials and workmanship. C. Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001-2008 standard. D. Manufacturer shall provide proof of certification from at least two other quality assurance

programs for its facilities or products (DNV, ABS, USCG, AARR). E. Manufacturer shall provide proof, via independent testing, that materials proposed as a

solution do not contain heavy metals in amounts greater than that allowed by current EPA requirements.





Page 2 of 4

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility.

B. Storage of Products: All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion,

cracking, chipping, twisting, other deformations, and other types of damage. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts are to be stored in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit (21 to 29 degrees Celsius) until they are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fibergrate® molded gratings as manufactured by:

Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc.

5151 Belt Line Road, Suite 1212 Dallas, Texas 75254-7028 USA (800) 527-4043 Phone (972) 250-1530 Fax Website: www.fibergrate.com E-mail: [email protected]

2.2 GENERAL

A. All FRP items furnished under this Section shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be continuous roving in sufficient quantities as needed by the

application and/or physical properties required.

C. Resin shall be Isophthalic Polyester with chemical formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as required.

D. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids

and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering.

E. All mechanical grating clips shall be manufactured of Type 316SS (stainless steel).

2.3 MOLDED FRP GRATING

A. Manufacture: Grating shall be of a one piece molded construction with tops and bottoms of bearing bars and cross bars in the same plane. Grating shall have (a square mesh pattern providing bidirectional strength. Grating shall be reinforced with continuous rovings of equal number of layers in each direction. The top layer of reinforcement shall be no more than 1/8" below the top surface of the grating so as to provide maximum stiffness and prevent resin chipping of unreinforced surfaces. Percentage of glass (by weight) shall not exceed 35% so


http://www.fibergrate.com/

mailto:[email protected]




Page 3 of 4

as to achieve maximum corrosion resistance.

After molding, no dry glass fibers shall be visible on any surface of bearing bars or cross bars. All bars shall be smooth and uniform with no evidence of fiber orientation irregularities, interlaminar voids, porosity, resin rich or resin starved areas.

B. Grating bar intersections are to be filleted to a minimum radius of 1/16” to eliminate local

stress concentrations and the possibility of resin cracking at these locations. C. Resin system: The resin system used in the manufacture of the grating shall be Corvex® D. Manufacturer may be required to submit corrosion data from tests performed on actual

grating products in standard chemical environments. Corrosion resistance data of the base resin from the manufacturer is not a true indicator of grating product corrosion resistance and shall not be accepted.

E. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

F. Depth: 1-1/4" with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16".

G. Mesh Configuration: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16" mesh centerline to

centerline.

H. Load/Deflection: Grating design loads shall be less than manufacturers published maximum recommended loads. Maximum recommended loads shall be determined by acoustic emission testing. Grating shall be designed for a uniform load of 100 psf or concentrated load of 300 lb. Deflection is not to exceed 0.375” or L/D = 120, whichever is less.

I. The manufacturer shall certify that the stiffness of all panels manufactured are never more

than 2.5% below the published load-deflection values. 2.4 GRATING FABRICATION

A. Measurements: Grating supplied shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown or specified. The Contractor shall provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit field conditions as required by grating manufacturer to complete the work. When field dimensions are not required, contractor shall determine correct size and locations of required holes or cutouts from field dimensions before grating fabrication.

B. Layout: Each grating section shall be readily removable, except where indicated on drawings.

Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the contract drawings. Grating openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so each section of grating is readily removable.

C. Sealing: All shop fabricated grating cuts shall be coated with vinyl ester resin to provide

maximum corrosion resistance. All field fabricated grating cuts shall be coated similarly by the contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

D. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel hold-down clips shall be provided and spaced at

maximum of four feet apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer.





Page 4 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gratings in accordance with manufacturer’s assembly drawings.

B. Fasten grating panels securely in place with hold-down fasteners as specified herein.

C. Field cut and drill fiberglass reinforced plastic products with carbide or diamond tipped bits and blades.

D. Seal cut or drilled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Follow manufacturer's instructions when cutting or drilling fiberglass products or using resin products; provide adequate ventilation.

END OF SECTION




Section 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for substrate.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.

2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.

3. Henry Company.

4. Karnak Corporation.

5. Koppers Inc.

6. Meadows, W. R., Inc.

B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II or III, Class 1.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5976&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456828650&mf=04&src=wd








Section 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 2 of 3

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar or asbestos-free fibered mastic of type recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work.

1. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer.

C. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.

2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.

B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.

1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat or one trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft.




Section 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

Page 3 of 3

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION




Section 071900

WATER REPELLENTS Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces:

1. Cast stone masonry.



1. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Applicator.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Apply water repellent to each type of substrate required.

1. Locate each test application as directed by Architect.

2. Final approval by Architect of water-repellent application will be from test applications.


A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements:

1. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below 100 deg F (37.8 deg C) and will remain so for 24 hours.

2. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below 100 deg F (37.8 deg C).

3. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.

4. Not less than 24 hours have passed since surfaces were last wet.

5. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period.




Section 071900 WATER REPELLENTS Page 2 of 3

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS

A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. PROSOCO, Inc.; SL100.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations for exterior applications by method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents.

3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent.

4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.

B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.

C. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4612&mf=04&src=wd




Section 071900

WATER REPELLENTS Page 3 of 3

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.

B. Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 15 psi- (103 kPa-) pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzle roller or brush to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated.

C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.


A. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied:

1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water-repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.

B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested.

2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Hall A Renovation New Orleans, Louisiana © MA EDR N14023\14027


Section 072100 THERMAL INSULATION

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Batt/blanket insulation and rigid insulation as indicated on drawings, including, but not limited to:

1. Batt/blanket insulation.

2. Semi-rigid insulation

3. Insulating Foam Sealant: a. Insulating fill for exterior hollow metal frames and similar confined, inaccessible

spaces in exterior construction,

4. Isolation gasket for installation under Related Section.

5. Accessories for installation as indicated.


1. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wall framing, and installation of Isolation gasket included in this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing materials and method for filling gap between exterior walls and floor slabs. Include manufacturer’s data which has been approved by local authorities as an acceptable fire and smoke stop system for use at exterior perimeter floor slabs.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each different type of insulation, impaling pins with self-locking washers, fire resistant seal compound, etc. verifying compliance with this specification. Submittal shall include spacing of impaling pins for each different type of insulation.


A. Single Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.



B. Protect insulation from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling and other sources. Store inside and in dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.

C. Protection for Plastic Insulation:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.


Linear Park



Section 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 2 of 5

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide insulation in performed units from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths sized to fit applications indicated. Insulation between metal studs shall be friction fit type.

B. "R" values for various insulation types are listed under each insulation type. "R" values listed are at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

C. Insulation types and locations are indicated on the drawings.

2.2 BATT/BLANKET INSULATION (THERMAL INSULATION)

A. Glass Fiber Insulation: Flame resistant thermal glass batt/blanket type insulation conforming to ASTM C665, Type I, Class A, passing requirements of ASTM E136.

1. Thickness: As required to provide a thermal resistance "R" value as follows: a. Walls, Typical: R-19 (friction fit).

2. Fire Classification: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development of 50 when tested per ASTM E84 (UL 723).

B. Location: Exterior walls and soffits and as indicated on the Drawings.

2.3 SEMI-RIGID GLASS FIBER INSULATION BOARD (THERMAL INSULATION)

A. General: Multiple layers of the following insulation type are required; overall “R: value shall be a minimum of 30.

B. Semi-Rigid Thermal Glass Fiber Insulation: Thermal glass fiber insulation, un-faced, conforming to ASTM C612, Type IA ; minimum 2-1/2 inches thick, providing a thermal resistance "R" value of 10.4; density 1.5 pounds per cubic foot.

1. Fire Classification: Flame spread rating of 20 or less and a smoke development of 20 or less when tested per ASTM E84.

2. Size: Minimum 24 inches wide by maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints.

3. Available Products: Owens-Corning "701 Un-Faced", Johns Manville Insulations "Acoustic/Thermal Board, Plain”, CertainTeed “Certo Pro Commercial Board”, or approved equal.

C. Location: Under elevated concrete slab or metal deck as indicated on the Drawings.

2.4 INSULATING FOAM SEALANT

A. Foamed-in-place Insulation: Single component, low-expansion, low pressure urethane foam, recommended by manufacturer for sealing and insulating frame cavities and similar spaces.


Linear Park




Page 3 of 5


A. Insulating Foam Sealant: Single component, low-expansion, low pressure urethane foam, recommended by manufacturer for sealing and insulating frame cavities and similar spaces.

B. Isolation Gasket: 1/4 inch thick, closed-cell, neoprene, moisture-resistant sill plate gasket to prevent air infiltration; width to match isolation runner. Install under exterior sill plates, end runners anchors for structure, and top runner as required in Section 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing, and elsewhere in locations as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Impaling Pins and Washers: AGM Industries, Inc. “Tactoo Insul-Hangers Series T” (glue-on) and “Series TSA”, or “Powerbase” (weld-on), or approved equal meeting the following requirements:

1. Anchors: Pins shall be minimum 12 gage with manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant coating for interior applications and Type 302HQ stainless steel for exterior applications. Provide pins with 2 inch square perforated base plate of galvanized steel for glue-on application to concrete, and weld pins for attachment to metal deck. Provide pins in lengths as required.

2. Self-Locking Washers: All anchors shall have insulation washers. For ceiling areas and walls above 7 feet, use AGM Industries, Inc. “RC-150”, 1-1/2 inch diameter, 0.015 inch thick, galvanized steel washers, or approved equal. For walls up to a height of 7 feet, use AGM Industries, Inc. “RC-100” galvanized steel washers with cupped heads for exposed ends of pins, or approved equal. Use stainless steel for exterior applications.

3. Adhesive: AGM Industries, Inc. “Tactoo GPA71 General Purpose Adhesive”, Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. “Eco-Hanger Grip Adhesive 22-15”, or approved adhesive formulated for bonding metal and nylon insulation hangers to concrete and masonry surfaces.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: Materials such as fasteners, retainers and splicing and patching tape, not specially described but required for a complete installation of building insulation, shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and selected by Trade contractor. Wire for tying shall be 18 gage galvanized, soft annealed wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Inspection: Prior to installing insulation, carefully inspect and verify the completion of the installed work of other trades. Verify adjacent materials are dry and that building insulation may be installed in accordance with the original design and manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All work by other trades to be concealed by insulation must be inspected and approved by those having jurisdiction and execution of the insulation installation shall not proceed until so authorized.

C. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancies in other trade's work, immediately notify the Architect, and do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been corrected.

D. Impaling clips which are to be welded to metal deck shall be installed prior to application of spray-applied fireproofing.


Linear Park



Section 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 4 of 5

3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)

A. General: Apply insulation by methods indicated complying with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Friction fit batt/blanket insulation between framing members.

1. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated, using a single layer wherever possible to provide "R" values or thickness indicated. Cut insulation neatly to fit tightly around obstructions.

2. Completely seal off and fill all voids in insulated areas to preclude direct passage of air between interior and exterior spaces.

3. Remove projections which interfere with placement.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BATT/BLANKET INSULATION

A. Thermal Batt/blanket Insulation (Walls): Install batt/blankets between studs using friction method; install full width batt/blankets to heights as indicated on the drawings. Install insulation type at exterior walls where interior side is covered with gypsum wallboard and elsewhere as indicated.

1. At locations where no framing is present to support the insulation, provide metal impaling clips or wire supports to hold the insulation in position. Mechanically or adhesively bond the clips to the substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to seal penetration points.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEMI-RIGID GLASS FIBER INSULATION

A. Thermal Rigid Insulation:

1. Underside Of Concrete Slabs, Or Metal Deck: Install insulation type using impaling pins and washers fasteners. Adhere/spot weld anchors in place, spaced a maximum of 12 inches on center in one direction and 24 inches on center in the other direction; provide additional anchors as required.

a. Place un-faced insulation directly against concrete slab or metal deck; install insulation in a double layer application with joint staggered seams over first layer.

b. Where metal deck in scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, install anchors before application of fireproofing. After surfaces have been fireproofed, install batt/blanket insulation.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FURRED WALL INSULATION

A. Install units with mechanical anchorage for walls as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to provide permanent placement and support of insulation.

B. Set furring at spacing indicated to receive gypsum board to act as fire barrier in accordance with Section 092900 – Gypsum Board.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF ISOLATION GASKET

A. General: Smooth top surface of foundation wall to no greater variation that ¼-inch and brush off surfaces of loose debris to receive Isolation gasket. Unroll Isolation gasket on top surface of foundation wall or fasten to bottom of sill, and between ends of vertical framing, etc. to isolate metal framing from concrete substrates. Set flush with exterior framing, and butt all end and perpendicular joints tightly. Pierce Isolation gasket at anchor bolt locations, only. Set and anchor Isolation plate to foundation wall.

B. Install additional isolation gaskets between dissimilar materials as indicated on the Drawings.


Linear Park




Page 5 of 5

3.7 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION


Linear Park



Section 072700 WATER AND AIR BARRIER

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Seamless semi-impermeable water and air barrier systems, installed over exterior sheathing and indicated on drawings. System consists of following:

1. Seamless, liquid applied membrane and membrane overlayer where water and air barrier is behind perforated metal panels

2. Membrane flashing membrane, for seam taping sheathing joints, transitions and rough opening flashing membrane.

3. Accessories.


1. 061643 - Exterior Gypsum Sheathing

2. 072100 - Thermal Insulation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.

B. Water and Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of water and air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air and water movement through the wall.


A. General: Water and air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Water and air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

1. Performance Testing per ASTM E779-10.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature on products handling, storage, and installation requirements to be used under this Section, clearly marked and fully described for each product specified or required by manufacturer for installation. Provide manufacturer’s complete installation details for each typical and non-typical condition.

1. Installation Instructions: Provide complete with manufacturer’s approved ‘step by step’ instructions for flashing wall penetrations (windows, louvers, etc.), including supplemental sill and end damn flashing, Clearly show preformed flashings integrated into water and air barriers as indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations and extent of air barrier and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope systems and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged, how inside


Linear Park



Section 072700 WATER AND AIR BARRIER Page 2 of 7

and outside corners are negotiated and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes, and the like are sealed.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying water and air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of water and air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assembly shown on Drawings, incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of water and air barrier membrane. 1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of

water and air barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed. 2. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups

and apply water and air barrier until mockups are approved. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Include installers of other construction connecting to water and air barrier, including

roofing, waterproofing, masonry, sealants, windows, glazed curtain walls, and door frames.

2. Review water and air barrier requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum substrate curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, mockups, installation procedures, sequence of installation, testing and inspecting procedures, and protection and repairs.


A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by water and air barrier manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply water and air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by water and air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of water and air barrier. Do not apply water and air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.


Linear Park




Page 3 of 7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Seamless, Liquid applied membrane: Henry Company "Air Bloc 32MR", single component rubberized elastomeric membrane or approved equal spray applied membrane having the following characteristics:

1. Air Permeability: 0.00012 CFM/ft2 @1.6 lbs/ft2 per ASTM E283; with no increase of air leakage when sustained window load of 10.5 lbs/ft2 for 1 hour and gust window load pressure of 62.8 lbs/ft2 for 10 seconds at 1.6 lbs/ft2.

2. Water Permeance: 0.08 perms per ASTM E96.

3. Installation Thickness: Mininum dry film thickness of 40 mil.

4. Location: Behind Metal Plate, and Formed Metal Wall Panels.

B. Membrane Overlayer: For covering areas of installed water and air barrier behind perforated metal panel, Henry Company “Air-Bloc 33MR” UV resistant one component water based elastomeric emulsion membrane, fire resistant and designed for permanent exposure, trowel or spray applied, or approved equal having the following characteristics:

1. Air permeability: 0.0016 CFM/ft2 @ 1.6 lbs/ft2 to ASTM E2178 and ASTM E283 and have no increased air leakage when subjected to a sustained wind load of 10.5 lbs/ft2 for 1 hour and gust wind load pressure of 62.8 lbs/ft2 for 10 seconds when tested at 1.6 lbs/ft2

to ASTM E331

2. Water vapor permeance: 11.6 perms to ASTM E96 Method B when tested at 58 mils dry film thickness.

3. Rating 0 - No fungal growth as tested to ASTM D 5590

4. Surface Burning: NFPA Class A, UBC Class 1, Flame Spread 25, Smoke Developed 85 to ASTM E84

5. UV Resistance: Passes 73 Cycles to ASTM D4799 Cycle B (Q-UV)

6. Low temperature flexibility and crack bridging: Pass -4 degrees F to ASTM C836

7. Long term flexibility: Pass to CGSB 71-GP-24M

8. Watertightness (CGSB 37-GP-56M): Pass

9. Color: Black.

C. Self-adhered membrane: For flashing and transitions to concrete, metal flashings, etc. as indicated in the drawings, not exposed to UV light in final installation and similar conditions not specifically detailed. Rubberized asphalt self adhesive membrane to meet the following minimum criteria:

1. High strength polyethylene sheet facer, minimum 4 mils thick.

2. Minimum 40 mils thick (excluding release film) and must have a release film to protect the adhesive surface.

3. The membrane system must not show any signs of softening, flow or deterioration at temperatures 158°F or below.

4. Color: Gray Black

5. Available products include, but aren’t limited to: a. Blueskin SA, manufactured by Henry;


Linear ParkLinear Park




b. Waterblock 40, by International Building Components; c. Perm-A-Barrier, by Grace Construction Products ; or d. Pre-approved equivalent.

D. High-temperature resistant self-adhered membrane: Shall be used directly under metal coping flashings and as indicated in the drawings and similar conditions not specifically detailed meeting the following minimum criteria.

1. High strength polyethylene sheet.

2. The membrane system must not show any signs of softening, flow or deterioration at temperatures 240°F or below.

3. Acceptable products: a. Blueskin PE 200 HT, manufactured by Henry; b. Ice and Water Shield HT, manufactured by Grace Construction Products; c. CCW WIP 300HT, manufactured by Carlisle Coating & Waterproofing d. Pre-approved equivalent.

E. Self-Adhered Butyl Flashing: Shall be used to span incompatible materials

1. Grace Butyl manufactured by Grace Construction Products or approved equal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES:

A. Surface Conditioners/Primers: High-tack SBS rubber based primer or as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Detailing Compounds: Liquid membrane, 1 or 2 component sealants or mastics supplied by membrane manufacturer intended by detailing around penetrations and at lapped seams.

C. Detailing Sealants: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. per spec Section 079200 – Joint Sealant at all laps, vertical and horizontal, in the foil-faced membrane at window and door rough openings.

D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Water and air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

F. Adhesive and Tape: Water and air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

G. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

H. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.


Linear Park




Page 5 of 7

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air and water barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for water and air barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by water and air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane.

E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

F. Cover gaps larger than 1/4 inch in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for water and air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and water and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid water and air barrier membrane at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid water and air barrier membrane over joint reinforcing strip.

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to water and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous water and air barrier. (WAB Flashing)

B. Connect and seal exterior wall water and air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

D. Apply joint sealants forming part of water and air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.


Linear Park




E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of water and air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

G. Seal strips around penetrations with termination mastic.

H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to water and air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, modified bituminous strip.

I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.5 WAB MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Apply water and air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous water and air barrier according to water and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply water and air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

C. Apply a continuous unbroken water and air barrier to substrates according to the manufacturer’s required minimum thickness.

D. Apply transition strip over cured membrane overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to water and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Do not cover water and air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

F. Correct deficiencies in or remove water and air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply water and air barrier components.


A. Field Checklist: Perform the following during (WAB) installation.

1. Maintain continuity, continuous support and in plane of (WAB) at all transition, penetrations and terminations. Repair as required.

2. Ensure concrete substrates are flush, clean and free of cavities and protrusions.

3. Ensure site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates are observed as required by the (WAB) manufacturer.

4. Ensure maximum length of exposure time of materials to UV deterioration is respected.

5. Ensure surfaces are adequately primed, prior to application of flashing membrane.


Linear Park




Page 7 of 7

6. Ensure laps in flashing membrane are maintained, are shingled in the correct direction, and mastic is applied to exposed and cut edges subject to water.

7. Use roller to ensure adhesion of flashing membrane and eliminated ‘fish-mouths’.

8. Ensure that transitions between wall fixtures (doors, windows, etc) have been cleaned, and primed, prior to sealant applications.

9. Perform wet gauge thickness of liquid applied membrane every 1,000 sq.-ft. or fraction thereof of (WAB) installed.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect liquid applied air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than six weeks, unless otherwise approved by the water and air barrier manufacturer.

2. Protect water and air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by water and air barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION


Linear Park



Section 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural roofing system of preformed steel panels.

B. Fastening system.

C. Factory finishing.

D. Accessories and miscellaneous components including gutters and downspouts.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 05 14 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Field-installed sealants.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

C. ASTM E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

D. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Summary of test results, indicating compliance with specified requirements.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

4. Specimen warranty.

5. MSDS sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.

1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

2. Include structural analysis signed and sealed by qualified structural engineer, indicating conformance of roofing system to specified loading conditions.

A. Samples for Initial Selection: For composite metal panel, provide sample color chips in a range of three colors to match Architect’s sample. If sample colors are not approved during verification, provide three additional colors at Architect’s request.

B. Samples for Verification: Using the three colors approved for initial selection, provide samples of size indicated below. If sample colors are not approved, provide three additional samples using colors requested for a second round of initial selection.




Section 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS Page 2 of 5

1. 12-inch- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.

D. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of metal roofing system to specified requirements.

E. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems similar to those required for this project.

1. Not less than 5 years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer.

C. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.


A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation.

B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 25 year period from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Design is based on Maxima ADV (JSM 200), manufactured by Architectural Building Components.

B. Other acceptable manufacturers are:

1. Berridge Manufacturing Co.; Double-Lock Zee: www.berridge.com.

2. Fabral; Powerseam: www.fabral.com.

3. Petersen Snap-Clad.

2.2 STRUCTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Structural Metal Roofing: Provide complete roofing assemblies, including roof panels, clips, fasteners, connectors, and miscellaneous accessories, tested for conformance to the following minimum standards:

1. Structural Design Criteria: Provide panel assemblies designed to safely support design loads at support spacing indicated, with deflection not to exceed 1/180 of the span when tested in accordance with ASTM E1592.





Page 3 of 5

a. Dead Loads: Weight of roofing system. b. Live Loads: As indicated on drawings.

2. Wind Uplift: Class 90 wind uplift resistance of UL 580.

3. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipated thermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F.

B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.

1. Type: Single skin, uninsulated.

2. Steel Panels: a. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated (Galvalume) SS (structural steel) sheet conforming to

ASTM A792/A792M; minimum AZ50 coating. b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.024 inch.

3. Texture: Smooth.

4. Width: Maximum tested panel coverage of 18 inches.

2.3 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM

A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement.

2.4 PANEL FINISH

A. Fluoropolymer Coating System: Paint-8 in accordance with Section 05 05 14.

2.5 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel.

B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish, closed-cell synthetic rubber, neoprene, or PVC, or combination steel and closed-cell foam.

C. Sealants: Elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt.

1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.

2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.

D. Underlayment: Self-adhering high-temperature, butyl or SBS-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M; 40 mil minimum total thickness; with strippable release film and polyethylene top surface.

1. Products: a. Grace Construction Products; Product Grace Ice and Water Shield HT. b. Tamko; Product Moisture Guard Plus.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.




Section 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS Page 4 of 5

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.

B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.

C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.

D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement.

1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners.

2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.

B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items.

1. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.





Page 5 of 5

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




Section 074216 METAL PLATE PANELS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Metal Panel System. System shall consist of exterior metal panels and supporting assemblies, trim and accessories required for complete system installation.

1. Preformed, pre-finished exterior aluminum panels.

2. Vertical supporting channels of matching material and finish providing method for semi concealed panel fastening devices.

3. Semi concealed fastening devices with synthetic isolators at intersystem fastening to provide silent thermal movement.

4. Mounting brackets, anchors and fasteners for attachment of vertical supporting channels to building structure.


1. 050514 - Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

2. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing: for support and coordination of framing to align with panel joint channels.

3. 061643 - Exterior Gypsum Sheathing

4. 072100 - Thermal Insulation

5. 072700 - Water and Air Barrier

6. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: for flashing elements not part of metal plate panel work.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation.


Linear Park



Section 074216 METAL PLATE PANELS Page 2 of 7

8. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.

9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.


A. General Performance: Metal panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the minimum design wind pressures listed on the Structural Drawings,

2. Deflection Limits: Metal panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of aluminum panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-, and field-assembled work.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes, provide sample color chips in a range of three colors to match Architect’s sample. If sample colors are not approved during verification, provide three additional colors at Architect’s request.

C. Samples for Verification: Using the three colors approved for initial selection, provide samples of size indicated below. If samples colors are not approved, provide three additional samples using colors requested for a second round of initial selection.

1. Aluminum Panels: 24 inches wide by 24 inches long. Include fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories.

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Accessories: 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory.

4. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of aluminum panels adjacent to joint sealants.


Linear Park




Page 3 of 7

D. Design Data: For aluminum panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly at intersection of solid and perforated panel and light slot, including corner, supports, attachments, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pohl Inc., “EuroPanel” or comparable product.


Linear Park




2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B209, Alloy 5005 H-14.

B. Stiffeners, Vertical Channels and Mounting Brackets: ASTM B209, Alloy 5005 H-14, 3mm (⅛”) thick Sheet Aluminum or as required by Professional Engineer’s Structural Calculations for Metal Panel System fabrication.

C. Furring: Formed from 18 gage galvanized steel (G185) or 0.100 inch thick aluminum. Provide furring with holes in webs to promote drainage and ventilation.

D. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.


A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws; bolts and nuts; self-locking rivets and bolts; end-welded studs; and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

2.4 SOLID METAL PANEL AND PLATE ALUMINUM TRIM

A. Aluminum Plate:

1. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick, minimum.

2. Finish: In accordance with 050514 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

3. Color: PAINT-2a.

B. Concealed Fasteners: Type 304 Stainless steel, self-tapping for exterior and galvanized steel for interior.

2.5 PERFORATED METAL PANEL

A. Perforated Aluminum Plate:

1. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick, minimum.

2. Finish: In accordance with 050514 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

3. Color: a. PAINT-2a for PERF-1, 2 and 3.

4. Panel borders as indicated on Drawings.

5. Perforation Patterns: a. PERF-1: 1/4- inch diameter holes, at 5/8 inch staggered centers, 40% open area. b. PERF-2: 1/2- inch diameter holes, at 7/16 inch staggered centers, 40% open area. c. PERF-3: Custom pattern to be provided by Architect, approx. 10% open area.


Linear Park




Page 5 of 7

2.6 ACCESSORIES, CUSTOM SHAPES AND TRIM

A. Provide components required for a complete aluminum panel assembly including break metal trim, copings, fascias, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of panels unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flashing, Cap Flashing and Trim: Same material, finish, and color as adjacent aluminum panels, minimum 0.030 inch thick unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish aluminum panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners as required to comply with deflection limits. Fabricate panels to the following dimensional tolerances:

1. Length and Width: Plus or minus 0.032 inch up to 48 inches; 0.064 inch more than 48 inches.

2. Diagonal: Plus or minus 0.1875 inch.

3. Panel Bow: Not more than 0.2 percent of panel width or length up to 0.1875 inch maximum.

4. Thickness: Plus or minus 0.008 inch.

5. Squareness: 0.1875-inch difference between diagonal measurements.

6. Camber: 0.032 inch.

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by aluminum panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

aluminum panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.


Linear Park




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, aluminum panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine framing to verify that angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support

members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by aluminum panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by aluminum panel manufacturer.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating aluminum panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install channels, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and panel manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ALUMINUM PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install aluminum panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving aluminum panels.

2. Flash and seal aluminum panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by panels are installed.

3. Install flashing and trim as aluminum panel work proceeds.

4. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.

5. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Plate Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for concealed fastening to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for concealed fastening to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by aluminum panel manufacturer.


Linear Park




Page 7 of 7

3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align aluminum panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as aluminum panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers’ written installation instructions. On completion of aluminum panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After aluminum panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace aluminum panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION


Linear Park



Section 074456

FIBER REINFORCED CEMENTITIOUS (FRC) PANELS Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fiber reinforced cementitious (FRC) panels, fasteners and accessories.

2. Panel support profiles (sub framing) including fasteners.

3. Compressible joint sealant.


A. Provide cladding comprising panels, system components, accessories and supports such that the cladding complies with performance requirements indicated below and is capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Structural performance: Provide cladding panels and sub framing capable of withstanding design wind loads as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Maximum allowable deflection ration is 1/300 between panel support profiles

D. Provide Test Results from E 330 Windload Test and provide professional engineer’s (registered in Louisiana) calculation report to assure windload structural performance.

E. Temperature range between - 40° F and 80°F

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Test data to panel and fasteners. ASTM tests as per PRODUCTS 2.2

B. Product data of panels, panel fasteners and compressible joint sealant.

C. Panel samples approximately 8”x11” representing each specified color.

D. Panel manufacturer’s Design and Installation Manual.

E. Provide shop drawings of panels and sub framing including all details and showing all panel fastening points and locations of compressible joint sealant.

F. Installer and professional engineer qualification

G. E-330 Windload Test and Engineer’s (registered in Louisiana) calculation report.

H. Standard 10 year warranty letter from panel manufacturer

I. Manufacturer’s statement and reference facades of their own translucent coating furnished for at least 17 years and their integrally colored panels furnished for at least 12 years.



Section 074456 FIBER REINFORCED CEMENTITIOUS (FRC) PANELS Page 2 of 5


A. Obtain panels, panel fasteners and system components through one source.

B. Professional engineer qualification: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice and experienced in providing engineering services registered in the state of the project.

C. Installer qualification: Installer to assume engineering responsibility and to perform the work of this section. Installer to be approved by panel manufacturer’s representative.

D. Conduct pre installation meeting on site in the presence of contractor, GC, PM, and panel manufacturer’s representative.

E. List of reference facades with contact information.


A. Store and handle material in accordance with manufacturer’s Design and Installation Manual

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special warranty: Panel manufacturer’s standard 10 year warranty covering functional quality of the supplied material.

1. Failure includes, but not limited to the following: a. Structural failure, including cracking, rupturing, warping, spalling, peeling b. Surface finish failure, including efflorescence, fading, discoloration

1.7 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Furnish extra panels and fasteners equal to 2% percent of each panel color.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from SWISSPEARL, or comparable products from Equitone or another approved manufacturer.

1. Authorized SWISSPEARL Distributor: R. M. Rodgers, Inc. – 6352 Alder Dr. – Houston, TX 77081-4404 - 800 392 0629 Fax – 713 666 2516 – www.rmrodgers.com – [email protected] – Max Rodgers

2.2 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PANEL PROPERTIES

A. Density 1.8 g/cm3 (as per ASTM C 1186), minimum.

B. Color change (as per ASTM G 155-05) backed by independent test reports:

1. 1’000 hours: Change in E≤ 1.8



C. Fire resistance (as per ASTM E-84, E-136 and NFPA 285)

http://www.rmrodgers.com/




Section 074456


1. Flame spread index: 0

2. Smoke developed index: ≤ 15

3. No flaming after 30 sec. weight loss ≤ 30°C

D. Fire Classification: UBC Class, I, NFPA Class A, NFPA 285

E. Frost resistance (as per ASTM C 1185-95): 2’944 psi / 20.3 MPa)

F. Minimum strength and bending characteristic s (as per ASTM C 120 / 1185-95):

1. Modulus of rupture 24 MPa / 24 N/mm2 (average cross/length)

2. Modulus of elasticity 16 GPa / 16KN/mm2, minimum.

G. Moisture properties (as per ASTM C 1185-95):

1. Moisture content normal 6 percent (by mass)

2. Moisture content maximum 20 percent (by mass)

H. Water tightness: No visible droplets or surface wetting (ASTM C 1185-95)

I. Coefficient of thermal expansion: 10 x 10 -6 K -1 (as per ASTM E 228-95)

J. Guaranteed to be free from efflorescence

K. Integral Color - Core and surface finish of panel homogeneously colored through

L. Guaranteed from -40 degree C to +80 degree C

M. 40 years as standard life expectancy testified by Construction Authorities in manufacturer’s country.

2.3 FRC PANEL CHARACTERISTICS

A. Panels shall be made from:

1. Portland Cement, ground lime stone, additives

2. Polyvinyl alcohol fibers, cellulose fibers

3. Acrylic coating to panel face, rear side and edges

B. Thickness: 8 mm.

C. The following characteristics are not acceptable:

1. Autoclaved product

2. Reinforcement with only cellulose fibers

3. Efflorescence

D. FRC panels shall be air cured for at least 4 weeks.

E. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer’s color(s) to correspond to panel designations on the Drawings:

4. FRC-1: Swiss Pearl REFLEX/9221 Black Velvet.

2.4 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES



Section 074456 FIBER REINFORCED CEMENTITIOUS (FRC) PANELS Page 4 of 5

A. Supplied by panel manufacturer and installed per Design & Installation Manual in material and finish indicated.

1. FRC-1: Exposed stainless steel rivets 4.0 x 18.0 mm, 15 mm black powder coated head.

B. Performance values as per test results under 2.2.

C. Compressible Joint Sealant: Where joint sealant of this type is indicated, provide preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. b. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. c. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite

2. Applications: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. Perforated Insect/Vermin Screen: Manufacturer's standard.

2.5 PANEL SUPPORT FRAMING

A. Sub frame material: Galvanized or stainless steel, aluminum in gauge required to meet performance requirements.

B. Shims

1. Allow for 50 year durable shims as required

2. The shims are to be located under the panel support profiles. Shims between support profile and panel are not allowed.

2.5 PANEL FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate panels at the factory to greatest extent possible. Minor field trimming and drilling is allowed.

B. Field dimensions: Installer with Contractor’s assistance to field verify overall dimensions prior to panel fabrication.

C. Dimensional tolerances:

1. Overall panel dimensions within ± 1 mm of panel width and height

2. Squareness within ± 0.5 mm/m

D. Labeling: Apply identification label to back side of each fabricated panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performances of rear ventilated rain screen cladding.



Section 074456


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

C. Prior to panel installation verify sub framing in compliance with Design & Installation Manual.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

C. Allow for scaffolding or mobile access to all parts of the cladding.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with panel manufacturer’s Design & Installation Manual.

B. Sub framing installation tolerances: Shim and align sub framing to the following installed tolerances:

1. Within 1/4 inch in 20 feet on level, plumb and panel joint lines

2. Joint widths shall be within 1/16 of specified widths

3. Sub frame profile face alignment max. l/300 between panel support profiles.

B. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping to inside face of panel prior to panel installation. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The installing contractor shall perform daily inspections of panel installation to maintain and confirm that tolerances are being met and the panel manufacturer’s Design & Installation Manual. complied with.

B. The owner may engage a third party inspection agency to verify that installed panels meet performance requirements and tolerances.


A. Remove damaged, improperly installed or otherwise defective cladding material and replace with new material.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to panel manufacturer’s instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION



Section 075419 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered polyvinyl chloride (PVC) roofing system.

B. Section includes installation of sound-absorbing insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Sound-absorbing insulation strips are furnished under Section 053100 "Steel Decking."

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings.

3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

B. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.




Section 075419 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING Page 2 of 6

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



1. Include documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Roof membrane and flashing, of color required.

D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.





Page 3 of 6

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight.





1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272/D 4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist wind uplift pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:

1. Uplift Pressures: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434/D 4434M, Type II, glass-fiber reinforced.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sika Sarnafil ; Sarnafil G410. or a comparable product.

2. Thickness: 60 mils. 3. Initial Solar Reflectance: 90

4. Exposed Face Color: Reflective gray.

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components.

1. Adhesives and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Water-Based, Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard water-based, cold-applied adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric-backed membrane roofing.

E. Low-Rise, Urethane, Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roof system manufacturer's standard spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric-backed membrane roofing.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.





Page 5 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

2. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition.

3.4 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice area of roof membrane.

F. Fabric-Backed Roof Membrane Adhesive: Apply to substrate at rate required by manufacturer, and install fabric-backed roof membrane.

G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.





H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof membrane and sheet flashings to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with requirements.

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashing.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 075419




Section 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Flashing assemblies required for: a. Canopy assembly; canopy penetrations, cap flashings, counterflashing and

elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.


1. 050514 - Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

2. 061053 - Miscellaneous Carpentry: Treated wood blocking, nailers, sheathing for parapet backing, etc.

3. 079200 – Joint Sealants.

1.2 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Fabricate and install canopy edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FM Global (FMG) Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, to meet min of l-90 wind uplift.

1. Minimum gages shall be determined in accordance with FMG recommendations for each application.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all shop fabricated items showing fabrication, materials, joints, fasteners, anchorage’s, and installation details; indicate connections and fastening to adjacent materials and construction; show provisions for thermal expansion and contraction. Show abutting construction, and building envelope components, such as sealant, self-adhering membrane flashing, canopying, etc.

B. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts or manufacturer's brochures on all manufactured items such as metal counterflashing members and sealants.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 incheslong by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.


A. General: Where procedures of fabrication and installation are not specified or shown otherwise, comply with Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning




Section 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2 of 5

Contractors National Association, Inc. (Current edition), referenced as SMACNA Manual, and National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, for minimum gage and seaming requirements.


A. General: Comply with requirements specified in Section 016000 – Product requirements.

B. Deliver, handle and store sheet metal items in a manner to prevent damage to surfaces, edges and ends, and to avoid wet storage stains or rusting.


A. Coordination: Cooperate with various other trades in coordinating their work required in conjunction with work under this section, to avoid delays and ensure satisfactory installation.

B. Measurements: Verify drawing dimensions with actual field conditions. Inspect related work and adjacent surfaces. Report all conditions which prevent proper execution of this work.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.





Page 3 of 5

1. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. a. Color: Matching adjacent panel materials.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: In accordance with Section 05 05 14. a. Color: Matching adjacent panel material.

B. Fasteners: Stainless steel, or other non-corrosive self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

1. Heads: Recommended by sheet metal fabricator of type suitable for intended use; and provided with watertight washers under heads.

C. Sealant:

1. For buttering sheet metal surfaces: Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants, Type F-2.

2. For back groove and top of surface mounted flashing: Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants, Type F-3.

D. Sealant Tape (Behind Surface Mounted Flashing Reglets): Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants, Type G.

E. Non-Shrink Grout (for Base of pitch pans): Packaged, dry concrete repair materials conforming to ASTM C928.

F. Separation Sheet: Spun bonded polypropylene, or approved equal breathable water resistant meeting following:

1. Thickness and Weight: 0.023 inches thick and 5.161 oz. / sq-yd.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

H. Self-Adhering Membrane Flashing: Install under sheet metal flashing and Trim, WAB Flashing as indicated in Section 072700 – Water and Air Barrier.

I. Miscellaneous: Provide all incidental and accessory materials as clamping bands, clips, hangers, etc., methods, tools and equipment required for completion of flashing and trim as shown on drawings.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA Manual.

1. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work.

2. Form work to fit substrates.

3. Form exposed sheet metal work without oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Thickness, Minimum: As recommended in Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (SMACNA), Chapter 4 for intended purposes, except as otherwise indicated.




Section 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 4 of 5

B. Flashing Configurations: Refer to NRCA Construction Detail, MB-Series incorporated into canopy assemblies and provide profiles which comply with requirements of SMACNA Manual.

C. Canopy Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Form from 20 gauge pre-finished aluminum; fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide joint cover plates. Butt-style joints, with 12-inch- wide concealed backup plate.

D. Copings: Form from 22 gauge, pre-finished aluminum; fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.

1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- wide concealed backup plate.

2. Corners: Shop fabricate with 12 inches long legs to eliminate top seam in connection planes.

3. Allowance for Expansion: Provide with slotted holes at all anchor locations in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA Manual.

E. Flashings (Counter Flashings, Sleeves, Hoods, etc): Form from 22 gauge, minimum, pre-finished aluminum; fabricate to size and configuration indicated unless otherwise noted.

F. Gutters: Fabricate from 18 gauge pre-finished aluminum to cross section required, with sealed joints, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FINISHES FOR ALUMINUM

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.


D. Clearances: Comply with NRCA “Guide for Clearance Between Pipes/Walls/Curbs” for all canopy penetrations; coordinate with respective trades. Penetrations shall not occur within 5 feet of drainage basins, nor restrict drainage.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA Manual.





Page 5 of 5

B. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, separation sheet, or by other permanent means as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt canopying cement where required for waterproof performance.

D. Canopy Edge Flashing And Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind uplift rating as indicated

1. Interlock bottom edge of canopy edge flashings and coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers

2. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.

3. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

4. Set joints over butt laps in double row of Type F-2 sealant; allow for expansion and anchor through to nailers and backup plates.

E. Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.

1. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat.

2. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 18 inches apart.

3. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

F. Miscellaneous Flashing: Miscellaneous flashing members shall be formed to sizes and profiles indicated. Secure flashing through vertical leg with nails or screws. Lap all end joints a minimum of 4 inches. Skim coat lapped portion with specified butyl sealant before securing in-place.

G. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

END OF SECTION




Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide sealant and backing materials for sealing of joints in construction. In general this includes, but not limited to, the following:

1. Horizontal expansion joints.

2. All locations noted on drawings as "sealant" or "caulking".

3. Tape for isolation and gasketing as indicated.

4. Joints between dissimilar materials.


1. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Identify areas of use by each product submitted according with Sealant Schedule in this Section.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation, primer (if required), and recommended back-up material. Include special requirements which pertain to sand texturing of exterior sealants.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit initial color samples in the form of manufacturer’s bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product. Where color is required to match Architect’s approved color sample, submit custom color. Where Architect determines that color selection can be satisfied by manufacture’s standard color, submit full range of standard colors.

E. Samples for Verification Custom Colors: Submit the following samples, 6 inches long, of each color and type of material proposed for use.

1. Sealant for exterior joints in masonry applied between metal channels (1/2 inch wide) with sand texture.

2. All other sealant types, cured strips.

F. Certification: Submit written certification from sealant manufacturer stating that materials forming joint substrates and joint backings (e.g. concrete, fluoropolymer coatings) have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with proposed joint sealants and are suitable for the use intended as specified; certification shall state that proposed sealant has been tested for non-staining characteristics when applied to precast concrete. Include recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.


A. Installer's Qualifications: Engage experienced Installers who have completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.




Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 of 7

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain joint sealant materials for each application from a single manufacturer. Obtain exterior joint sealants between architectural precast concrete and face brick from one manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates of each type encountered, and determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions that will exist during actual installation in accordance with Field Quality Control requirements in this section. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. Ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 degrees F.

2. Joint substrates are wet due to rain, condensation or other causes.

3. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealant when joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.

4. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Warrant exterior sealant joints jointly and severally by the sealant manufacturer, sealant Installer and General Contractor against defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Warranty shall include adhesive or cohesive failure of joints, and chalking or visible color change on surfaces of cured sealant for the full warranty period.

2. Warranty shall stipulate that sealant shall not cause the porous substrates of concrete, stone and precast concrete to discolor or change their appearance due to fluid migration for the full warranty period





Page 3 of 7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Color And Texture Criteria (Exterior Exposed to View Locations): Unless noted otherwise provide color of joint sealant selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

C. Sealants used in horizontal applications shall match adjacent color tone.

2.2 SEALANT TYPES AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Type "A" Sealant: Dow Corning "795 Building Sealant"; General Electric "Silglaze SSG4000"; Tremco “Spectrum 2”; or approved equal one-part, low-modulus silicone elastomeric sealant meeting requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

1. Application: Exposed exterior joints not subject to foot or vehicle traffic.

B. Type “B” Sealant: Self-leveling 2-part urethane meeting requirements of ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25.

1. Application: Exterior joints subject to foot or vehicle traffic.

C. Type "C" Sealant: Silyl-terminated polyether elastomeric sealant conforming with requirements of ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. Sonneborne "Sonolastic 150", Henry Company "HE925 - BES Sealant" or approved equal.

1. Applications: Metal to metal open joints, either back groove or top of surface mounted flashing, exposed to weather, and for bedding thresholds and break formed flashings.

2. Sealant used in conjunction with WAB, roof membrane edges, and similar weatherproofing applications where silicone sealant is not compatible with one or both materials to be sealed.

D. Type "D" Sealant: NOT USED

E. Type "E" Sealant: NOT USED

F. Type "F Series" Sealants: Non-curing, non-hardening, synthetic rubber sealer, recommended for use by manufacturer for concealed locations joint is where subject to changes in temperature, water and vibration.

1. Type "F-1": Tape consistency, solvent-free, butyl-based sealant with a solids content of 100%; meeting the requirements of AAMA 804.1-85 (as described in AAMA 800). Packaged in rolls with release paper backing. a. Available products include but aren’t limited to:

1) Tremco "440 Tape". 2) Pecora, "Extru-Seal". 3) PTI "606 Architectural Sealant Tape".

b. Applications: Metal to metal, and dissimilar materials, compression joints subject to shear.

2. Type "F-2": Mastic consistency, one-part non-drying, non hardening, non-bleeding and permanently resilient butyl sealant, meeting or exceeding AAMA809.2. a. Available products include, but aren’t limited to:





1) Bostik 5612 2) Pecora, “BR-96”. 3) Tremco ‘JS-773 Sealant”.

b. Applications: Metal to metal laps, concealed compression joints.

3. Type “F-3”: One part, moisture curing urethane. a. Available products include, but aren’t limited to:

1) Tremco, “Vulkum 116 2) Sika, “Sikaflex 1a”

b. Metal to metal open joints, either back groove or top of surface mounted flashing, exposed to weather, and for bedding thresholds and break formed flashings.

2.3 TAPES

A. PVC Tape (Type "G"): Black PVC with self-adhesive backing;1/8 inch thickness by 1/2 inch, nominal width, unless noted otherwise.

1. Typical application: Gasket/sealant to reduce air movement, acoustical and vibration isolation and between dissimilar materials and elsewhere indicated.

2.4 COMPRESSIBLE SEAL

A. Expanding Foam Tape (Type “H”): Sandell Mfg. Co. Inn., “Polyseal”, Bosig “Wintape Expand 600”, Emseal “GreyFlex, or approved equal, self-expanding polyurethane foam impregnated with modified acrylic flame retarding polymer meeting UL 94 HF-1 (Self-Extinguishing).

1. Typical application: For cold joints on exterior envelope components, interior side of window to WAB. Also a second joint seal system at precast concrete panel joints.


A. Plastic Foam Backer Rod: Preformed compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding foam, of size, shape and density to suit various conditions and control sealant depth. Provide open or closed cell as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Backer rod type recommended for compatible with sealant by sealant manufacturer, and of type which does not cause staining or discoloration of joint based on field experience and laboratory testing.

C. Sizes as recommended by sealant manufacturer, with diameter never less than 30 percent greater than width of joint.

D. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and back surface of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable.

E. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.

F. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.





Page 5 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning of Joints: Clean joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:

B. Edges of precast concrete and face brick shall be sound, smooth, clean, and dry. Clean joint surfaces by light abrasive blast, free from dirt, dust, and any other contaminants that may affect adhesion such as form release agents, retarders, or sealers.

C. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces. Clean metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

D. Jointing Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing or prior experience. Apply primer undiluted in uniform coating over surface. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

E. Masking Tape: Apply masking tape around joints where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 SEALANT APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

B. Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.

C. Installation of Sealant Backings:

1. Install backer rods in all butt type joints receiving sealant where depth of joint exceeds manufacturer's recommendations. Install joint filler using a blunt tool or plain faced roller. Do not puncture, stretch, or twist joint fillers.

2. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. Remove joint fillers that become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material.

3. Generally, install joint fillers to a depth of 1/4 inch below surface of joint. Where depth of joint is not sufficient to require joint filler, install bond breaker tape to cover full width and length of joint cavity to prevent three sided adhesion.





D. Joint Width: Width-to-depth ratio of sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not exceed a depth of 1/2 inch when joint is 1/2 inch wide; joints exceeding 1/2 inch in width shall not exceed 1/4 inch in depth.

E. Mixing: Mix two component sealant in accordance with manufacturer's directions using premeasured units. Do not thin or adulterate sealant in any way.

F. Installation of Sealants: Apply sealant over backing to uniform thickness in continuous beads, filling all joints and voids solid; superficial pointing with skim bead will not be accepted. Use nozzle of proper size to completely fill the joints.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, free of air pockets; ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

1. Provide concave joint configuration, unless noted otherwise.

2. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

H. Pourable sealants shall be applied by gun or by pouring, filling the joint completely with a slight recessed finish. Additional material shall be added if low spots develop. Seal along outside slab edges of joints to prevent water from entering cavity formed by backer rod.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Perform Field-test of joint-sealant in accordance with test recommended in ASTM C 1193, except as modified below. Method described is similar to method described in less detail in AAMA's "Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 13" and in SWRI's "Sealants: The Professionals' Guide."

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric

sealant and joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts

approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.

b. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.

c. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.

B. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log.

1. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type





Page 7 of 7

of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

C. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

D. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant.

E. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

END OF SECTION


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear-Park Bid Set New Orleans, LA 21-July-2017 © MA EDR N14-23/14027

Section 08 31 00 FLOOR ACCESS HATCH Page 1 of 3

SECTION 08 31 00

FLOOR ACCESS HATCH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Work included: Provide factory-fabricated floor access hatch. B. Quality Assurance: (1) Manufacturer: A minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing similar products. (2) Installer: A minimum of 2 years’ experience installing similar products. (3) Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ASI 9001:2008 Quality Standards including in-house engineering for product design activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Type JU-H20 Floor Access Hatch by the BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203 New Haven CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax: 203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com or APPROVED EQUAL.

2.02 ACCESS DOOR

A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans vault access hatch Type JD H20, size 32” x 54”. The floor access hatch shall be double leaf and pre-assembled from the manufacturer. Contractor to verify size.

B. Performance Characteristics:

(1) Covers: Shall be reinforced to support AASHTO H-20 wheel load with a maximum deflection of 1/50th of the span. Manufacturer to provide structural calculations stamped by a registered professional engineer upon request.

(2) Operation of the covers shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.

(3) Operation of the covers shall not be affected by temperature.

C. Covers: Shall be ¼” (6mm) steel diamond pattern.


http://www.bilco.com/



D. Frame: Channel frame shall be ¼” (6mm) steel with full anchor flange around the perimeter.

E. Hinges: Shall be specifically designed for horizontal installation and shall be thorough bolted to the covers with tamperproof Type 316 stainless steel lock bolts and shall be through bolted to the frame with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and locknuts.

F. Drain Coupling: Provide a 1 1/2” (38mm) drain coupling located in the right front corner of the channel frame (Note, can be placed at a different location if specified).

G. Lifting Mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide the required number and size of compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and to act as a check in retarding downward motion of the covers when closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe fastened to a formed ¼” gusset support plate.

H. A removable exterior turn/lift handle with a spring loaded ball detent shall be provided to open the covers and the latch release shall be protected by a flush, gasketed, removable screw plug.

I. Hardware:

(1) Hinges: Heavy forged brass hinges, each having a minimum 3/8” (9.5 mm) diameter Type 316 stainless steel pin, shall be provided and shall not pivot so the cover does not protrude into the channel frame.

(2) Covers shall be equipped with a hold open arm that automatically locks the cover in the open position.

(3) Covers shall be fitted with the required number and size of compression spring operators. Type 316 stainless steel snap lock with fixed handle shall be mounted on the underside of the cover.

(4) Hardware: Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite, all fasteners shall be Type 319 stainless steel material, and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. [For installation in highly corrosive environments or when prolonged exposure to hot water or steam is anticipated, specify Type 316 stainless steel hardware.]

J. Finishes: Factory finish shall be red oxide primed steel.

2.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data.




B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including profiles, accessories, location, adjacent construction interface, and admissions.

C. Warranty: Submit executed copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Delivery, Storage and Handling.

(1) Deliver products in manufacturer’s original packaging. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area. Inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivery carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.

C. Installation.

(1) Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Locate unit’s level, plump, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operations is achieved. Repair finishes damaged during installation. Restore finishes so no evidence remains or corrective work.

(2) Hatch shall be supported, fabricated, galvanized steel frame constructed of W6X20 - A36 steel. Ends of frames shall be embedded in walls of concrete wet well shaft and grouted back solid.

- END OF SECTION -




Section 084113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Aluminum double and single swing doors complete with thermal insulated glazing as indicated on drawings.

2. Thermal insulated glazing of entrance doors; comply with requirements specified in Section 088100 – Glass and Glazing, including submittals, warranty, materials, etc.

3. Furnishing and installation of door hardware.



2. 084400 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall and Windows: Sub-frame and header for entrance doors; including quality assurance and warranty requirements for finishes.

3. 088100 – Glass and Glazing.

4. Division 26: For rough-in for control wire and cable for low energy automatic door operators.

1.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Responsibility: Provide entrance doors capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement, acting as a component part of curtain wall units, except for following requirements:

1. Air Infiltration: For single acting offset pivot and butt hung entrances (3’-0” x 7’-0”) in the closed and locked position, tested assembly shall be rated not exceed .50 cfm per linear foot or perimeter crack when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf. Infiltration adjusted proportionally for larger doors.

2. Structural Performance for Aluminum Doors: Corner strength shall be tested per manufacturer’s dual moment load test procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Where aluminum doors form a component part of curtain wall or store front assemblies, provide by the same manufacturer as the glazed aluminum framing system, unless noted otherwise.

1. Single Source Responsibility does not apply to exterior, in-swing doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of doors, including framing, hardware mounting heights and reinforcement.

B. Samples for Verification: Submit samples of specified finish in selected color on aluminum extrusions. Furnish additional samples as required until color and texture is approved. Label samples with color number, name and date.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:



Section 084113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS Page 2 of 5

1. Submit manufacturer's data on entrance doors, including glazing gaskets, hardware, finish coating, color, and recommended touch-up procedures; include data in “Materials, Equipment, and Finishes Manual” specified in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.

D. Warranty:

1. Draft: Submit draft of warranty with required inclusions for review. Submit draft warranty with shop drawings.

2. Executed Warranty: Submit at time of Project Closeout; include warranties in "Warranties Manual" specified in Section 017800– Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Refer to Section 084400 – Glazed Curtain Wall Systems for undivided responsible for all aluminum framing and quality assurance program.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Installer must be qualify under Section 084400– Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall Systems as indicated.

C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2003 requirements.

D. Welders: In accordance with AWS D1.1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work are certified by AWS within the previous 12 months.

E. Coating Applicator’s Qualifications: Coordinate with Section 050514 - Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

F. Pre-Erection Conference: Refer to Section 084400– Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall and Windows.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING


B. Crate, pack, deliver to the site, store and handle doors so as to protect them from damage and defacement; replace any damage or defaced units.

1.6 FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Coordinate approved hardware items with the finish hardware supplier. Contractor will not be entitled to any claims for failure to do this required coordination.

B. Receive and install all required finish hardware for aluminum and glass doors. Reinforce doors and frames where mortised for hardware with backing plates as required to ensure adequate strength of the connection. Obtain hardware templates from finish hardware supplier

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Special Warranty: Warranty shall be incorporated as a component part and warranted under the total fixed curtain wall as specified in related Section 084400 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall Systems , except as follows:

1. Warranty Periods:




Page 3 of 5

a. Labor and Material: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Welded Construction: Life time, limited warranty for welded door corner

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM & GLASS ENTRANCE DOORS

A. Outswing Door Basis-of-Design Type and Manufacturer: EFCO D318 DuraStile, or approved equal; heavy-duty doors shall meet the following:

1. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.

2. Tubular Face Dimensions: a. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2 inch. b. Top Rail: 3-1/2 inch. c. Bottom Rail: 10 inches high (per ICC/ANSI A117, Art 404.2.9), fabricated from

either a single panel or from two (2) sections with hair line seam; locate joint at lower point of panel.

3. Door Construction: a. Stiles and head rails shall be aluminum tubular shape of manufacturer’s standard

“medium stile” design with a wall thickness of 0.188 inch nominal. b. Bottom Rail shall be aluminum tubular shape of manufacturer’s standard “medium

stile” design with a wall thickness of 0.125 inch nominal. c. Glass stops shall be, minimum 0.050 inch thick.

4. Corner Construction: Consist of both sigma deep penetration and fillet welds and mechanical fasteners.

5. Joints: Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and waterproof. All attachments shall be concealed.

6. Hardware Reinforcements: Reinforce doors with integral back-up plates for door hardware; minimum overall thickness at hardware locations shall be 5/16 inch.

7. Glass Stops: Provide doors with square edge snap-in glass stops and black EPDM glazing strips. Stops on exterior side shall be lock-in tamperproof type. Provide with adjustable glass jack to help center glass in the door opening. a. Glass Types as indicated on the Drawings and according to Section 088100 –

Glass and Glazing.

8. Door Adjustments: Equip each door with adjustable mechanism located in top rail for minor clearance adjustments after installation.

9. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrip doors on three sides with manufacturer's standard comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer material installed on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing, and coordinate with door frame assemblies. Provide a weathered adjustable astragal with stainless steel backing at the meeting stiles. Bottom shall have a EPDM blade sweep strip applied with concealed fasteners to door rail.

B. Hardware:

1. Each pair of manually-operated doors to receive the following:

2 Continuous Hinge (AL Doors) MCK-12HD x Height Required MK

1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit 1492NL-OP HH US28 DM



Section 084113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS Page 4 of 5

1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit 1490EO HH US28 DM

1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 626 BE 2 10" Offset Door Pull BF157 US32D RO 2 Surface Closer 4420 289 486 689 YA 1 Lip Threshold 2005AT x Width Required PE 2 Neoprene Sweep 315CN x Door Width PE Notes: Integral weatherstripping to be provided.

2. Each power-operated door to receive the following:

1 Continuous Hinge (HM/WD Doors)

MCK-25HD SER-12 x Height Re-quired MK

1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit EL 1492NL-OP HH US28 DM 1 10" Offset Door Pull BF157 US32D RO 1 Automatic Operator 5930 689 NO 1 Power Supply PS873 2 BB DM 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 626 BE 1 Mortise Cylinder 1E-74 626 BE 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C306P MK 1 Keyswitch MK SU 1 Wall Switch 672D NO 1 Lip Threshold 2005AT x Width Required PE 1 Neoprene Sweep 315CN x Door Width PE Notes: Integral weatherstripping to be provided.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Extruded shapes and plates, 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 alloy and temper conforming to ASTM B221, or as recommended by manufacturer for strength, durability and proper application of finish.

B. Fasteners: Fastening devices between aluminum and aluminum shall be Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Glass: In accordance with Section 088100 – Glass and Glazing and installed under this Section.

2.3 ALUMINUM FINISH

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.




Page 5 of 5

C. Finish aluminum entrance door components as specified in Section 050514 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

1. Color: PAINT-13.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install entrance doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clearances between the doors header, jamb and threshold shall be as recommended by the door manufacturer.

B. Hardware: Install all hardware in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

C. Adjustment: Adjust operating mechanisms to proper tension for conditions of installation.

D. Glazing: Refer to Section 088100 – Glass and Glazing, for glazing requirements.

END OF SECTION



Section 084400 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

Page 1 of 12

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Aluminum framing systems for curtain wall and individual curtain unit; thermally isolated and thermally improved (TI) as applicable for exterior units and designated as “Aluminum Curtain Wall - (CW-#)”, and aluminum entrances included under Related Sections which form a component part of the glazed curtain wall and window assemblies for following units:

1. Curtain wall units (TI) which are captured horizontally and vertically on four sides with pressure plates and snap-on covers to receive 1-inch glazing.

2. Glass and glazing of all aluminum windows and entrances; comply with requirements specified in Section 088100 – Glass and glazing, including submittals, warranty, materials, etc.

3. Structural engineering for the design of curtain wall units, including anchoring support system to primary building structure; furnish shop drawings and calculations, and obtain approval from Architect and Structural Engineer of record.

4. Furnishing and installation of all support angles as indicated or required for securing curtain wall system to structure.

5. Furnishing and installing all metal trim, including composite metal covers and filler flashings with finish to match curtain wall.

6. Aluminum entrance doors; comply with requirements specified in Section 084113 – Aluminum Entrance Doors, including submittals, warranty, materials, etc.; installation of finish hardware for all entrance doors.

7. Stainless steel flashing installed as part of the curtain wall system and included in Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

8. Sealant within mullions at zone dams and expansion joints; sealant between curtain wall framing members (exterior and interior) and adjacent construction as specified in Section 079200 – Joint sealant.

9. Field water testing after erection.

10. Furnishing cable ways for concealed wiring and conduit for access and security hardware and for contact devices on operable windows.



2. 072700 - Water And Air Barrier: Coordination for installation for expanding foam tape.

3. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Perimeter weathering sealants, and elsewhere indicated.

4. 084113 – Aluminum Entrances Doors.

5. 088100 – Glass and Glazing: Glass and glazing tapes and sealants, including structural silicone glazing.

6. Division 23 and 26 Sections - Rough-in for control wire and cable for low energy automatic door operators, security hardware and contact devices on operable windows.


Linear Park



Section 084400 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL Page 2 of 12

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Responsibility: The details shown on the Contract drawings establish basic dimensions, profiles, sightlines, and appearance. Design curtain wall systems and anchorages to withstand their own weights; loads due to pressure and suction of wind; seismic forces; thermal stresses; and building movement.

B. Design Engineer: Employ a registered structural engineer, licensed in the State of Louisiana, to design all structural components of the curtain wall systems, including, all attachments and anchorages to the primary building structure. This engineer shall prepare, stamp, and sign all required structural calculations; this same engineer shall also approve the aluminum framing system manufacturer's shop drawings.

C. Modifications: Minor dimension and profile adjustments to those shown may be made in the interests of fabrication or erection methods or techniques, weatherability factors, and the ability of the design to satisfy the design requirements, provided the visual design concept (general profile and shape, location of framing members, plane of glazing, and dimension points) are maintained and such adjustments are approved by the Architect and Owner’s Representative at time of shop drawing review.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection. Shop drawings shall include, at a minimum, the following information:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and interface with building construction referenced to detail numbers indicated on the Contract drawings. Include all materials which form a component part of the aluminum framing systems.

2. Show sizes and profiles of all proposed aluminum mullions, custom formed assemblies, shapes and accessories, including thicknesses of extrusions, methods of fabrication and installation, fastening and fitting of connections, type(s) of alloy and method of glazing; show those mullions with internal steel reinforcing; show areas to be sealed and sealant material.

3. Include type, grade and shape of steel, type and size of anchors and welded or bolted connections for anchorages and like ancillary framing members for aluminum framing support. Designate welded connections by means of standard AWS symbols.

4. Indicate direction and magnitude of thermal expansion; direction and magnitude of applicable building and seismic movements and clearance at perimeter of framing assemblies; and fabrication and erection tolerances.

5. Show aluminum entrances, including anchorages and finish hardware preparation.

6. Submit detailed instructions for the installation of glass (face clearance, edge clearance, and bite), including glazing gaskets, setting blocks, jamb blocks, and sealant. Show requirements for installation of structural glazed glass units (glue line and bite). Indicate all glass types using the same code designations used in the Contract drawings. Indicate curtain wall units to be factory glazes prior to delivery.

7. Show mounting provision for all pre-manufactured components which are mounted in or which form a component of glazed curtain wall and window assemblies.

8. Clearly indicate on shop drawings any proposed deviations or changes from Contract Drawings. Architect’s approval is required for any proposed deviation or change. Any such deviation or change shall not alter the visual appearance of the curtain wall system.

9. Include a copy of the NFRC or AAMA on-site label certificate with shop drawings.


Linear Park




Page 3 of 12

B. Structural Calculations: Submit structural calculations verifying compliance with structural criteria specified in Section 018316 - Building Envelope Design Requirements. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to, computations for all curtain wall framing members, connections, including fasteners and welds, anchorage assemblies and related items.

1. Include an insurance certificate of coverage.

C. Glass Analysis: Submit glass manufacturer’s analysis as specified in Section 088100 – Glass and glazing.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit complete wiring diagrams for routing of conduit or power operated hardware. Include copies of wiring diagrams in Contract Closeout Submittal.

E. Certifications: Submit written certification from an Independent Testing Laboratory attesting conformance or compliance with specified requirements for air leakage and water penetration, including provisions for meeting (P&HV) performance requirements. Products shall bear respective AAMA “Quality Certified” certification and labeling to indicate compliance.

F. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum curtain wall.

G. Product Data: Submit a listing of manufactured and fabricated components to be used in the curtain wall units, including sealants, glazing materials, etc. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for required products.

H. Coordination Drawings: Provide drawings for glass units and metal cladding manufacturer indicating mounting and anchoring requirements for fabricated materials in related sections which form a component part of the aluminum framing glazed systems. Show clearances, anchors locations, and attachments required by related trades.

I. Samples for Verification Shop Finishing: Submit samples of each aluminum finish as specified. Furnish additional samples as required until color and finishing is approved. Label samples with manufacturer’s designation and process according to color number, name and date.

J. Warranty Draft: Submit draft of warranties with required inclusions for review. Submit draft warranties with shop drawings.

K. Contract Closeout Submittal: Include the following at time of Project Closeout:

1. Submit executed warranties; include in "Warranties Manual" specified in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage a single firm to assume undivided responsibility for all components of curtain wall work, including aluminum doors and accessories which form a component part of curtain wall, and who has a minimum of five (5) years experience in fabrication of curtain walls systems similar to that required for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer must have in-house engineering, and maintain an in-house quality assurance program.


Linear Park




B. Installer's Qualifications: Installer must be licensed or approved by curtain wall manufacturer, and have a minimum of five (5) years experience in erection of curtain walls similar to that required for this Project.

C. Welders: In accordance with AWS D1.1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work are certified by AWS within the previous 12 months.

D. Single Source Finishing: Provide all components which form a component of aluminum glazed framing systems from a single coating applicator.

E. Pre-Design/Build Conference: Schedule a conference to review the bidders proposed design for the curtain wall assemblies, prior to fabrication of components. Conference shall be attended by the curtain wall Contractor / installer, curtain wall manufacturer, Architect, Owner’s Representative, building envelope consultant and other representatives directly concerned with the design and performance of the Work. All aspects of the design, fabrication and installation shall be discussed, including but not limited to the following:

1. Design and Fabrication techniques which would improve energy conservation.

2. Modifications to Architects design that may be required to maintain, and/or improved performance for assemblies.

3. Review of custom components as sunscreens, operable windows, etc. which form a component part of the curtain wall assembly and may require independent testing to verify general compliance with the Performance Requirements.

F. Pre-Erection Conference: Schedule a job conference to review the work approximately three (3) weeks prior to start of actual erection. Conference shall be attended by curtain wall manufacturer, Installer, Architect and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work. The following major considerations shall be reviewed at conference:

1. Review system requirements, including drawings and specifications. Should any discrepancies arise, they shall be reviewed and resolved.

2. Review and finalize construction and installation procedures and schedule as it relates to curtain wall framing. Include all custom components, both shop and field assembled affecting the Work.

3. Trade related schedules and interface; discuss coordination of the curtain wall installation with installation of other elements of the Work.

4. Establish those areas on the job site that will be designated as work and storage areas.

5. Discuss field welding procedures.

6. Review field tests and procedures for field remediation of defects.



B. Deliver aluminum curtain wall unit components in the manufacturer’s original protective packaging. Store and handle components so as to protect them from damage and defacement; cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air; stack framing components to prevent bending; replace any damaged or defaced units at no additional cost.


Linear Park




Page 5 of 12


A. Verification of Measurements: Where possible, check actual openings in construction work by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the Contractor to avoid delay of work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.

B. Coordination: Review installation procedures and coordinate with related sections and other work which will be affected by work of this Section. Coordinate the installed locations of wind girts with trade responsible for installation.

1.7 WARRANTIES


B. Special Warranty: Warrant the total fixed curtain wall system and doors jointly and severally by the individual product manufacturer, Installer, and General Contractor agreeing to repair or replace components that fail in materials and/or workmanship for the following periods starting from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall be “NO DOLLAR LIMIT”, inclusive of all labor and materials.

1. Curtain wall Systems: For the purpose of this warranty, defective materials or workmanship is defined to include abnormal deterioration, aging or weathering of work, water or air leakage exceeding specified limits, structural failure of any component as result of exposure to pressures and forces up to specified limits, or failure of the construction to fulfill other specified requirements in Section 018316 – Building Envelope Design Requirements. a. Warranty Period: Two (2) years.

2. Glass: 5 years for glass breakage; 20 years for low “E” coating and hermetic seal on insulated glass units. Refer to Section 088100 – Glass and Glazing for warranty requirements.

3. Sealant: 20 years for concealed type and 20 years for exposed. Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealant for general warranty requirements.

4. Finish: 10 years, in accordance with Section 050514 - Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CURTAIN WALL AND WINDOW ASSEMBLY TYPES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to meeting performance requirements and compliance with requirements of this Section, provide products by one of the following:

1. EFCO Corporation.

2. Kawneer Company, Inc.

3. Vistawall Architectural Products.

B. Basis-of-Design Glazed Curtain Wall Framing Systems:

1. EFCO Corporation, ‘5600’ Series or approved equal meeting following: a. Frame Type and Glazing Orientation: Thermally isolated (TI) for exterior facing

glazing. b. Glazing Type: As indicated on the Drawings.


Linear Park




c. Special Requirements: 1) Outside glazed with pressure plates and snap-on covers, glass fully

captured vertically and at perimeter and structural-glazed as indicated on the Drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Unless otherwise approved by Architect, provide alloy and temper to provide optimum color matching between extrusions and sheet materials.

1. Extruded shapes and plates, 6063-T5 or -T52, or 6063-T6 where exposed to view, and 6061-T6 where concealed from view for alloy and temper conforming to ASTM B221, or as recommended by manufacturer for strength, durability and proper application of finish. Wall thickness of extruded shapes shall be as required to meet specified design requirements. a. Aluminum Angle: Alloy 6063-T52; minimum 0.188 inches thick; fabricated to a

custom angle as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Sheet material, 1100 or 5005 allow where exposed to view to match extruded shapes, temper as required for forming and conforming to ASTM B209, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer for strength, durability and proper application of finish; aluminum sheet shall be electronic cladding quality, thermal stress relieved and stretcher leveled.

B. Composite Metal, Fire Retardant Rated:

1. Aluminum faced panel with thermoplastic core. a. Overall Panel Thickness: 0.157 inches. b. Aluminum Face and Backer Sheet Thickness: 0.0197 inches. c. Aluminum Alloy: AA 3003 at coated finish.

2. Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching core of extruded thermoplastic (polyethylene) material formed in continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Products laminated sheet by sheet or in batch process using glues or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable.

C. Break Shaped Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum thickness for areas adjacent to walking surfaces. At all other locations, thickness shall be determined by meeting Performance Requirements, except for any application, including clips shall not be less that 0.050.

D. Fasteners (Within Curtain Wall): Bolts, anchors and other fastening devices, including their accessory items shall be stainless steel, incorporate self-locking devices. Type, size, alloy, quantity and spacing of fasteners and anchorage devices shall be as required for performance.

E. Shims, Blocking and Spacers: Metals used for shims, blocking and spacers shall be stainless steel incorporating separators for dissimilar materials and at dynamic connections.

F. Separators: Separators between dissimilar materials and at dynamic connections shall be rigid type, high impact polystyrene or high temperature nylon resin material or equal, with smooth surfaces on both sides; minimum thickness 1/16 inch, or as required at dynamic connections.

G. Anchor Clips: Manufacturer’s’ standard ‘T’ shape, combination anchor and deflection clips, aluminum extruded sections as recommended by curtain wall manufacturer for anchoring vertical tube sections.

H. Weep Hole Baffles: 30 pore per inch open cell plastic coated urethane foam; compressed 30-50%.


Linear Park




Page 7 of 12


A. Sealants And Tape:

1. Concealed Metal-to-Metal Joints: Concealed metal-to-metal and other substrate material joints, such as the embedment and lapping of flashing and spliced or sleeved conditions where elements are to be installed or embedded in a full bed of sealant, use a high or low modulus silicone sealant as determined by curtain wall manufacturer.

2. Curtain wall Framing to Adjacent Construction: Sealant and backer rod for use at perimeter of curtain wall members shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealant; sealant shall be Type “A” as specified.

B. Structural Silicone Glazing Sealants:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall systems indicated. a. Color: Black. b. Type: Manufacturer's standard single or two component. c. Minimum Tensile Strength: 50 psi (345 kPa). d. Modulus of Elasticity: As required by structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall system

design to meet performance requirements.

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; and recommended by structural- and weatherseal-sealant and curtain-wall manufacturers for this use.

3. Joint Movement Capability: Accommodates a 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at time of application when measured according to ASTM C 719. a. Color: Matching structural sealant.

C. Thermal Isolators (TI) and Barrier Construction:

1. Job Fabricated Units: Vertical and horizontal covers shall utilize manufacturer’s standard rigid PVC thermal isolation clips.

2. Shop Fabricated Units (Thermally Improved Construction): Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low-conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

3. Barriers: Flat shims between aluminum mullions and exposed structural steel framing shall be as recommended by the curtain wall manufacturer.

D. Thermal Broken (TB) Construction: High-performance plastic connectors shall separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. –retain for window and storefront framing.

E. Glass: As specified in Section 088100 – Glass and Glazing; glass furnished and installed under this Section.

F. Entrance Doors: As specified in Related Section 084113 – Aluminum Entrance Doors; furnished and installed under this Section.

G. Expanding Foam Tape: Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.


Linear Park




H. Conduit and Wiring for Low Energy Automatic Door Hardware: Provide conduit and wiring, minimum two (2) each 14 gage wire, confirm with controls contractor, and accessories for routing wiring according to NEC requirements for hardware as indicated. Coordinate routing with Electrical Contractor.

2.4 CURTAIN WALL FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Construct curtain wall framing members to span vertically. Provide horizontal framing members in single lengths to span between vertical members and at typical openings; elsewhere, provide minimum lengths to span two (2) floors. Provide minimum six (6) inch long sleeves within vertical mullions between individual sections; center sleeve over joints and set in butyl type sealant conforming to ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below. a. AAMA 806.3: Tape subject to continuous pressure. b. AAMA 807.3: Tape not subject to continuous pressure. c. ASTM D1667, D2240 and D412: Tape for structural glazing applications.

2. Provide horizontal mullions in single lengths between verticals with hairline joints. Horizontal mullions shall include a method of weepage to exterior for condensation or leakage. Provide a minimum of three (3), 3/8 inch diameter weep holes per section; baffle weep holes to prevent water entry under positive pressure.

3. Use shear blocks for connection of horizontal mullions to vertical mullions and for connection of vertical mullions to head and sill members. Provide water deflectors at all horizontal mullions (both ends).

4. All mullions shall be thermally isolated, except as otherwise indicated, from pressure plates using manufacturer's standard extruded flexible thermal break material located on exterior side of glass; thermal isolators must be continuous.

5. Provide internal steel stiffeners (corrosive resistant) in aluminum framing members where necessary to conform to the specified deflection requirements and as required to provide reinforcements for surface mounting fabrications in related sections. Pre-coat stiffeners with two (2) coats of zinc-rich primer to isolate from aluminum.

6. Glazing: To the greatest extent practical, provide curtain wall window units factory glazed.

B. Aluminum Entrance Door Framing: Window wall units shall support door with additional sub-framing as indicated and shall be extruded aluminum of profile and size to match window wall framing members; jamb members shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.125 inch. Provide manufacturer’s standard reinforcements for mounting hardware and extruded aluminum snap-on stops, minimum 0.050 inch thick, incorporating hard-backed silicone treated polypropylene weather stripping (3 sides) of configuration to accommodate finish hardware.

C. Window Sill Extensions and Covers: Provide manufacturer’s prefinished and matching snap on covers and trim for completion of assemblies as indicated on approved drawings.

1. Fabricate covers from composite metal where indicated on Drawings.

D. Dry Glazing Materials: Materials shall be manufacturer’s standard with tested system in compliance with ASTM C864.

1. Exterior Side: Black EPDM or neoprene extruded glazing gaskets of manufacturer’s standard profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal (minimum shore A hardness of 40 plus or minus 5, and designed to provide 30 percent compression).


Linear Park




Page 9 of 12

2. Interior Side: Closed cell foam sealant tape or EPDM extruded wedge type gaskets of manufacturer’s standard profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

3. Glazing gaskets shall be of hardness and design such that they will be contact at all times with adjacent elements during dynamic loading, building and thermal movements, and provide a watertight seal as required to meet the design requirements. Size gaskets in lengths to prevent pullback at corners.

E. Joints in Metal Work:

1. Exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line, design and finish. Joints in exposed work, unless otherwise shown or required for thermal movement, shall be accurately fitted, rigidly secured with hairline contacts and sealed watertight.

2. Where two or more sections of metal are used in building up members, the surface in contact shall be brought to a smooth, true and even surface and secured together so that the joints shall be tight. Do not use exposed fasteners.

3. Metal-to-metal joints between curtain wall elements shall be thoroughly cleaned and sealed by buttering joints with sealant immediately prior to the final assembly of abutting sections. Clean excess sealant from exposed surfaces.

F. Pre-Manufactured Elements In-Set in Curtain Wall Units: Provide units that match glazing depth and profile and factory install into unit as indicated on approved drawings.

2.5 ANCHORAGES & CONNECTION DEVICES

A. General: Steel anchors, connection devices, supports and other required ancillary framing which are attached to curtain wall, including slab edge embedments, shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36 for plates, channels, etc.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 or A325, carbon steel bolts, 1/2 inch minimum diameter with National Course threads; regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel washers. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. Size as indicated on approved shop drawings.

D. Galvanize Finish For Steel Shapes:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean steel surfaces free from oil, dirt, rust, loose mill scale and other foreign material prior to pickling by caustic cleaning. After solvent cleaning, steel surfaces shall have mill scale and rust removed by pickling in accordance with SSPC SP-8 "Pickling".

2. Galvanized Finish: After cleaning, steel shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A123 or A153, with a minimum coating weight of 1.25 ounces per square foot.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Electrodes: Electrodes and electrode flux combinations, or grade of weld metal shall be in accordance with Table 4.1.1 of the Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1.


Linear Park




2.6 ALUMINUM FINISH

A. Finish aluminum curtain wall framing components including all special coping, composite metal covers, trim members and flashing members, indicated to match, as specified in Section 050514 – Fluoropolymer Coatings for Metal.

1. Color: Paint-13.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION AND INSPECTION

A. General Contractor shall be responsible for providing to the curtain wall installer the accurate locations and placement for the following:

1. Provide building perimeter offset line on each floor, plumb with lines on the floors below, and located at a point from the edge of the floor slab designated by the curtain wall installer.

2. Provide clearly scribed bench marks on each floor on a column designated by the curtain wall installer.

B. Coordinate with General Contractor and other work by furnishing shop drawings, inserts and similar items at appropriate times for proper sequence of construction without delays. Verify dimensions of supporting structure and other elements which precede curtain wall work before fabrication of required components. Provide for erection tolerances corresponding with specified tolerances for other work where field measurements cannot be obtained. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory tolerances in other work adjoining curtain wall work.

3.2 ERECTION

A. General: Anchorage of the curtain wall system to the structure shall be by approved methods and in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings. After the curtain wall components are properly positioned, connections so designated on approved shop drawings shall be rigidly fixed by welding or bolting to comply with design requirements and permit movements as intended or necessary.

1. Do not install component parts which are defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraded and broken members. Remove and replace members which have been damaged during installation or thereafter before acceptance.

2. Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers.

3. Provide for movement between components resulting from building deflection, and from thermal movement; provide anchor clips top and bottom for vertical tube sections. Provide gaskets or other means to permit movement, but preventing filtration of weather or generation of noises from metal-to-metal movement.

B. Welding: Comply with requirements of AWS D1.1. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage due to weld splatter, smoke staining, or excessive heat that can lead to spalling; use non-combustible heat shields as necessary.

C. Aluminum Isolation: Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals, other than stainless steel, and masonry and concrete substrates. Except as otherwise indicated to receive isolation barrier as specified, apply on both contacting surfaces a heavy brush coat of zinc chromate primer made with a synthetic resin vehicle, or apply a heavy coat of alkali-resistant bituminous paint, or


Linear Park




Page 11 of 12

separate surfaces with neoprene type gaskets. Isolation materials shall be concealed in finished work.

D. Erection Tolerances

1. Limit variations from plumb, level or dimensioned angle to the following: a. 1/8 inch maximum deviation in 20 foot or length of any member. b. 1/4 inch maximum deviation in any total run in any line.

2. Limit variations from location (theoretical calculated and measured positions in plan or elevation based on established floor lines and column lines), including variations from plumb and level, to the following: a. 3/8 inch total maximum deviation at any location. b. 1/8 inch maximum change in deviation for any 12 foot run, any direction.

3. Limit offsets in end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignment of adjoining and consecutive members, which form planes, continuous runs and profiles to the following: a. 1/16 inch maximum offset in flush alignment. b. 1/32 inch maximum offset between glass framing members at corners of glazing

pocket.

4. Install operable windows plumb and level, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to provide specified performance and proper operation.

E. Glazing: See Section 088100 – Glass and Glazing for glazing requirements and glazing materials.

F. Entrance Doors: See Section 084113 – Aluminum Entrance Doors, for installation requirements.

G. Perimeter Tape: Fill gaps and voids between curtain wall and window framing and wall assemblies with expanding foam tape to form a continuous perimeter barrier behind joint sealant. Coordinate placement with exterior joint to prevent blocking weep holes or water shedding performance.

H. Joint Sealants: Installation of sealant, including joint preparation and sealant backing shall conform to requirements specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealant.


A. Field Water Tests For Exterior Assemblies: Conduct field water tests on completed portions of the curtain wall and window units by an AAMA Accredited Laboratory or other qualified laboratory when approved by Architect. Field tests shall result in no water leakage through the glazed assembly, not operable joints around windows and doors. Do water testing in the presence of Independent Testing Agency. Perform field check for air and water leakage on actual building according to following:

1. For Aluminum Framing for Curtain Wall (CW) Units: AAMA 503-03 “Voluntary Specification for field Testing of Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems”.

2. Conduct tests only after exterior perimeter sealant has had sufficient time to cure.

3. In the event leakage occurs, the aluminum framing manufacturer /installer shall: a. Determine the cause of leakage. b. Prepare and submit for review a remedial procedure for permanently eliminating

the leakage. c. Subsequent to the above noted review, complete the required remedial measures

at all conditions.


Linear Park




d. Retest the repaired area(s) until no further leakage occurs, at the expense of the responsible contracting party.

4. Should it be determined that leakage during any test is due to a chronic deficiency, the remedial measures shall be implemented throughout the exterior wall with the costs to do so borne by the curtain wall manufacturer/installer. Depending upon the type of problem, the Architect may require that additional testing be performed until in their judgment the problem has been eliminated.

5. Contractor shall provide the following equipment:

6. Power scaffold or lift for exterior areas. a. Hose, length as required. b. Personnel qualified to operate scaffold or lift and to investigate leakage to

determine cause. c. Power scaffold or lift within interior of building for observer to view all interior

portions of the test areas.

7. Test Procedure: a. Test operating doors in the same manner as fixed wall areas. Modify test for joints

of operating units. b. Areas to be tested and number of tests will be determined by Owner and Architect. c. Test area:

1) For curtain walls perform a minimum initial test of one full width unit or bay width by two (2) stories high.

2) For curtain walls perform not less than one test at 10% completion, one test at 50% (may be waived of 10% test show no evidence of leakage), and one test at 85% completion of (CW) units.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


Linear Park



Section 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING

Page 1 of 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Glass and glazing materials indicated as “GL” for exterior openings where indicated on drawings. Various items to receive glazing and specified elsewhere may be factory-glazed or site-glazed at Contractor's option. Glazing schedule at end of this Section. Types of work in this Section include, but are not limited to, glass and glazing for:

1. Aluminum entrance doors.

2. Aluminum curtain wall assemblies, including requirements for structural glazing.

3. Steel ‘placemaking’ elements with plastic glazing.


1. 084113 - Aluminum Entrance Doors: Compression gaskets.

2. 084400 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall and Windows: Glazing stops.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than breakage and improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, internal condensation or fogging, film on the interior surfaces of glass, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance.

B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer’s directions. Defects include oxidization, cracking, crazing, color change and other indications of deterioration’s that develop from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process. The following list of quality defects shall be considered unacceptable as judged by the Architect:

1. Scratches: Scratches smaller than 3 inches are allowed in any area. Scratches longer than 3 inches are allowed only within 3 inches from the glass edge or in an area of the glass through which a person would normally not look. Scratches are defined as hairline type only.

2. Uniformity: When viewed against a bright uniform background from a distance of 10 feet, streaking or mottling shall be minimal.

3. Pinholes: Pinholes greater than 1/8 inch shall not be allowed. large clusters or close spacing of smaller pinholes, visible from a distance of 6 feet, shall only be allowed in an area of the glass through which a person would normally not look.

C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer’s directions. Defects include edge separation, delamination which materially obstructs vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.



Section 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 2 of 13

1.3 GLASS PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure, including glass breakage.

B. Performance Criteria: Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet the following criteria:

1. Wind Load and Impact Resistance: Positive and negative (inward and outward) wind pressures and impact resistance shall be determined by criteria indicated on the Drawings. Minimum pressures, except where code allows for less, shall not be less than 20 psf positive and negative

2. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F ambient; 180 degrees F material surfaces. Base calculations on materials actual surface temperature due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

3. Center Deflection: a. For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness

required that limits center deflection at of the edge of the glass perpendicular to the glass pane, based on design wind pressure, not to exceed 1/175 of the glass edge length or ¾ inch, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated-glass lites.

4. Minimum Glass Thickness: As scheduled.

C. Glass Analysis: Glass manufacturer shall perform stress analysis to determine the proper glass thickness and treatment required to resist the structural and thermal stresses for each glazing condition and application, including the following:

1. Verify that glass thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) as scheduled are capable of meeting the above criteria [ so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed 8 lites per 1,000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action, and 1 lite per 1,000 for lites set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of wind and snow].

2. Determine whether glass lites making up the exterior insulated glass units (IGU) with low-emissivity coating require full tempering to resist the structural and thermal stresses for each glazing condition.

3. Determine minimum thickness of annealed glass according to ASTM E1300. For heat-treated glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer’s standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E1300 based on type of glass.

4. In addition to the criteria specified above, the glass analysis shall: a. Assume that warm or cold air from HVAC ceiling registers will be directed toward

the exterior windows. b. Assume that light colored “mini-blinds” and roll-down shades will be installed. Do

not assume the space between the window and blinds or shades will be ventilated. Refer to Section 122413 – Roller Window Shades.

c. Consideration shall be given to shading of the building from adjacent structures.

5. Should the stress analysis show that glass of greater strength or thickness is required over that scheduled, then all such changes shall be included in the bid price. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for additional compensation for their failure to meet these requirements.




Page 3 of 13

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. Submittals specified in this Section shall be incorporated into submittals specified in Related Sections, where glass is to be provided in those Sections.

B. Design Data: Submit glass manufacturer's analysis demonstrating compliance with requirements for wind load, thermal stresses, snow loads (where applicable), and center deflection.

1. Identify each glass type as listed in Part 4 of this Section and the maximum design wind load it can accommodate.

2. Each glass type shall indicate glass thickness and whether glass is annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product; include the following:

1. Low-emissivity coating, including data and table on performance criteria verifying compliance with this specification.

2. Interlayer for laminated glass.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

2. Glazing Instructions: Submit detailed instructions for the installation of glass. Instructions and explanatory details shall include the following: a. Sequence of installation, including cleaning procedures and priming (if required). b. Method of installation, including list of glazing materials. c. Location of specific items, such as the setting blocks and any special instructions

as may be required.

E. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. Glass Manufacturers: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for Project complies with specified requirements, including respective labeling for fire-resistive / fire-protective rated glazing. A separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass. a. Provide a separate certification stating that mirrors are processed copper-free. b. Provide separate certificate for ‘Heat Soak Testing”.

2. Insulating Glass Fabricator: Submit written certification from the insulating glass fabricator stating that insulated glass units (IGU) shall be fabricated in accordance with requirements specified, that glass edge sealant(s) were tested for compatibility with glazing sealants and tapes, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.

F. Samples for Verification: Submit 12 inch square samples, including edge condition for exposed glass panels. Glass products listed below form the basis of design. Architect may require additional samples with manufacturer’s standard product line in order to satisfy design intent.

1. Insulating glass units (IGU).

2. Interlayer for laminated glass.




G. Warranty:

1. Draft: Submit draft of warranty with required inclusions for review. Submit draft warranty with shop drawings.

2. Executed Warranty: Submit at time of Project Closeout; include warranties in "Warranties Manual" specified in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit replacement ordering information for each glass type; include data in "Materials And Finishes Maintenance Manual" specified in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.


A. Glaziers Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single Source: Only one (1) manufacturer’s low-emissivity coating shall be used for glass units required. Obtain glass from one source for each of the following:

1. Heat-treated glass of each condition indicated.

2. Laminated glass of each type required.

3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated.

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. Glass Association of North America (GANA): "Glazing Manual".

2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) Publications: TIR-A7 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines" and "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing".

3. Laminated Safety Glass Association (LSGA) Publications: "LSGA Design Guide".

4. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer’s Association (SIGMA) Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB-3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines".

D. Safety Glazing Standard: Products complying with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z97.1 and testing requirements of Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC) 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. Provide safety glass permanently marked.

E. Allowable Tolerances: Perimeter glass clearances within the setting frame (face clearances, edge clearances, and nominal bite) shall be as required by the aluminum window and entrance framing manufacturers.

F. Labeling:

1. Tempered, Heat-Strengthened, and Laminated Glass: Each piece shall bear manufacturer's labeling stating manufacturer and quality per CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Identification of Safety Glazing.

2. Insulating Glass Units: Provide each insulated glass unit (IGU) permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.




Page 5 of 13

3. Fire Department Access Panels: Comply with IBC Section 2406.4 where ever required by AHJ.



B. Do not deliver glass to site until areas to be glazed are ready to receive glass and job conditions are satisfactory. Deliver glass in manufacturer's storage cases with interleaving between lights. Provide cushions at edges of glass to prevent impact damage during shipment and storage.

1. Do not unpack glass until needed for installation.

2. Handle and install materials in a manner to prevent breakage, edge damage, scratching or other damage. Keep vacuum cups free from foreign material that could scratch glass.

C. Comply with insulating unit Fabricator’s requirements for limits on exposure to reduced barometric pressure during shipment.


A. Verification of Measurements: Before fabrication, verify all measurements to ensure proper fit. Sizes shown on drawings are for estimating purposes only. Allow sufficient time for taking accurate field dimensions so that fabrication and installation are within construction schedule.

B. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. Do not proceed with installation of glazing sealants when the ambient temperature conditions are below 40 degrees F.

C. Protection: Do not mark glass surfaces with crayons or other marking pencils. Where warnings are required, fasten tapes or banners to head framing. Provide masking or other shielding for glass when performing welding or other construction work adjacent to installed glazing; replace all glass damaged due to construction operations.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. General: Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. Replace all installed units which fail under use with new conforming units. Replacement shall include coordination with Owner, immediate provision for maintaining openings secure and weathertight, timely ordering and fabrication of replacement items as required, installation, and cleaning. Warranty does not cover failure due to vandalism or glass breakage caused by external projectiles.

B. Special Warranty on Structural Glazing: Warrant structural silicone adhesive glazing system jointly and severally by the glazing sealant manufacturer, Installer and General Contractor against structural failure (adhesive or cohesive failure) for a period of Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include removal and replacement of glass panels where structural sealant has failed. This warranty shall be for glazing systems for curtain wall and storefront.

C. Special Warranty on Structural Failure: Warrant glass units jointly and severally, on a single document, by the Installer and General Contractor, agreeing to replace all glass units broken by nickel inclusions, temperature changes, flaws in materials, environmental conditions (excluding fire and impact), and normal deflection up to specified limits for a period of five (5) years from




date of Substantial Completion. No allowances for statistical probability of breakage under anticipated loading conditions will be made in consideration of failure of glass materials under load, except to the for glass process by ‘Heat Soaking’ to the extent covered under Quality Assurance. This warranty shall include all labor and materials for replacement of failed unit(s).

D. Special Warranty on Coated Glass: Provide written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish FOB project site replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in article “Definitions” in this Section. Warranty shall be for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

E. Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass, agreeing to furnish FOB project site replacements for insulating glass units which have deteriorated as defined in article “Definitions” in this Section. Warranty shall be for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

F. Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Provide laminated glass manufacturer's written warranty agreeing to furnish FOB project site replacements for laminated glass units which have deteriorated as defined in article “Definitions” in this Section. Warranty shall be for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass (Clear): ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent glass flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (glazing select) except as noted otherwise.

B. Heat-Treated Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind as indicated below, Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Condition C (other coated glass), Type I (transparent glass flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); and the safety criteria of ANSI Z97.1-1975 and the CPSC 16 CFR 1201.

1. Heat Strengthened as scheduled: Kind HS; surface compression values shall not exceed 7,500 psi.

2. Full Tempered as scheduled: Kind FT; minimum surface compression shall be 10,000 psi.

3. Coated Glass: Low-emissivity coating as hereinafter specified.

4. Fabrication Process: Use horizontal oscillating roller hearth process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed to limit ream, strings and distortions after treatment to ½ acceptable under ASTM C1036.

C. Laminated Glass:

1. ASTM C1172, kind and thickness as scheduled, Class 1 (clear). a. Annealed: Kind LA. b. Heat Strengthened as scheduled: Kind LHS. c. Tempered: Kind LFT.

2. Interlayer Material: As indicated in Glass Schedule.

3. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminate glass using laminator's standard heat-plus pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances and air/glass pockets.

D. Tempered Glass Panes: Glass shall meet the following requirements:




Page 7 of 13

1. Tempering: All glass panes shall be horizontally tempered to eliminate tong marks. Roller wave distortion shall be limited to 0.05 mm.

2. Heat Soak Testing: All glass panes must pass a destructive quality control heat soak process to lessen nickel sulfide inclusions. Wall system manufacturer shall submit statistical analysis of test data that the probability of failure is not greater than 1 in 54,000 square feet of tempered glass. Written warranties against nickel sulfide inclusions in lieu of heat soak testing shall not be permitted.

3. Edges: All edges shall be ground flat with a frosted appearance.

4. Holes: All holes and edge work shall be completed prior to tempering; location and dimensional tolerances shall conform to wall system manufacturer’s requirements.

5. Glass Tolerances: Unless otherwise required by wall system manufacturer, the following tolerances shall be adhered to: a. Dimensional tolerance on panel size shall be plus or minus 1 mm of the theoretical

dimension required. b. Squareness of each panel shall be within 3 mm. c. Bow allowance shall not exceed 0.1 percent of any dimension. d. Positional tolerances on all holes shall be plus or minus 1 mm from a single datum

point. e. Flatness shall be held to a maximum of 0.05 mm.

E. Low-Emissivity Coating: Low-emissivity coated glass produced by sputter coating technology applied in a vacuum chamber. Coating shall be applied to the #2 surface.

2.2 PLASTIC GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Polycarbonate Sheet:

1. Engineered polycarbonate resin 2. Sheet Size: Maximum 4’x10’ 3. Thickness: Minimum ¼” 4. Color: To match Basis of Design Product “N-03” (neutral palette). 5. Basis of Design Product: The design of Plastic Fabrications is based on Koda XT as

provided by 3form, Inc. Products from other manufacturers must be approved by the Ar-chitect and Designer prior to bidding in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and Section 01 60 00 “Product Requirements”.

B. Sheet Minimum Performance Attributes:

1. Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635). Material must attain CC1Rating for a nominal thickness

of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) and greater. 2. Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929). Material must have a Self-Ignition Tempera-

ture greater than 650°F. 3. Flame Spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84). Material must be able to

meet a level of Class B (Flame spread less than 75 and smoke less than 450) at thick-ness of ½”.

4. Impact Strength. Minimum impact strength test as measured by ASTM D 3763 of 20 ft. lbs. (for durability, shipping, installation, and use).

5. Safety Glazing. Material must attain a Class A impact rating in accordance with ANSI Z97.1-2004.




2.3 GLAZING TAPES AND SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following:

1. Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

2. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer’s recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Provide color of exposed joint sealant as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

B. Glazing Tape For Interior Areas: Closed-cell, compressible, PVC-free foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged in rolls with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5.

1. For Hollow Metal Frames and Wood Relies: 1/8 inch by 1/2 inch.

2. For Fire-Resistant Doors: Identical to product(s) used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistive rating.

C. Glazing Tape For Curtain Walls (Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes): Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below.

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. a. Synthetic rubber preformed butyl sealant with built-in spacer of synthetic rubber.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. a. 100% solids, cress-linked, butyl rubber, preformed sealant.

3. Color: Gray

D. Structural Glazing Tape: In compliance with ASTM D1776, D2240 and D412.

1. Color: Gray

E. Structural Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920 with minimum tensile strength tested in accordance with ASTM C 1184 for Type S, Use G, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in structural glazed curtain-wall systems indicated.

1. Color: Gray

2. Type (Field Applied): Manufacturer's standard single component.

3. Minimum Tensile Strength: 100 psi (690 kPa).

4. Modulus of Elasticity: As required by structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall system design to meet performance requirements.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Tremco; Proglaze SG, Dow




Page 9 of 13

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of materials, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Durometer shore A hardness; minimum 4 inches long, sized per GANA guidelines.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Shims: Provide aluminum shims as required for use beneath neoprene setting blocks to maintain proper alignment of spacer bar along sight line.

E. Gaskets:

1. Dense Compression Gaskets (Drive in Wedge Type): Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Type shall be compatible with glazing sealant. a. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. b. EPDM, ASTM C 864. c. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. d. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.

2. Soft Compression Gaskets (Fixed Stop Type): Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, Gray; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight sea. Select from any one type as above for drive in wedge type.

2.5 GLASS FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Insulating Glass Units:

1. Classification of Units: Certify labeling by one of following methods acceptable to IGCC Standards: a. Class CBA per ASTM E774, and / or; b. ASTM E2190.

2. Roller Wave: Both glass panes shall be in the same direction. Roller wave shall be glazed horizontally.

3. Sealing System: Dual seal with polyisobutylene (butyl) primary seal and silicone or polysulfide secondary seals.

4. Air Space: For 1-inch insulated units, provide 1/2 inch air space; for 5/8 inch units (exterior entrance doors), provide 3/8 inch air space.

5. Desiccant: Manufacturer’s standard; either silica gel or molecular sieve, or blend of both.




6. Spacer Bar: Stainless Steel with satin finish, roll formed design; mechanically joined at corners; spacer bar filled on at least two long sides with desiccant consisting of the following: a. Materials:

1) Tubing: Anodized aluminum. 2) Thermal Break: Polyurethane matrix.

b. Size: Refer to Glass Schedule. c. Color: Gray finishes to match sealant

7. Spacer Bar Tolerance: Within a maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch from the sight line or vision area.

C. Edges: Provide factory-cutting and factory formed edges for all heat treated and insulating glass. Take care when cutting and forming edges of glass to furnish clean accurate edges.

D. Structural Glazed Glass: Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.

1. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.

2.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. MG-1; Uncoated Clear Annealed Float-Glass Units.

B. MG-2; Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.

C. Minimum Thickness: 6.0 mm unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 LAMINATED-GLASS UNITS

A. LG-1: Low-E (VE) Laminated Safety Glass Units:

1. Basis of Design Product: “9/16 inch VE1-48 Laminated”; Viracon, 507-451-9555.

2. Kind LA, 9/16 inch thick, consisting of two lites of annealed float glass with interlayer.

3. Outer Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

4. Plastic Interlayer: a. Thickness: 0.090 inch b. Interlayer Color: Clear.

5. Inner Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2.8 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. IG-1; Low-E (VE) Clear Insulating-Laminated Glass Units:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: “VNE 1-2M Viracon, 507-451-9555.

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1-5/16 inch with outdoor lite of 1/4 inch and indoor lite of laminated glass of two (2) 1/4 inch lites with 0.090 inch (2.29 mm) plastic interlayer.




Page 11 of 13

3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass heat-strengthened, if required to satisfy wind load pressures.

4. Indoor Lite: Kind LA, (Clear) consisting of two lites of annealed float glass with interlayer.

5. Optional thickness: 1-3/16 inch may be used if all Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance is satisfied.

6. Low-E Coating: On second surface.

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 67 percent.

8. Ultra-Violet Transmittance: less than 1 percent.

9. Visible Light – Exterior – Reflectance: 11 percent.

10. Visible Light – Interior – Reflectance: 11 percent.

11. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.29 maximum.

12. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.26 maximum.

13. Shading Coefficient: 0.43.

14. Solar Factor (SHGC): 0.37

B. IG-2; Low-E (VE) Clear Insulating-Laminated Glass Units:

1. Same as IG-1 except with Outdoor Lite to be Class 1 (clear), Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass at safety glazing locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, and of manufacturer's of gaskets, sealants and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in GANA "Glazing Manual" and SIGMA.

B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.

C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Remove from Project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections.




3.4 GLAZING

A. Weeps: Take special care to ensure that weep holes, drainage channels and weep baffles are unobstructed and free of dirt and other foreign materials.

B. Setting Blocks: Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but no closer than 6 inches to the vertical edge of the glass, unless otherwise approved in writing by the glass manufacturer.

1. Setting blocks shall support both lites of insulated glass units (IGU).

2. Provide aluminum shims as required for use beneath setting blocks to maintain proper alignment of spacer bar along sight line.

3. If required by GANA standards, permanently adhere setting blocks to prevent lateral movement in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.

4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

C. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

D. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Permanently adhere edge blocks to frame.

E. Set glass tightly in position with proper clearances in accordance with referenced standards. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.

F. Glazing in Aluminum Glass Stop Assembly: Glaze in glazing channels, and compression seals in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain a weatherproof and waterproof installation. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks.

1. Miter-cut at corners and install in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull-away at corners; seal bead of sealant at corners, completely sealing against water penetration.

G. Structural Glazing: 1. Before applying silicone adhesive, clean substrate in accordance with adhesive

manufacturer’s instructions. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded. Provide primers and techniques of installation as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

2. Install glazing tape as detailed, maintaining proper bond line for silicone adhesive; install tape with tight butt joints; no overlaps. Position glass uniformly sealing against tape. Mask adjoining surfaces as required to maintain a clean and neat appearance.

3. Apply specified silicone adhesive on both sides (between mullion and glass), completely filling cavity; tool joint with light pressure before a skin begins to form; tool adhesive to form straight surface with edge of glass.

4. Concealed Assemblies: On back side side, install sealant backer rod and apply specified silicone adhesive. Apply silicone adhesive with sufficient pressure to expel all air and provide a solid, continuous bead. Tool joint immediately in one continuous stroke, leaving a slightly concave surface.

5. Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401.




Page 13 of 13

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

C. Install anti-graffiti film to exterior face of all glass panels in exterior glazing assemblies in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR (IGU)

A. Examine at installation for defects in the edge seal.

B. Properly install in framing systems with proven drainage provisions.

C. Incorporated into Project Closeout, provisions in Owner’s maintenance manual for annual inspection.

END OF SECTION



Section 092900 GYPSUM BOARD

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board.




A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG.




Page 2 of 4

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board, Typical: Paper, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use drying-type, all purpose compound unless otherwise indicated. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Specialty (“Paperless”) Gypsum Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-

type, sandable topping compound. 3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,

sandable topping compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Thermal Insulation (for Exterior Wall Framing): As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




Page 3 of 4

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.




Page 4 of 4

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, tenant build-out spaces and where

indicated. 2. Level 2: Not used. 3. Level 3: Not used. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION



Section 099100 PAINTING

Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: In general, the principle items of work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of surfaces.

2. Painting and finishing of all exposed-to-view exterior surfaces, except as otherwise indicated or specified.

3. Field painting of all exposed-to-view mechanical and electrical items such as pipes, ducts, hangers, conduits, power panel covers and like items. a. Field painting of factory finished equipment is not required if such equipment is

typically hidden from view.



2. 099600 – High Performance Coatings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Surfaces: The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, covers, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend painting in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

B. DFM (dry film mils): Minimum thickness, measured in mils (1 inch), of a coat of paint in the cured state.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit complete list of products proposed for use, including technical data on each product to verify compliance; organize list to indicate painting systems to be used with each substrate.

1. Submit paint list and arrange in same format as indicted in PART 4 – SCHEDULES with paint manufacturer, paint name, coverage and VOC content listed.

2. Submittal shall contain any proposed revisions to specifications (ie. surface preparation, method of application, etc.) which painting contractor feels are necessary in their execution of the Contract.

3. Any proposed revisions must be approved by the Architect prior to proceeding with the Work.

B. Samples: Using approved paint products, prepare and submit samples of each type of finish, gloss level, and color for approval. Refer to article “Paint Colors” under PART 2 PRODUCTS for requirements. Label samples with color number, product name and date. Provide three (3) samples of each color and sheen.

1. Prepare paint samples on 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch heavy, durable non porous paper.




Section 099100 PAINTING Page 2 of 9

2. Adjustments to the overall sheen in any one or more of the colors may be required. Such adjustments (if any) shall be made at no additional cost. Additional samples will be required should adjustments be made.

3. Initial color samples which have been approved are subject to final acceptance at time of field mock-up examination.

C. Contract Closeout Submittal: Include the following at time of Project Closeout:

1. Extra Materials: Coordinate submittal of extra maintenance materials with requirements of Section 017800 – Closeout Submittal; refer to article entitled "Maintenance" in this Section for quantities and other requirements.

2. Color Mix: Submit color mix formula for each required paint color. Mix formula must be in measured increments of 48ths of an ounce; include the manufacturer's color and number identification, color chip, location list where said colors were applied and paint manufacturer of base. Include data in "Materials and Finishes Manual" specified in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittal.


A. Single Source:

1. To the maximum extent practicable, select a single manufacturer to provide all materials required by this Section, using additional manufacturers to provide systems not offered by the selected principal manufacturer.

2. For each individual system, provide primer and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and use only within recommended limits.

B. MPI Standards:

1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

C. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished Work shall be free of variations in color and sheen, runs, sags, holidays, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches and other signs of poor workmanship. Deep tone and accent color walls shall be free from joint banding, flashing, photographing, and uneven appearance.

D. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. a. If permanent lighting is not operational, provide temporary lighting of same color

temperature (degrees K) for Architect's evaluation or the samples.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply one additional benchmark

sample of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. Include cost of 3 (first 2 plus one additional) samples in each space.


A. Deliver materials to building in sealed, original, labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name, type of material, brand name, color designation, and instructions for mixing and thinning.





Page 3 of 9

B. Store materials when not in actual use in a place specifically assigned for that purpose which is dry and out of direct sunlight. Store materials in a manner so as not to exceed the manufacturer's temperature limitations.


A. Environmental Conditions: Air temperature and substrate temperature and relative humidity shall be within the manufacturer’s established limits. Do not apply exterior paint when the following conditions exist, unless requirements of paint manufacturers are more restrictive.

1. Temperature: If surface and ambient temperature is above 90 degrees F, or below 50-degrees F.

2. Weather: Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, when excessively windy or during mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

B. Lighting: Do not proceed with work under this section unless adequate lighting is available. Provide lighting level of at least 50 candlepower per square foot, measured mid-height at substrate surface.

C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation as required for the type of paint and cleaning materials used. If necessary, consult paint manufacturer for recommendations.

D. Protection: Protect surrounding areas against damage due to painting operations. At a minimum, surrounding areas shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting and waterproof masking tape. The Owner shall not be responsible for Contractor's selection or method of protection.

1. Protective coverings shall be secured against wind and shall be vented to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces.

2. Provide "wet paint" signs as required to protect newly painted surfaces.

E. Precautions: Take all precautions to prevent fire; open containers of flammable materials only when needed; keep rubbing cloths and oily rags in tightly closed containers and remove from site daily. Dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with all local, State and Federal regulations.

F. Coordination: Review other sections of this specification in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coating system for various substrates. Notify Contractor in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Manufacturers: Refer to Paint Schedule at end of this Section for manufacturer’s product names and paint systems which are included to establish the required level of quality. Additionally the following list of manufacture’s are acceptable, contingent upon meeting level of paint quality indicated in PAINT SCHEDULE, and for which a substitution request is not required.

1. ICI Dulux Paints / Devoe Performance Coatings (Glidden Paints)

2. Benjamin-Moore





3. Kelly-Moore Paints.

4. Parker Paints/Frazee

5. Sherwin Williams

6. Tnemec Company.

B. Colors: Each paint color must be accurately mixed to ensure color continuity. No allowance will be granted for mismatched paint of the same color when viewed under normal lighting conditions.

C. Provide primer and finish coats which are compatible with each other and with prime coats provided under other Sections. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required.

D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade than finish coat so that numbers of coats can be easily discerned. No color mixing will be allowed at the job-site.

E. Thinner: Type as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Use thinner only when recommended by the paint manufacturer, and then only in a quantity as indicated on the label.

F. Primers: Primers, except metal primers and vivid color undercoats, shall be white in color for inspection purposes.

G. Secondary Products: Secondary products not specified by name and required for the job such as shellac, oils, patching compounds, putty, etc., shall be "best grade" products.

2.2 PRIMERS AND UNDERCOATS

A. Concrete and Plaster (CMU) Primer: ICI Devoe Bloxfil 4000 HD Acrylic, Tnemec “Envirofill” Series 130 or approved equal latex masonry filler.

1. Gloss: Matte, MPI Level 2.

2. VOC limit: 67 g/l.

3. Nominal 8 mils DFM. a. Coverage - CMU: 75 s.f. per gallon. b. Coverage - Concrete: 100 s.f. per gallon.

B. Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer (Includes Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metals): ICI Devoe Devflex 4020 PF DTM, Tnemec “Uni-Bond - Series 115”, or approved equal acrylic, rust-inhibitive primer recommended by manufacturer for use on both ferrous and non-ferrous metals.


2. DFM: 2.2 – 3.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: Minimum rating of 5 when tested per ASTM D 3359, Method B on all of the following surfaces: a. Steel prepared per SSPC SP-10. b. Aluminum prepared per SSPC SP-1. c. Galvanized steel prepared per SSPC SP-1.

2.3 INTERMEDIATE AND FINISH COATS

A. Latex Flat:

1. Acceptable products include:





Page 5 of 9

a. Kelly Moore “Enviro-Coat Interior Acrylic Flat” 1500. b. Benjamin Moore “Eco-Spec Interior Latex Flat” 219. c. ICI Dulux Life Master 9100 d. Or approved equal

2. VOC limit: 20 g/l (with colorants).

3. DFM: 1.2 mils.

B. Latex Eggshell/Satin:

1. Acceptable products include: a. Kelly Moore “Enviro-Coat Interior Acrylic Satin Enamel” 1510. b. Benjamin Moore “Eco-Spec Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel” 223. c. ICI Dulux Life Master 9300. d. Or approved equal


3. DFM: 1.4 mils.

C. Latex Semi-Gloss:

1. Acceptable products include: a. Kelly Moore “Enviro-Coat Interior Acrylic Semi-gloss Enamel” 1520. b. Benjamin Moore “Eco-Spec Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel” 224.” c. ICI Dulux Life Master 9200. d. Or approved equal


3. DFM: 1.4 mils.

D. Acrylic Dryfall: 1. Acceptable products include:

a. Tnemec Series 115 “Uni-Bond DF” b. ICI Dulux Uni Grip Aquacrylic Dryfall 1482 -1200 c. Or approved equal self-crosslinking acrylic, multi-substrate dryfall coating.

2. Sheen: Eggshell (MPI Level 3) 3. VOC limit: 150 g/l. 4. DFM: 3.0 mils.

E. High-Build Acrylic:

1. Acceptable products include: a. Tnemec Series 156 “Enviro-Crete” b. Or approved equal.

2. Sheen: Matte.


4. DFM: 4.0 mils.

F. Water Borne Urethane:

1. Acceptable products include: a. Tnemec “Endura-Shield W.B.” Series 1081 b. Or approved equal.






3. DFM: 2.5 mils.

G. Heat-Resistant Coating (Foil-Faced Air Barrier):

1. Acceptable products include: a. ICI Devoe HT-4H Heat Resistant Silicone Acrylic b. Or approved equal.

2. VOC limit: 3.28 g/l.

3. DFM: 1.5 – 2 mils.

2.4 PAINT COLORS

A. General: Provide paint colors as indicated in Part 4 – Color Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Examine surfaces to receive paint finish for conditions that will adversely affect execution, performance, or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through reasonable preparatory work as specified herein.

1. Surfaces which are unfit to receive the work of this section shall be repaired, replaced or re-finished such that they are acceptable and such that the work of this section may be done as specified. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to ensure that these provisions are strictly enforced.

2. Commencement of Work constitutes acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

B. Alkali Content Testing: Test concrete and masonry surfaces for alkalinity by performing appropriate tests, and neutralize as required for pH reading between 6.8 and 8.0, unless otherwise recommended by paint manufacturer. Test for pH following test method as described in ASTM D4262, utilizing litmus paper.

C. Moisture Content Testing: Test concrete and masonry surfaces for moisture content by performing appropriate tests. Maximum moisture content must not exceed 17 percent as determined by a moisture meter, unless otherwise required by paint manufacturer.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION (GENERAL)

A. General: Surface preparations and cleaning procedures shall be in strict accordance with the instructions and specifications of the paint manufacturer and with the requirements of this specification.

B. Removal of Fixtures: Cooperate with other trades and coordinate removal of fixtures, hardware items, and equipment, as required for painting work. Items to be removed on surfaces to be painted include: switch and receptacle plates, escutcheons and like plates, surface-mounted equipment, free-standing equipment which blocks access to painting surfaces, grilles and louvers at duct openings into finished spaces, and other items as required and directed.





Page 7 of 9


A. Uncoated Ferrous Metal: Thoroughly degrease surfaces using solvent (SSPC-SP 1) and remove rust and foreign matter by scraping, sanding, wire brushing, or other abrasion methods as necessary in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 and SSPC-SP 3. Remove pits and clean to bright metal before priming. Apply primer on the same day.

B. Shop-Coated Ferrous Metal: Thoroughly degrease surfaces and clean using solvent (SSPC-SP 1). Remove loose rust, blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, wire brushing, or other abrasion methods in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or SP 3; feather edges of adjacent sound paint. Dull glossy surfaces by scuff-sanding and wipe down. Spot-prime all abraded portions, rust areas, and bare surfaces with specified primer on same day.

C. Galvanized Metal (Unpainted): Clean surfaces, wash and etch, to remove factory films and oily residue as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Responsibility for insuring that the surface is properly prepared rests with the painting sub-contractor. Clean galvanized metal the same day to be painted. If a pretreatment wash primer is recommended by manufacturer, apply pretreatment not more than 8 hours in advance of applying primer.

D. Concrete: Clean surfaces free from dirt, grease, oil, efflorescence, and other foreign substances. Remove mortar droppings, glaze, and scale.

1. Concrete stains resulting from weathering of corroded metals may be removed by washing the surface with a solution composed of 2 to 8 ounces of sodium metasilicate per gallon of hot water; rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

2. Dirt, grease and oil may be removed by washing the surface with a solution composed of 2 to 8 ounces of trisodium phosphate (TSP) per gallon of hot water (150 – 200 degreed F); rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

3. Efflorescence may be removed by scraping, wire brushing and washing with a 5 to 10 percent by weight solution of muriatic acid; rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

4. Glazed mortar droppings, loose particles, and scale may be removed by wire brushing.

E. Plaster: Remove all dust and loose mortar by brushing. Neutralize alkali or efflorescence with wash solution recommended by paint manufacturer. Thoroughly clean off resulting crystals with stiff brushes.

3.4 CLEANING PRIOR TO PAINTING

A. Remove dust and loose deleterious materials from all surfaces before beginning painting operations. Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.5 APPLICATION OF PAINT

A. Mixing: Mix paint materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and directions. Mix often enough during application to keep the paint uniform and to ensure complete dispersion of pigment and a uniform composition.

1. Prepare multiple component coatings using all of the contents of the container for each component as packaged by the manufacturer. Mixing of partial kits will not be permitted. Multiple component coatings that have been mixed shall not be used beyond their pot life. Only the components specified and furnished by the manufacturer, including thinner if required, shall be mixed.





B. Application: Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Apply using airless spray to greatest extent possible for doors and door frames and other medium to high gloss paints. Brushes and rollers shall be of a type best suited for the type of material being applied.

1. Apply intermediate and finish coats within the manufacturer's recommended top coating time periods.

2. When applying paint to drywall, use a roller nap no greater than 3/8 inch so as to achieve a light stipple finish.

3. If metal doors, and plaster surfaces are not sprayed, finish may be applied with 1/4 inch nap roller. Brush and level out paint applied to metal door frames to achieve a nearly sprayed-on appearance.

C. Apply each coat of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness, free from holidays, sags, crawls, pinholes, blisters, unevenness in color, or other evidence of poor workmanship. Repaint thin spots or areas missed in the application and allow to dry before applying next coat of paint.

1. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, such as edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

2. Each coat shall be free of dirt, dust, moisture, etc., prior to application of next coat.

D. Allow each coat of paint to thoroughly dry, full thickness of the film, before application of the succeeding coat. Paint is considered dry for recoating when the next coat can be applied without the development of any detrimental film irregularities such as wrinkling, lifting, or loss of adhesion of the previous coat.

E. Coverage for each paint material is specified as either the total minimum dry film thickness in mils, or the spreading rate in square feet per gallon over the surface designated. Actual coverage rate will vary depending upon the texture and porosity of the surface, climatic conditions, etc.

1. The number of coats specified is the minimum required, irrespective of the coating thickness.

2. In the event the required paint thickness is not achieved, or coating shows through, apply additional coats until the color appearance is uniform and required thickness is obtained. Cost for additional coats to prevent show through shall be borne by the Installer.

3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum film build-up per coat (wet mils).

F. Sand lightly between coats of enamel to produce an even, smooth finish. Wipe to remove dust before recoating.

G. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

H. Do not paint over any code-required labels or any equipment identification or nomenclature plates.

3.6 DAMAGED PAINT SURFACES

A. General: Before final acceptance of the work by the Architect and Owner’s Representative, repair or re-finish painted surfaces which have been damaged at no additional cost. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish is not acceptable.

B. Areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint shall be hand or power sanded, feathering the edges. Prime and finish coat the areas using the same material as originally scheduled. Depending on the extent of repair and its appearance, an overall finish coat may be required by the Architect to achieve uniform appearance.





Page 9 of 9

3.7 CLEAN-UP

A. General: During the progress of the work, remove from the project all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags. Leave premises clean and in orderly condition.

B. Cleaning: Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.

PART 4 - SCHEDULES

4.1 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates wherever these materials occur in the Contract Documents, except as noted otherwise. Unless otherwise specified, the following paint systems are made up of products identified by Sherwin-Williams Company trade names and numbers.

1. It is not the intent to limit products to manufacturer indicated, but rather to establish a quality which is required for this Project; other manufacturers not listed under PART 2 PRODUCTS shall submit a substitution request in accordance with Procurement Substitution Procedures.

2. Actual sheen in the finish coat(s) may be changed as a result of field mock-up or initial paint sample submittal. Should paint sheen change and the specified product is not available in the requested sheen, then painting contractor shall provide equal or better paint material in the requested sheen at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Verify compatibility of top coats with shop primers applied under Related Sections. Apply intermediate coat or ties coat as required to obtain manufacturer’s recommended adhesion for the intended use and service for each environment.

4. Reference to coverage rate, or DFM means the minimum dry film thickness required per coat.

4.2 SYSTEMS FOR EXTERIOR SUBSTRATES

A. Galvanized Metal Doors and Frames (PAINT(s) 10 and 12): Polyurethane, Semi-Gloss.

B. Galvanized Metal Surfaces, unless otherwise indicated: Acrylic, Semi-Gloss.

C. Metal (Previously Painted): Acrylic, Semi-Gloss.

D. Concrete and Plaster (PAINT 4): High-Build Acrylic, Satin.

E. Foil-Faced Membrane (PAINT 1): Heat-Resistant.

4.3 COLOR SCHEDULE

PAINT-1: Black range.

PAINT-4: To match existing concrete/plaster color; Dorian Gray SW7017

PAINT-10: To match existing structural steel structure; Dorian Gray SW7017

PAINT-11: To match existing structural steel structure; Dorian Gray SW7017

END OF SECTION




Section 099600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of high-performance coating systems to exterior exposed structural steel, steel sheet and existing pre-finished metal panels.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel Framing”.

2. Division 5 Section “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing.”

3. Division 9 Section “Painting” for items not to receive high-performance coating.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

B. Environments: The following terms are used in Part 2 of this Section to distinguish between different corrosive exposures:

1. "Moderate environments" are corrosive industrial atmospheres with intermittent exposure to high humidity and condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, and regular cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with exposure to heavy concentrations of chemical fumes and occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products are moderate environments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material specified.

3. Manufacturer’s Certified Test Reports: manufacturer’s certified test reports verifying the products meet the performance requirements outlined in paragraph 2.2.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architect and Owner and other information specified.

D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which substrate preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

E. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each application tested.




Section 099600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS Page 2 of 7


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed high-performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system specified in Part 3.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing coatings on existing metal panel substrate, field test their adhesion to Project substrates as follows:

1. Locate test substrate where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each kind of coating substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test coatings will be

applied. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with coating manufacturer's technical representative

present. a. Test Method: Test coatings according to ASTM D 4541 Standard Test Method for

Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. b. Minimum Applied Force to Failure: 1030 psi using Test Method E.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information:





Page 3 of 7

1. Name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

8. Handling instructions and precautions.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying coatings.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; when surface temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating operation.

2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Available Products: Products used on this project shall be generically equivalent to those specified in paragraph 2.4 and shall meet the performance requirements outlined in paragraph 2.2.


A. Polyurethane Zinc-rich Primer

1. Test Method: ASTM G 85 Prohesion a. Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film. No more than 1/64”

rust creepage at the scribe after 15,000 hours.

2. Test Method: ASTM B 117 Salt Fog





a. Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film. No more than 1% rusting on the surface and no more than 1/4” rust creepage at the scribe after 20,000 hours.

B. Polyamide Epoxy

1. Test Method: ASTM G 85 Prohesion a. Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film. No more than 1/8” rust

creepage at the scribe after 5,000 hours.

2. Test Method: ASTM B 117 Salt Fog a. Requirement: No blistering, cracking, delamination or rusting on the plane and no

rust creepage at the scribe after 10,000 hours (with zinc primer).

C. Thermoset Fluorpolymer

1. Test Method: ASTM D 4141 EMMAQUA, Method C. a. Requirement: No blistering, cracking or chalking. No less than 95% gloss retention

after 1252 MJ/m2 EMMAQUA exposure (white).

2. Test Method: ASTM D 4587 QUV Exposure (UVA 340 bulbs, Cycle 4: 8 hours UV/4 hours condensation) a. Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or chalking. No less than 60% gloss retention

after 15,000 hours exposure (white).

3. Test Method: ASTM D 3363 Pencil Hardness. a. Requirement: HB.

4. Volume Solids a. Requirement: No less than 60% volume solids.

2.3 COATINGS MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various high-performance coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.

2.4 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS

A. Provide the following finish systems over exterior exposed steel:

1. Coating System: Three coats with UV blocker in finish coat. a. First Coat over Non-Galvanized AESS: Polyurethane Zinc-rich Primer Tnemec Series

90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc applied at 2.5-3.5 dry mils. b. Stripe coat all nuts, bolts and irregular surfaces with polyamide epoxy Tnemec Series

66 HB Epoxoline b. Intermediate Coat: Polyamide epoxy Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline applied at 4.0-

6.0 dry mils. d. Top Coat: Thermoset Fluorpolymer Tnemec Series 1070 Fluoronar (Gloss Finish)

applied at 2.5-3.0 dry mils.

B. Where exterior steel is below grade, provide the following finish systems:





Page 5 of 7

1. First Coat over Non-Galvanized AESS: Polyurethane Zinc-rich Primer Tnemec Series 90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc applied at 2.5-3.5 dry mils.

2. Top Coat: Polyamide Epoxy-Coal Tar Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar applied at 16-20 dry mils.

2.5 COLORS

A. Colors: To be selected by the Architect or his designated representative from manufacturers standards with Tnemec color charts as a minimum selection.

1. PAINT-2b: Match existing metal panel. a. Basis-of-Design: “Pewter Cast” SW7673.

2. PAINT-3: Match existing metal panel at St. Joseph’s St. porch. a. Basis-of-Design: “Enduring Bronze” SW7055.

3. PAINT-5: Color as selected for AESS, to match Architect’s control sample of anodized black acid etch.

4. PAINT-6: Color as selected for AESS, to match Architect’s control sample of vintage nickle.

5. PAINT-7: Color as selected for steel sheet, to match adjacent AESS color.

6. PAINT-9: Match existing curtain wall at Julia St. for existing storefront indicated to be painted. a. Basis-of-Design: “Enduring Bronze” SW7055.

7. PAINT-12: Custom metallic color to match Architect’s control sample PVDF-3a “Bronze II” VC105536XL with VC51132 for curtain-wall and aluminum entrance doors to match existing.

8. PAINT-16: Color as selected for AESS, to match Architect’s control sample of bone white.

B. There shall be a noticeable contrast in color between the second and third coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which high-performance coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application requirements.

1. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.

1. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from the primer Applicator before proceeding: a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions. b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime substrate.

2. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: a. SPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning b. Field Touch-up: Power tool clean all failed areas in accordance with SSPC-SP3.

Feather-edge all remaining intact coatings with the failed areas to create a smooth transition. Touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain coating material before using.

3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.

2. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.

3. Coating colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions.

4. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.





Page 7 of 7

B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method. a. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. b. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by

manufacturer. c. Where manufacturer's written instructions require sanding, sand between

applications to produce a smooth, even surface. d. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not

recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

2. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

1. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating and leave in an undamaged condition.

1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

2. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

END OF SECTION



Section 10 14 53 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 10 14 53

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO M 133 (2012; R 2016) Standard Specification for Preservatives and

Pressure Treatment Processes for Timber AASHTO M 168 (2007; R 2012) Standard Specification for Wood Products AASHTO M 268 (2014) Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Flat

and Vertical Traffic Control Applications AASHTO MASH (2009; Rev 1) Manual for Assess Safety Hardware

AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA) AWPA T1 (2016) Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard AWPA U1 (2016) Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A1011 (2015) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-

Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM A123 (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A320 (2015) Standard Specification for Alloy/Steel and Stainless Steel

Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service ASTM A325 (2014) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat

Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A36 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel




Page 2 of 6

ASTM A499 (2015) Standard Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from "T" Rails

ASTM A500 (2013) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A563 (2015) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A653 (2015; E 2016) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A709 (2016a) Standard Specification for Structural Steel for Bridges ASTM B209 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate ASTM B221 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes ASTM C94 (2016a) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM D4956 (2013) Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic

Control ASTM F436 (2011) Hardened Steel Washers U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA) FHWA SHS (2004; Supplement 2012) Standard Highway Signs MUTCD (2009) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices NCHRP 350 (1993) Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance

Evaluation of Highway

1.02 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section includes furnishing all materials, labor and equipment required to furnish and install all entrance sign letters, room name plates, plaque and accessories as specified herein and/or shown on the Drawings.

B. All signs must be in accordance with the requirements of the following agencies. In the event of a conflict between the agencies, the strictest requirements shall apply, as determined by the ENGINEER:

a. Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development (LADOTD) b. City of New Orleans Department of Public Works (CNO DPW) c. MUTCD.




Page 3 of 6

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Complete shop drawings and engineering data shall be submitted to the

ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. B. Submit a plan showing the proposed layout of signs to the ENGINEER for review.

Plan should denote sign type and approximate location (+/- 2’). C. Submit shop drawings showing signage designs (including dimensions and

colors) to the ENGINEER. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION Signs shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements these

Specifications. 1.05 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TRAFFIC SIGN POSTS

A. Steel Flanged Channel Section (U-Shape) - Fabricate steel posts from steel

conforming to ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A499 and with a minimum yield strength of 207 MPa 30 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 345 MPa 50 ksi. Punch or drill 7.9 to 9.5 mm 5/16 to 3/8 inch diameter holes spaced at 25.4 or 50.8 mm 1 or 2 inch centers along the centerline of the web prior to galvanizing for the entire length of the post. Galvanize posts after punching in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.

B. Perforated Steel Tube - Fabricate steel posts from steel conforming to either ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, Grade 340 50, Class 1, coating designation G90 or ASTM A1011/A1011M, structural steel, Grade 340 50, hot-dip galvanized after punching in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. Prepunch holes approximately 11.1 mm 7/16 inch in diameter spaced at approximately 25.4 mm 1 inch centers along each side of the tube for the entire length of the post.

C. Steel Tube - Steel tubing must conform to ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B or C, and must be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.




Page 4 of 6

D. Slip Base, Fuse Plate and Splice Plate - Structural steel base plates and stiffener

plates must conform to ASTM A36/A36M, minimum yield strength 345 MPa 50,000 psi.

E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers - High strength bolts must conform to

ASTM A325M ASTM A325. Nuts must conform to ASTM A563M ASTM A563. Washers must conform to ASTM F436M ASTM F436. High strength bolts, nuts and washers must be zinc coated.

2.02 FLAT ALUMINUM SIGN PANELS

A. Aluminum sign panels must conform to ASTM B209M ASTM B209, alloy-temper 6061-T6 or 5052-H38. The blanks must be free from laminations, blisters, open seams, pits, holes, other defects that may affect their appearance or use. The thickness must be uniform and the blank commercially flat.

2.03 TRAFFIC SIGN RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING

A. All background sheeting applied to flat sheet and extruded panel signs must be in accordance with ASTM D4956, Type III, IV, VII, VIII, IX or XI retroreflective sheeting and must have Class 1, 3, or 4 adhesive backing. Retroreflective sheeting must be high intensity that is an unmetallized micro prismatic reflective material.

B. Retroreflective sheeting must have sufficient adhesion, strength and flexibility such that the sheeting can be handled, processed and applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations without appreciable stretching, tearing, cracking or other damage.

C. Legend and Border - Apply retroreflective sheeting as legend and border in

accordance with ASTM D4956, Type IX, XI, or AASHTO M 268 Type C or D, Class 1. Retroreflective sheeting must be an unmetallized cube corner microprismatic reflective material. Retroreflective sheeting applied as legend and border for specific signing applications, without a datum mark on the surface of the sheeting, must be evaluated for rotational sensitivity in accordance with AASHTO M 268, Section 3.3.1 and fabricated in accordance with AASHTO M 268, Section 3.3.2.

D. Screen Printed Transparent Colored Areas - For screen printed transparent

colored areas or transparent colored overlay films on white sheeting, the coefficient of retroreflection (RA) must be no less than 70 percent of the original values for the corresponding color.

E. Adhesive Performance - Adhesive performance for retroreflective sheeting must

be in accordance with ASTM D4956. The sheeting surface must be in condition to be readily screen processed and compatible with transparent overlay films, plus recommended transparent and opaque screen process colors. Furnish manufacturer's information as to the type of solvent or solvents that may

be used to clean the surface of the sheeting without detrimental loss of performance and durability.




Page 5 of 6

2.05 LETTERS, NUMERALS, ARROWS, SYMBOLS, AND BORDERS

A. Apply letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, and borders on the retroreflective

sheeting or opaque background of the sign using the direct or reverse screen process. Apply messages and borders of a color darker than the background to the paint or the retroreflective sheeting using the direct process. Messages and borders must be of a color lighter than the sign background and applied using the reverse screen process. Use opaque or transparent colors, inks, and paints of the type and quality recommended by the retroreflective sheeting manufacturer in the screen process. Perform the screening in a manner that results in a uniform color and tone, with sharply defined edges of legends and borders and without blemishes on the sign background that will affect intended use. Air dry or bake the signs after screening according to the manufacturer's recommendations to provide a smooth hard finish. Reject any signs with blister's or other blemishes.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Bolts, nuts, post clips, lock and flat washers must be either aluminum alloy or

commercial quality stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized or cadmium plated after fabrication. [Bolts/nuts must be an approved tamper resistant design.] Provide fiber washers of commercial quality.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SIGN POSTS

A. Sign posts consist of a base post and sign post. [Drive steel sign base posts with a suitable driving head. Attach sign posts to base posts. Replace any base posts damaged during driving or otherwise at no additional cost to the Government.] [Embed steel sign base posts in concrete as indicated.] [Install manufactured triangular slip bases in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.]

3.02 SIGN PANELS

A. Clean, degrease and etch the face of metal panels using methods recommended by the retroreflective sheeting manufacturer. After cleaning and degreasing, apply retroreflective sheeting material to the sign panels as recommended by the manufacturer. Perform shearing, cutting and punching prior to preparing the blanks for application of reflective material. Holes must not be field drilled in any part of the panel. Use nylon washers recommended by the sign sheeting manufacturer between the bolt heads and sign faces on flat sheet aluminum signs. Replace any damaged sign panels at no additional cost to the Government.

3.03 LOCATION AND POSITION OF SIGNS

A. Locate and erect all signs in accordance with the drawings and MUTCD. Signs




Page 6 of 6

should be vertically mounted at right angles to the direction of, and facing, the traffic that they are intended to serve. Where mirror reflection from the sign face is encountered to such a degree as to reduce legibility, turn the sign slightly away from the road. Turn signs that are placed 9 m 30 feet or more from the pavement edge toward the road. On curved alignments, determine the angle of placement by the direction of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located. Mounted signs must present a smooth flat surface varying no more than 10 mm 3/8 inch from a 1.2 m 4-foot straightedge placed in any position on the face of the sign after erection. Mount signs on traffic signal posts with strap or clamp type sign supports. Each installed sign will be inspected by the Contracting Officer's representative prior to acceptance by the Government.

END OF SECTION




Section 129300 CUSTOM SITE FURNISHINGS

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Custom-fabricated exterior benches including associated structural supports.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, installation methods and available colors, styles, patterns and textures.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including plans and elevations, indicating overall dimensions.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For benches, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of materials, finishes, and colors.

1. Include one full size sample of skateboard protective insert.

E. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of site furnishings.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Information:

1. Products will be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of three years from the date of invoice.

2. The warranty does not apply to damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, tampering, negligence, or abuse.



Section 129300 CUSTOM SITE FURNISHINGS Page 2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS-OF-DESIGN MANUFACTURER, CUSTOM-FABRICATED BENCHES

A. Landscape Forms, Inc., 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. Toll Free (800) 521-2546. Phone (269) 381-0396. Fax (269) 381-3455. Website www.landscapeforms.com. E-mail: [email protected].

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS, CUSTOM-FABRICATED BENCHES

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design benches.

B. Structural Performance of Benches: Benches shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Concentrated Load: 750 lbs. applied in any direction at any point. 2.3 MATERIAL, CUSTOM-FABRICATED BENCHES

A. Reinforced cast stone (concrete): Manufacturer’s blend of portland cement, sand, aggregate, and color admixture.

1. Use only one brand, type and source of cement for entire Project.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Landscape Forms, Inc; “Meldstone.”

2. Provide integral colored concrete with lightfast (UV and fade resistant) color pigments.

3. Reinforced with steel bar framework.

4. Color: Natural Black.

B. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4 FABRICATION

A. Formwork: Fabricate forms sufficiently rigid to meet casting tolerances. Coat formwork with form release agent.

B. Casting: Fabricate units to required profiles and sizes. Execute work accurately to specified tolerances and free of broken edges.

C. Curing: Protect units from exposure to weather until concrete strength is adequate for form removal. Cure under identical conditions.


A. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

http://www.landscapeforms.com/




Section 129300 CUSTOM SITE FURNISHINGS

Page 3 of 3

B. Skateboard Protection: Type 316 stainless steel skateboard deterrent devices, cast-in or cut into stone. 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Skatestopper,

Inc; Diamond Insert 8-inch Series matching radius of park bench and planter edges or comparable product.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive benches.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install benches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install benches level and plumb.

C. Install skateboard protection in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Finish Damage: Contact manufacturer for assistance to repair minor damages to finish as approved by Architect.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean benches promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed benches to ensure that, except for normal weathering, benches will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



Section 129313 BICYCLE RACKS

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 12 93 13

BICYCLE RACKS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Bicycle Rack. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM Testing Standards: 1. ASTM B 117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, installation methods and available colors, styles, patterns and textures.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including plans and elevations, indicating overall dimensions.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of materials, finishes, and colors. D. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of site furnishings since 1969.

B. Product Support: Products are supported with complete engineering drawings and design patents. C. Base Worth: An installed base of products worth in excess of one hundred million dollars. D. Assets: Excess of twenty million dollars in assets. E. Production: Orders are filled within a 40-day schedule. F. Facility Operator: Welders and machine operators are certified.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Information: -Products will be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of three years from the date of invoice. -The warranty does not apply to damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, tampering, negligence, or abuse. - Landscape Forms, Inc. shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of any items found defective upon inspection by an authorized Landscape Forms service representative. -Purchasers should be aware that normal use of these high quality products can result in superficial damage affecting the finish. Scratches, nicks, and dents are to be considered normal wear and tear, and are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER




Page 2 of 3

A. Landscape Forms, Inc., 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. Toll Free (800) 521-2546. Phone (269) 381-0396. Fax (269) 381-3455. Website www.landscapeforms.com. E-mail: [email protected].

2.2 BICYCLE RACK

A. “Bicilinea” Bicycle Rack B. Style:

1. Embedded: -Depth: 59-3/4 inches. -Overall Height: 31-3/4 inches.

a. Length of Bike Rack: 1) 119 inches

2.3 MATERIALS . A. Horizontal tube: 3-5/16 inch dia x 0.08 inch wall thickness 304 stainless steel. B. Curved tube: 2 inch dia x 0.08 inch wall thickness 304 stainless steel. C. Vertical post: 3-1/8 inch x 5/8 inch 304 stainless steel flat bar. D. Collar for curved tube connection: Nylon E. Hardware: stainless steel 2.4 RECYCLED CONTENT

A. Stainless Steel Rack: -Recycled Material Content: Minimum 65 percent. -Post-Consumer Material Content: Minimum 50 percent. -Pre-Consumer Material Content: Minimum 15 percent. -Recyclable: 100 percent.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Shop assembled bicycle rack. 1. Vertical support post has welded on end cap. 2. Curved tube has welded on end cap 3. Curved tube assemblies are attached to horizontal tube with stainless steel hardware.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: Polished finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive racks. B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Install level. C. Anchor securely in place.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Finish Damage: Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect.

B. Component Damage: Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.






Page 3 of 3

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean racks promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed racks to ensure that, except for normal weathering, racks will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



Section 129343 SITE SEATING AND TABLES

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 12 93 43

SITE SEATING AND TABLES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Tables.

B. Chairs.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM Testing Standards: 1. ASTM B 117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 2. ASTM D 522 – Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. 3. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 4. ASTM D 2247 – Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%

Relative Humidity. 5. ASTM D 2794 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of

Rapid Deformation (Impact). 6. ASTM D 3359 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 7. ASTM D 3363 – Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 8. ASTM G 155 – Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of

Non-Metallic Materials. B. ISO Testing Standards:

1. ISO 1520 – Paints and Varnishes – Cupping Test. 2. ISO 2815 – Paints and Varnishes – Buchholz Indentation Test.

C. ANSI/BIFMA Testing Standards:

1. ANSI/BIFMA X5.4-2005 – Standard Test for Lounge Seating 2. ANSI/BIFMA X5.5-2008– Standard Test for Desk / Tables.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, storage and handling requirements and

recommendations, installation methods and available colors, styles, patterns and textures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including plans and elevations, indicating

overall dimensions. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of materials, finishes, and colors. D. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of site furnishings

since 1969. B. Product Support: Products are supported with complete engineering drawings and design patents.




Page 2 of 4

C. Base Worth: An installed base of products worth in excess of one hundred million dollars. D. Assets: Excess of twenty million dollars in assets. E. Production: Orders are filled within a 40-day schedule. F. Facility Operator: Welders and machine operators are certified.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,

with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep

materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Information:

-Products will be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of three years from the date of invoice. -The warranty does not apply to damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, tampering, negligence, or abuse. - Landscape Forms, Inc. shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of any items found defective upon inspection by an authorized Landscape Forms service representative. -Purchasers should be aware that normal use of these high quality products can result in superficial damage affecting the finish. Scratches, nicks, and dents are to be considered normal wear and tear, and are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Landscape Forms, Inc., 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. Toll Free (800) 521-

2546. Phone (269) 381-0396. Fax (269) 381-3455. Website www.landscapeforms.com. E-mail: [email protected].

2.2 TABLES

A. “Parc Centre” Tables B. Style:

1. Round: a. Diameter: 30 inches.

C. Size: 1. Height: 29-1/2 inches.

D. Mounting:

1. Free standing with adjustable levelers. 2.3 MATERIALS

A. Table Top: Table tops are made from solid 5/16 steel plate welded to the table support.






Page 3 of 4

B. Table Support: 2-1/2” outer diameter x 0.120” wall steel tubing. Base plate 17” outer diameter x 0.375” steel.

2.4 SITE SEATING

A. “Parc Centre” Chairs B. Size:

-Depth: 21 inches. -Overall Height: 32-1/2 inches. -Width: 18-1/2 inches. -Seat Height: 17-3/4 inches.

C. Stackable

1. Stacking Bumper / Glide: -Width: 0.85 inches. -Length: 1.5 inches. -Height: 0.53 inches.

D. Chair Frame: 7/16” outer diameter steel wire.

1. Fifty percent (50%) of chairs: Arms 2. Fifty percent (50%) of chairs: No Arms

E. Seat & Back Panels: ¾” x 0.188” Straps

2.5 MATERIAL

A. Seat & Back Panel: For exterior or interior applications, made of steel straps. B. Frame: Cold Drawn Steel. C. Stacking Bumper Glide: Made from super-tough nylon to resist damage from dragging on rough

surfaces. 2.6 RECYCLED CONTENT -Recycled Material Content: Minimum 90.6 percent.

-Post-Consumer Material Content: Minimum 58.8 percent. -Pre-Consumer Material Content: Minimum 31.8 percent. -Recyclable: 100 percent.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Finish on Carbon Steel: Landscape Forms, Inc. “Pangard II”.

1. Primer: Rust inhibitor. 2. Topcoat: Thermosetting polyester powdercoat. UV, chip, and flake resistant. 3. Test Results: “Pangard II”.

a. Gloss, Garner 60 Degrees, ASTM D 523: Plus or minus 5. b. UV Resistance, Color and Gloss, ASTM G 155, Cycle 7: Delta E less than 2 at 2.0 mils

and less than 20 percent loss. c. Cross-Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D 3359, Method B: 100 percent pass. d. Flexibility Test, Mandrel, ASTM D 522: 3 mm at 2 mils. e. Erichsen Cupping, ISO 1520: 8 mm. f. Impression Hardness, Buchholz, ISO 2815: 95. g. Impact Test, ASTM D 2794: 60 inches/pound at 2.5 mils.




Page 4 of 4

h. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: 2H minimum. i. Corrosion Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM B 117: Max undercutting 1 mm. j. Humidity Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM D 2247: Max blisters 1 mm.

4. Color: To be determined. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive tables and chairs. B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install tables and chairs in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the

Drawings. B. Install tables and chairs plumb and level.

C. Secure tables and chairs to eye anchors embedded in planting with 3/16” vinyl coated steel cable. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Finish Damage: Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

as approved by Architect. B. Component Damage: Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully

repaired as determined by Architect. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean tables and chairs promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tables and chairs to ensure that, except for normal weathering, tables and chairs

will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park New Orleans, Louisiana Fountain Source Engineering and Design, Inc.

Final Review Set June 07, 2017

Section 13 12 00 WATER FEATURE MECHANICAL

Page 1 of 8

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition and Division 1 Specification Section apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Mechanical installation of water feature systems which includes but not limited to materials, labor, equipment and services as shown in the drawings or described in specifications. Work in this Section shall include but not be limited to:

1. Primary display system including control system, pumps, valves, piping, structural supports.

2. Filtration and water treatment systems accessories and controls.

3. Drainage system, potable water supply and overflow, and controls.

4. All special tools for proper operation and maintenance of equipment provided under this section.


A. This installation shall comply with all applicable and the most stringent provisions of the latest edition of the following codes:

1. BOCA - National Building Code

2. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code

3. NEC - National Electrical Code

B. Materials furnished hereunder shall, where applicable, comply with the latest edition of applicable standard specifications published by the following organizations:

1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Material

2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical & Electrical Engineers

4. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

5. NEMA - National Electrical Manufactures Association

6. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

7. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

8. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation

9. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineers

10. AWWA - American Water Works Association

11. CS - Commercial Standards


A. All workmanship and materials shall conform and comply with the requirements of building ordnance’s, codes, rules and regulations of all departments of Federal, State, County and City having lawful jurisdiction over the work in this section.

B. When these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and /or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and/or labor required for compliance with these rules and regulations although not mentioned in these specifications or indicated on the drawings.

Addendum 1October 06,2017

sdardant

Text Box





Page 2 of 8

D. All materials shall be new and shall conform with applicable standards in every case where such standards have been established for the particular material in question.

E. All work shall be executed by workmen skilled in the craft to which they are assigned.

F. Adequate supervision shall be provided to maintain high quality workmanship.

G. Any proposal for substitution of materials or equipment shall be submitted 10 calendar days prior to final bid date; otherwise, no substitutions will be permitted. Submittal for equivalent items shall, where applicable, include the following data which are not necessarily required for specified items:

1. Performance characteristics and hydraulic and electrical load date.

2. Materials of construction, fabrication and manufacture.

3. Certification of Conformance with specific codes, standards and specifications.

4. Submittal of substituted equipment may be rejected if the component alters the design in a manner that affects other trades or if it impairs accessibility or critical clearances.

H. No substitutions shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at its own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Owner.

I. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also submit a bid on the "as-specified" materials and equipment.

J. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified water effects.

1.5 MATERIAL

A. The Equipment Supplier shall accept complete design responsibility for the hydraulic and electrical system, provided that all equipment required for the fountain installation is procured from the specified equipment Manufacturer as itemized in tis proposals and materials list on the final, approved installation drawings.

B. The Contactor shall be responsible for installation of all equipment required for the fountain installation in accordance with fountain consultant's drawings and instructions.

C. Performance Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee the fountain to perform to the designed water heights and spray patterns, provided that installation of the equipment is in strict accordance with the Supplier's recommendations, instructions, details, and approved drawings.

D. Warranty: All materials and component parts, excluding lamps, supplied by the Manufacturer shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of one year from date of substantial completion or 18 months from shipment, whichever comes first.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to the Architect or approval, in quantities required for proper distribution and in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions

B. Shop drawings shall include or incorporate those final drawings furnished by the Equipment Supplier, as specified herein, together with all additional information and drawings required to show the proper installation of fountain equipment. "Preliminary" or "schematic" drawings provided by the Equipment Supplier shall not be used for installation purposes.

C. The Contractor shall deliver drawings for approval, after the signing of the contract, so as not to delay the construction required under other sections.

D. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Materials list for all materials and equipment furnished.


sdardant

Text Box





Page 3 of 8

2. Shop drawings and product data for all materials and equipment furnished.

3. Shop drawing of the equipment space layout showing all mechanical and electrical equipment in addition to all piping and conduit. Include pipe elevations and dimensions between pipe centerlines where relevant. Provide layout drawings of all pipe runs and pool fitting locations.

4. Shop drawings shall include outline dimensions, operating and maintenance clearances required, and sufficient technical data to indicate compliance with the specification.

5. Shop drawings may not include details reproduced from the Contract Documents except when submitting "as specified" materials and equipment.

6. Submittals may be rejected if they are difficult to read due to insufficient scale, poor image quality, or poor drafting quality; or if the required information is not included.

7. Work shall not proceed until submittals have been approved by the Architect.

8. The Contractor shall provide labeled equipment certifying approval, as hereinafter specified, by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) whenever available.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all trades and appropriate sections of the construction specifications as necessary to ensure proper provisions for the work of this section.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Owner's property from injury of loss due to its work. All damage to existing property (building, utilities, pavement, etc.) or planting (trees, shrubs, lawn or ground cover) caused by the Contractor during its operation or as a result of malfunction or installed work during the guarantee period shall be repaired at the Contractors expense.

C. The Contractor shall fully inform itself regarding any available space limitations and unusual requirements, for the installation of all materials and work furnished under this section. Although the location of equipment may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, the Contractor shall also be guided by the Architectural details and conditions at the job, correlating its work with that of the other sections and other trades, with discrepancies and interferences being brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution prior to proceeding with work.

1.8 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Permits: The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections and certificates of inspection of any governmental and inspection body having jurisdiction over all or any part of the work included under this section and/or such inspections etc., required by these specifications.

B. Fees: The Contractor shall secure and pay for all fees and assessments in connection with the work under this contract and shall include this cost in its bid and contract price.

1.9 GUARANTEE AND EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. In entering into a contract covering this work, the Contractor accepts the specifications and drawings and guarantees that the work will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and drawings, as may be made in the contract documents.

B. The Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best quality procurable and that only experienced workers, familiar with each particular class of work, will be employed.

C. The Contractor further agrees to hold itself responsible for any defects which may develop in any part of the entire system, including equipment as provided for under this specification, due to faulty workmanship, design or material and to replace and make good, without cost to the Owner, and such faulty parts or construction which may develop at any time within one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance. Any repairs or replacements required because of defects, as outlined in this clause, are to be made promptly and approved in writing by the Architect.

D. Contractor shall warrant all material found defective within one (1) year of final acceptance and


sdardant

Text Box





Page 4 of 8

shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner including labor to remove and re-install any defective materials.

E. The warranty shall not extend to damage incurred through incorrect or improper operation and maintenance by the Owner. The Owner shall assume full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance upon final acceptance of installation from Contractor.

F. In the case of Manufacturer's guarantees being limited, or expiring within the specified guarantee period, the Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and providing service contractors and additional warranty coverage to extend through the warranty period as may be required by Owner.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. The Equipment Supplier shall deliver to the Owner three (3) copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, together with any additional information or manuals which would assist in the proper operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. The Contractor shall, at its expense, arrange and provide for the technical instruction of the Owner's maintenance personnel, by the Equipment Supplier's personnel, for such time as is reasonably required to acquaint them with the operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished and installed under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Prime Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing all specialized fountain mechanical and electrical materials and tools for the fountain and shall then furnish electrical fountain components to the Electrical Contractor for installation and connection.

B. Materials not listed within these specifications or on drawings as furnished by the Equipment Supplier, but required for the complete installation of the fountain mechanical and/or electrical systems, shall be furnished by the Contractor.

C. Materials shown on the drawings, but not specified herein, shall be provided in accordance with information shown on the drawings and the general provisions of this part of the specification.

D. Substitutions in the list of equipment included in this section may be made by the Equipment Supplier only if the equipment is of better quality and more effective than that listed, improves system design and performance or delivery times, and only if the changes are thoroughly documented and approved in writing by the Architect.

2.2 MATERIAL SUPPLY

A. Warranty: All materials and component parts, excluding lamps supplied by the Equipment Supplier, shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of official start-up or 18 months, whichever is sooner.

B. Design Responsibility: The Equipment Supplier shall accept complete design responsibility for the hydraulic and electrical system, provided that all equipment is supplied by it as indicated. This does not include responsibility for the actual installation of the equipment except where the equipment is installed by the Equipment Supplier.

C. Performance Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the fountain system will perform to the designed water heights and patterns and will create the designed water heights and patterns, and will create the designed lighting effects, providing the equipment is supplied by a single Equipment Supplier and the installation is in accordance with the Supplier's recommendations and drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Install and connect all equipment in accordance with Manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Provide all piping, valves, and connections recommended by the Manufacturer for proper operation.


sdardant

Text Box





Page 5 of 8

B. Protect all pipes, equipment, and other parts of the work against injury by exposure to the weather during construction while stored or installed in place.

C. Make all adjustments required for the proper operation of the mechanical system. Use Manufacturer's factory technicians where adjustments cannot be accomplished by the Contractor's personnel at Contractors' expense.

3.2 ROTATING EQUIPMENT

A. After installation, align and balance all pumps connected to motors within the tolerance limits recommended by the equipment and coupling Manufacturer.

B. Before any rotating equipment is put in operation for testing purposes, properly lubricate with lubricants recommended by the Manufacturer. Further lubricate before final acceptance. Provide a complete schedule of lubrication of all rotating equipment within the equipment literature binder.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Supply all piping systems with valves arranged to provide necessary isolation and give regulating control throughout the system.

B. Butterfly valves used to isolate equipment or accessories shall be lug-type installed in a manner to allow servicing without draining the system.

C. Do not install valve stems below horizontal line.

3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. Provide flanges, Victaulic Fittings or unions as indicated and as necessary, to allow removal and reinstallation of any item, or equipment, or accessory without cutting, welding, or soldering.

2. Provide discharge piping of proper size for all air vent, solenoid and relief valves. Extend to nearest drain.

3. Cut pipe to measurements established at the site. Work into place without springing or forcing.

4. Protect all openings in piping during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter.

5. Cut pipe and tubing ends square. Remove rough edges and burrs so that a smooth and unobstructed flow will be obtained.

6. Close or short nipples should be used only where shown on the Drawings, or absolutely necessary to satisfy dimensional constraints.

7. Make changes in pipe size using reduced fittings. Use bushings only if shown on the drawings.

8. Unless otherwise noted, connections to equipment or accessories shall be threaded for sizes 2.5" and smaller, flanged for sizes 3" and larger.

9. Arrange exposed piping straight, parallel and perpendicular to the walls of the structure unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

10. Wherever two or more pipes are installed in parallel, allow sufficient space for required connecting, painting, and/or the application of insulation.

B. JOINTS

1. Grooved Pipe: Grooves for mechanical coupling shall be cut using tools, methods, and dimensional criteria specified by the manufacturer of the coupling.

2. Welded Pipe: Perform all welding in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler Pressure Piping Code or ANSI B31.1.

3. Threaded Pipe: Cut all threads accurately, axis of thread coinciding with axis of pipe. No more than two threads shall show beyond fitting. Make up joints with Teflon tape. Remake leaky joints with new materials

4. Copper Tubing Soldered Joints


sdardant

Text Box





Page 6 of 8

a. Use drawn temper tubing.

b. Surfaces to be joined must be cleaned of all oil, grease, rust, and oxides. After cleaning, and before assembly or heating, apply an appropriate flux to each joint surface and spread evenly. Apply heat with an oxyacetylene torch.

c. Apply an appropriate flux to each joint surface and spread evenly. Apply heat with an oxyacetylene torch.

d. Make up all joints using non-corrosive flux and 95-5 solder, ATSM B32 Grade A.

e. Provide each valve with unions for removal of valve without cutting or torching.

f. Provide dielectric unions at points of connection to ferrous piping.

g. Where threaded connections are used in copper systems, all nipples shall be standard weight red brass.

5. Flared Joints

a. Use annealed tubing.

b. Cut end using tubing cutter. Ream and clean.

c. Slide fitting over end. Flare tubing using standard flaring tool.

6. Stainless Steel Pipe

a. Slope all pipe to equipment room. No traps are permitted unless note otherwise.

b. Provide adequate support for pipe and it's contents that will keep the pipe in alignment and without distortion. Place pipe hangers with rubber liners at spacing recommended by code.

c. Piping shall be installed using equal and smooth flow design principals. Layout shall be per drawings.

d. Install valved drains at all low points in system.

e. Connections shall be flanged, Victaulic Coupling or threaded.

C. PENETRATIONS

1. Core drilling for pipe penetrations shall be accomplished only at locations and in a manner approved by the Architect.

2. Provide a metal or approved plastic sleeve or core-drilled hole for every pipe passing through a concrete wall or floor.

3. Provide a water stop or membrane clamp for every pipe or sleeve penetrating an exterior concrete wall or floor or the fountain wall or floor, whichever is appropriate to the waterproofing method and/or as shown in the drawings.

4. Seal sleeves passing through interior walls with foam sealant, unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.

D. TESTING

1. Provide all temporary piping, pumps, and gauges necessary to conduct the specified tests.

2. Conduct all tests before concealment of work and before any coating, wrap, or insulation is applied.

3. Replace or repair any part that leaks. Repeat test until criteria are met.

4. Do not subject any item to a test pressure greater than the pressure rating of the item.

5. Vent air from all piping being tested.

6. The completed piping system shall be tested as follows:

a. Conduct each test for a minimum continuous duration of eight hours.


sdardant

Text Box





Page 7 of 8

b. Hydrostatically pressure test all storm and sanitary drain piping at 15 psi.

c. Hydrostatically pressure test all other piping and equipment at 75 psi.

d. Strike all solder joints with a soft-face hammer while under pressure.

e. Log pressure readings for all tests required above at the beginning and end of each test and on every working day between. Note the location and cause of any failures and method of repair on the daily log. Submit copy of the log to the Architect weekly.

f. Testing of the completed system, as specified above, shall be witnessed by the Engineer.

E. FLUSHING

1. Before the fountain system is placed in operation, flush all fountain system piping with water to remove foreign matter and debris in piping.

2. Completely drain all piping and equipment. Re-flush as necessary until water runs clean.

3. Fill the system to the required capacity with clean water.

4. Circulate the water throughout the system for one hour, using the display pump. Install startup screens as necessary to prevent equipment clogging and damage.

5. Drain, fill, and circulate (repeat previous three steps above) until the water remains clear.

3.5 HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. All floor-mounted equipment shall be erected on reinforced concrete housekeeping pads. Pads shall be 4" high with chamfered edges except where otherwise indicated or required in drawings.

3.6 SUPPORTING

A. Furnish and install all required fasteners, rods, hangers, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, and steel plates and shapes.

B. Furnish and arrange for the installation of all required inserts and anchor bolts. Provide templates where appropriate.

C. Provide additional hangers or supports at all valves, strainers, and elsewhere where required to properly support any additional pipe loadings.

D. Where several pipes occur at the same elevation, trapeze type hangers.

E. Provide copper plated hangers where hangers are in direct contact with copper piping.

F. Strap hangers are not permitted in any piping work.

G. Equipment may not support any of the pipe loading, nor may equipment, except valves and strainers, be supported by any of the piping.

H. Basket strainers larger than 3" shall be independently supported.

I. Piping shall not be supported by another pipe or duct.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide a securely attached permanently engraved metal nameplate for each piece of equipment containing all data required to properly identify the equipment (i.e. manufacturer, type, size, capacity, horsepower, etc.).

B. Provide a valve tag for each valve to provide information to correlate the valve with the outlet or fitting served.

C. Provide a half-size copy of the "As-built" Schematic Diagram, permanently encased in plastic, to provide the Owner's operating personnel ready correlation of each valve identified with each outlet or fitting served.

D. Install nameplates for gauge/control device panels as shown on the Drawings. Attach using stainless steel machine screws.


sdardant

Text Box





Page 8 of 8

E. Provide flow direction arrow pipe bands on all system piping. (Seton or equal).

3.8 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Make temporary and final adjustments for each system and equipment apparatus installed, using factory-trained technicians when appropriate. Refer to Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals for system start-up and adjustment details. Contact Manufacturer/Supplier for additional assistance as necessary.

3.9 PAINTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean all exposed equipment and piping to remove rust, scale, concrete, etc. before painting.

B. Mask off all bright metal parts and nameplates.

C. Paint all exposed equipment and piping (including galvanized) within the equipment space as follows:

1. Pretreatment, bare ferrous parts: Sand blast or treat with oil penetrant.

2. Primer: Previously painted or retreated equipment and piping shall receive one coat of rust inhibiting primer.

3. Finish: Apply two coats of white epoxy enamel.

4. Thoroughly clean and wipe down all equipment and piping, sweep floor and remove all debris and remaining tools and equipment from pump room, and any other loose or abandoned items which may create an operation or maintenance hazard.

3.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. At the time of completion, a period of not less than eight hours shall be allotted by the Contractor for instruction of operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all systems. All personnel shall be instructed at one time, the Contractor making at its expense, all necessary arrangements with Manufacturer's technicians to provide instruction, product literature, and application guides for the user's reference.

3.10 PROOF OF OPERATION

B. Prior to acceptance of the installation by the Owner, demonstrate a thirty day, fully automated, uninterrupted daily operation of not less than eight hours, nor more than sixteen hours, for all systems provided under this Section.

B. Supervise the operation of the equipment and be responsible for the proper operation thereof and make no claim against the Owner for any damage to the equipment during such operation. Make such changes, adjustments, or replacement of equipment as may be required to ensure installation complies with the Specifications, and replace any defective or non-conforming parts or materials.

C. The costs of labor, electricity, water, and operational tools, equipment and supplies during the thirty-day operation period shall be paid by the Contractor.

D. Coordinate the thirty-day operation period with all trades related to the fountain work.


sdardant

Text Box



Addendum 1 October 6, 2017

Section 13 12 15 WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition and Division 1 Specification Section apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16100 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

B. Section 131213 - Water Feature Mechanical

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Electrical installation of water feature systems which includes but not limited to materials, labor, equipment and services as shown in the drawings or described in specifications. Work in this Section shall include but not be limited to:

1. Display nozzle sequencing valves

2. Ultrasonic sensors.

3. Anemometers.

4. Pump start/stop and speed control.

5. Water level sensing and make-up.

6. Chemical monitoring and make-up.

7. Facility interface and communication.


A. This installation shall comply with all applicable and the most stringent provisions of the latest edition of the following codes:

1. BOCA - National Building Code

2. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code

3. NEC - National Electrical Code

B. Materials furnished hereunder shall, where applicable, comply with the latest edition of applicable standard specifications published by the following organizations:

1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Material

2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical & Electrical Engineers

4. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

5. NEMA - National Electrical Manufactures Association

6. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

7. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

8. ETL - Edison Testing Laboratories (ETL Semko)

11. CS - Commercial Standards


A. All workmanship and materials shall conform and comply with the requirements of building ordnances, codes, rules and regulations of all departments of Federal, State, County and City having lawful jurisdiction over the work in this section.

B. When these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above

sdardant

Text Box





Page 2 of 7

mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and /or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and/or labor required for compliance with these rules and regulations although not mentioned in these specifications or indicated on the drawings.

D. All materials shall be new and shall conform with applicable standards in every case where such standards have been established for the particular material in question.

E. All work shall be executed by workmen skilled in the craft to which they are assigned.

F. Adequate supervision shall be provided to maintain high quality workmanship.

G. Any proposal for substitution of materials or equipment shall be submitted 10 calendar days prior to final bid date; otherwise, no substitutions will be permitted. Submittal for equivalent items shall, where applicable, include the following data which are not necessarily required for specified items:

1. Electrical load data.

2. Materials of construction, fabrication and manufacture.

3. Certification of Conformance with specific codes, standards and specifications.

4. Submittal of substituted equipment may be rejected if the component alters the design in a manner that affects other trades or if it impairs accessibility or critical clearances.

H. No substitutions shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at its own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Owner.

I. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also submit a bid on the "as-specified" materials and equipment.

J. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified water effects.

1.6 MATERIAL

A. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall accept complete design responsibility for electrical and control systems, provided that all equipment required for the fountain installation is procured from the specified equipment Manufacturer as itemized in his proposal and materials list on the final, approved installation drawings.

B. The Electrical/Controls Contactor shall be responsible for installation of all equipment required for the fountain installation in accordance with fountain consultant's drawings and instructions.

C. Performance Guarantee: Equipment Suppliers shall guarantee the fountain to perform to the designed water heights and spray patterns, provided that installation of the equipment is in strict accordance with the Supplier's recommendations, instructions, details, and approved drawings.

D. Warranty: All materials and component parts, excluding lamps, supplied by the Manufacturer shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of one year from date of substantial completion or 18 months from shipment, whichever comes first.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to the Architect or approval, in quantities required for proper distribution and in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions.

B. Shop drawings shall include or incorporate those final drawings furnished by the Equipment Supplier, as specified herein, together with all additional information and drawings required to show the proper installation of fountain equipment. "Preliminary" or "schematic" drawings

sdardant

Text Box





Page 3 of 7

provided by the Equipment Supplier shall not be used for installation purposes.

C. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall deliver drawings for approval, after the signing of the contract, so as not to delay the construction required under other sections.

D. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Materials list for all materials and equipment furnished.

2. Shop drawings and product data for all materials and equipment furnished.

3. Shop drawing of the equipment space layout showing all electrical equipment and conduit. Include elevations and dimensions between conduit centerlines where relevant. Provide layout drawings of all conduit runs emanating from their respective control rooms to terminus points.

4. Shop drawings shall include outline dimensions, operating and maintenance clearances required, and sufficient technical data to indicate compliance with this specification.

5. Shop drawings may not include details reproduced from the Contract Documents except when submitting "as specified" materials and equipment.

6. Submittals may be rejected if they are difficult to read due to insufficient scale, poor image quality, or poor drafting quality; or if the required information is not included.

7. Work shall not proceed until submittals have been approved by the Engineer/Architect.

8. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall provide labeled equipment certifying approval, as hereinafter specified, by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) whenever available.

E. ADDITIONAL REMOVABLE PARTS AND EQUIPMENT

1. Provide removable caps, covers, keys, and other incidental items as specified In the drawings.

2. Provide spare lights.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall coordinate the work with all trades and appropriate sections of the construction specifications as necessary to ensure proper provisions for the work of this section.

B. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Owner's property from injury of loss due to its work. All damage to existing property (building, utilities, pavement, etc.) or planting (trees, shrubs, lawn or ground cover) caused by the Electrical/Controls Contractor during its operation or as a result of malfunction or installed work during the guarantee period shall be repaired at the Contractors expense.

C. The Electrical/Controls Contractor shall fully inform itself regarding any available space limitations and unusual requirements, for the installation of all materials and work furnished under this section. Although the location of equipment may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, the Electrical/Controls Contractor shall also be guided by the Architectural details and conditions at the job, correlating its work with that of the other sections and other trades, with discrepancies and interferences being brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution prior to proceeding with work.

1.9 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Permits: Electrical/Controls Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections and certificates of inspection of any governmental and inspection body having jurisdiction over all or any part of the work included under this section and/or such inspections etc., required by these specifications.

B. Fees: Electrical/Controls Contractor shall secure and pay for all fees and assessments in connection with the work under this contract and shall include this cost in its bid and contract price.

1.10 GUARANTEE AND EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

sdardant

Text Box





Page 4 of 7

A. In entering into a contract covering this work, the Electrical/Controls Contractor accepts the specifications and drawings and guarantees that the work will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and drawings, as may be made in the contract documents.

B. The Electrical/Controls Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best quality procurable and that only experienced workers, familiar with each particular class of work, will be employed.

C. The Electrical/Controls Contractor further agrees to hold itself responsible for any defects which may develop in any part of the entire system, including equipment as provided for under this specification, due to faulty workmanship, design or material and to replace an make good, without cost to the Owner, any such faulty parts or construction which may develop at any time within one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance. Any repairs or replacements required because of defects, as outlined in this clause, are to be made promptly and approved in writing by the Architect.

D. Electrical/Controls Contractor shall warrant all material found defective within one (1) year of final acceptance and shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner including labor to remove and re-install any defective materials.

E. The warranty shall not extend to damage incurred through incorrect or improper operation and maintenance by the Owner. The Owner shall assume full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance upon final acceptance of installation from Electrical/Controls Contractor.

F. In the case of Manufacturer's guarantees being limited, or expiring within the specified guarantee period, the Electrical/Controls Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and providing service contractors and additional warranty coverage to extend through the warranty period as may be required by Owner.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. The Equipment Supplier shall deliver to the Owner three (3) copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, together with any additional information or manuals which would assist in the proper operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. The Electrical/Controls Contractor, at its expense, arrange and provide for the technical instruction of the Owner's maintenance personnel, by the Equipment Supplier's personnel, for such time as is reasonably required to acquaint them with the operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished and installed under this section.

1.12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE

A. OPERATION

1. The water feature system operation as described in the drawings and documents.

2. Final programming to be determined after onsite demonstration of various modes.

The control panel shall operate all pumps automatically by means of a 24-7 pump timers, soft start controllers for soft startup and shutdown, on timed as well as upon power failure, and have a manual override.

3. The filtration systems are to be individually controlled and to be set to operate for 24 hours per day.

4. An automated water level control system including an auto fill valve and a 24vdc input 4-20ma pressure water level sensor will monitor low, medium and high (normal water levels) for both operating and static conditions in each pool. The sensors are interconnected with the pumps so that the pumps cannot energize unless the water level is at the correct elevation. At normal water level, the system runs. When the water level drops below low water level the sensor interfaces with the automatic fill bypass solenoid valve that opens to add water to the reservoir through the filtration piping. When water raises back to high water level, the autofill valve shuts off. If water cannot be made up fast enough and water level continues to drop in the reservoir, and the autofill valve closes and the pumps will shut down, a general fault alarm is sent to the facility BMS system.

sdardant

Text Box





Page 5 of 7

5. The Fountain Control panel is to be interfaced with BMS- building automation system. Provide on/off contacts for each pump, for low water in each pool alarm, for high water in pump room alarm, auto-fill on in each pool, interface to water treatment alarms, wind sensor failure, mist column fog pump, mist column water treatment, and sump pump alarms. Refer also to Electrical drawings.

6. The system is to be grounded and bonded as per NEC Code 680.

B. PROGRAMMING

1. Contractor shall provide 4 x programmed shows; 1 x low-show, 1 x medium-show, 1 x high-show and 1 x maintenance show.

2. 3 x programmed shows shall operate in random sequence per hour and continuously over the operating day-period.

3. Duration and content of programmed shows shall be reviewed and coordinated with Project and Ownership representatives prior to start of work and after shows have been established and demonstrated.

4. Contractor shall provide training and instruction to Project and Ownership representatives to allow for modification and alteration of existing shows, and addition of new show.

5. Contractor shall provide technical support to Project and Ownership post installation and start-up for a period deemed reasonable by both parties to ensure Project and Ownership can operate and maintain control system with their staff and resources.

6. Contractor shall provide Project and Ownership a list of technical requirements and equipment necessary, and assistance as to ensure reliable operation and programming of the control system post installation and start-up.

1.13 TESTING

A. Pump, sensor/display valve, level control, BMS interface are to be tested and demonstrated prior to acceptance by the Engineer and Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL

1. Prime Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing all specialized electrical materials and tools for the fountain and shall then furnish electrical fountain components to the Electrical/Controls Contractor for installation and connection.

2. Materials not listed within these specifications or on drawings as furnished by the Equipment Supplier, but required for the complete installation of the fountain electrical and control system, shall be furnished by the Electrical/Controls Contractor.

3. Materials shown on the drawings, but not specified herein, shall be provided in accordance with information shown on the drawings and the general provisions of this part of the specification.

4. Substitutions in the list of equipment included in this section may be made by the Equipment Supplier only if the equipment is of better quality and more effective than that listed, improves system design and performance or delivery times, and only if the changes are thoroughly documented and approved in writing by the Architect.

5. Warranty: All materials and component parts, excluding lamps supplied by the Equipment Supplier, shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of official start-up or 18 months, whichever is sooner.

6. Design Responsibility: Electrical/Controls Contractor shall accept complete design responsibility for the electrical system, provided that all equipment is supplied by it as indicated. This does not include responsibility for the actual installation of the equipment

sdardant

Text Box





Page 6 of 7

except where the equipment is installed by the Equipment Supplier.

7. Performance Guarantee: Electrical/Controls Contractor shall provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the fountain system will perform to the designed water heights and patterns and will create the designed water heights and patterns, and will create the designed lighting effects, providing the equipment is supplied by a single Equipment Supplier and the installation is in accordance with the Supplier's recommendations and drawings.

B. CONDUIT AND BOXES

1. All junction boxes in pump room shall be UL listed type, complete with compatible connectors. Size of box shall meet code requirements for number of conductors.

2. All conduit for in grade shall be UL listed schedule 40 and to sizes shown. Connections to stub ups shall be with compatible adapters.

3. All conduit in pump room shall be Schedule 40.

4. All fittings for shall be bell type unless otherwise specified.

5. All conduit connected to pumps and solenoid valves shall be liquid tight flexible nonmetallic conduit complete with copper ground wire. Connectors shall be liquid tight, suitable for the conduit used.

6. Conduit supports and straps shall be non-corrosive metal.

7. All conduit through slab shall be red brass and taped or stainless steel 304 sch 40 complete with stop leak flanges and bonding lugs as noted on drawings.

8. Potting compound for underwater junction boxes shall be clear reusable type, UL rated for underwater use.

9. Warning tape shall be Thomas & Betts 6” polyethylene labeled electric line and suitable for direct burial.

C. WIRE AND CABLE

1. New type SOW outdoor flexible cable rated for underwater use.

2. New type single conductor stranded copper with 1000v RW90,RWU90,RWU or TWU in conduit for all voltages. Minimum size #12 for power and lighting and water switches, #14 for sensors and controls. Water switch valves and water level sensors to connected with separate shielded cables back to pump room.

2. Bonding cable to be insulated #6 minimum copper stranded wire. All connection points to have cable stripped back locally, connected to bonding clamps with dielectric paste, and recovered with waterproof seal to meet Code.

3. Bonding Clamps: All bronze/brass body and U-bolt, Burndy Electrical or equal.

5. Cable ties: black polyethylene plastic.

6. Wire and cable markers shall be Electrovert type Z (wire), Electrovert type K (cable), or equal.

D. PANELS

1. Panels shall be NEMA 4, shall be listed per UL508 or equal and be prewired, inspected, and approved by special inspections.

2. Voltage and characteristics as shown on the drawings.

3. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, trip indicating thermal-magnetic type, rated for 40ºC ambient temperature, fixed mounting, with quick break switch mechanism mechanically trip free from the operating handle and conforming to applicable NEMA AB-1 Specifications.

4. Ground Fault Current Interrupting (GFCI) circuit breakers, where indicated, shall meet the requirements for molded case, thermal magnetic breakers and shall additionally

sdardant

Text Box





Page 7 of 7

contain ground fault sensing circuit which shall trip whenever a 5ma imbalance or larger is detected.

5. Name plates shall be blue laminated plastic, 1”x3.5” with minimum 1/8” white character size. Warning labels shall be same but with red background and white letters.

sdardant

Text Box


New Orleans Morial Convention Center Linear Park Bid Set New Orleans, Louisiana 16 January 2018 © MA EDR N14023\14027

Section 143200 MOVING WALKS

Page 1 of 10

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes supply and installation of outdoor-sheltered moving walk systems designed

for a floor-mounted, pit-less application. 1.2 WORK BY OTHERS A. Provision of proper building dimensions and suitable floor finishes with suitable reactions

and finished in accordance with moving walk shop drawings. Variations not to exceed 1” at any point.

B. Supporting floor structure for the moving walks and enclosure walls, external railings,

guards, closures, shutters and smoke barriers as required. C. Fire-rated exterior cladding of truss and finish from the edges of moving walk deck covers,

including ends, sides and bottom of truss in accordance with applicable and standard weight restrictions of 5lbs/sqft (25 kg/m2))

D. Cutting of floors, walls, ceilings or partitions together with any repairs made necessary by

such cutting. System to be surface mounted. E. Painting and finish work required beyond that included in this Section. F. Electrical services to drive-end well including 3 phase main power supply power feed and

lockable fused disconnects/circuit breakers with wiring to each moving walk controller. Provide dedicated 3 phase main power feed and lockable fused disconnects/breakers for the moving walk’s heating requirements. Provide single-phase 120 VAC electrical service and fused disconnect for light and convenience outlet in the drive end well and all other electrical devices that are not a part of the moving walk proper that may be required by local authorities.

G. Other work required for installation of the moving walk(s) including, but not limited to,

required changes to sprinklers, lighting, electrical, air conditioning and heating systems, related drainage systems any other evacuation water means.

H. Protect moving walk truss, pallets, landing plates balustrades, handrails, and special metal

finishes from damage during construction. I. A cover, directly over the horizontal projection of the moving walk, shall be provided as per

section 6.2.8.2 of the ANSI/ASME A17.1-2013 / CSA-B44/13 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. The cover shall extend outward from the centerline of the handrail so that a line extended from the edge of the cover to the centerline of the handrail forms an angle of not less than 15 deg from the vertical.

J. Fabrication and installation of local building code-compliant ramps with handrails shall be

installed and connected at either end of the moving walk. Access and exiting ramps must also be ADA compliant to suit a total height above grade of 1’-2 3/16” (360 mm). Ramps shall be equipped with a heating system designed in order that it may be integrated into the moving walk’s thermostatically-controlled heating system.



Page 2 of 10

1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A17.1-2013 / CSA-B44/13 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators B. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Canadian Electrical Code (CEC 2006) C. Maintenance Requirements and Intervals for Elevators, Dumbwaiters Escalators and

Moving Walks, ASME A17.2-2013 / CSA B44.2-13 D. Local state building code. National Building Code (NBC). E. ASTM A36/A36M – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. F. ASTM A 167 – Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. G. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. H. ASTM B221-M – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, wires, Profiles, and Tubes > ASTM B221-08.

I. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass –Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. CAN /CGSB 12.1 – Tempered or Laminate Safety Glass.

J. Canadian Welding Bureau certification to CSA Standard W47.1 Certification for Companies

for Fusion Welding of Steel, Division 1. K. ISO 9001: 1994. Quality Management System. L. ISO 14001: Environmental Management System.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Materials and Finishes: Submit finishes data as requested. B. Shop Drawings 1. After receipt of the contract drawings, prepare and submit layout and installation

shop drawings for approval by Architect, General Contractor and Electrical Contractor.

C. Samples 1. Submit samples of finishes as requested. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. At contract closeout, submit three copies of manufacturer's standard operating and

maintenance manuals.



Page 3 of 10

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the latest editions of governing codes and ordinances for the province of

Alberta in effect at time of bid. B. Permits, Tests and Inspections: Provide submissions / permits and perform required

turnover inspections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces during transport and handling. Store all materials and equipment

in an area provided-for under other Sections. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The installed equipment shall be warranted for one full year from date of acceptance against

defects in materials and workmanship. Repair or replace defective work. 1.8 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct owner's representatives on operational features, special features, and provide

operating instructions for owner use and maintenance. B. Provide three sets of keys needed for actuation of any operating device so equipped. 1.9 COMMISSIONING A. Perform testing and adjusting to ensure that the equipment is operating properly, per

ANSI/ASME A17.1-2013 / CSA-B44/13 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators and to specification and contract requirements.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish maintenance and call-back service on each moving walk including periodic

equipment examinations, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to ensure proper operation.

B. Term of maintenance contract: Sixty (60) months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ThyssenKrupp

outdoor iwalk pit-less moving walk systems or approved outdoor pit-less design equal, complete as shown and specified.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminium: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.



Page 4 of 10

B. Cold Roll Steel Sheet: ASTM A366. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. D. Stainless Steel: AISI, Type 316 Series, with brushed finish as specified. 2.3 FINISHES A. All steel used for the truss construction shall be sandblasted and shall receive one coat of

anticorrosive primer, approximately 3 mils (80 μm). All other steel components and castings shall receive the same protection against corrosion as the truss construction, unless they are treated by other anticorrosive measures mentioned separately.

B. Clear anodising of aluminium parts shall be used. 2.4 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL A. Each moving walk shall be furnished and erected as described herein. B. Nominal pallet width: 1400mm. C. Moving Walk lengths: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Design: Horizontal (0 degrees) E. Theoretical Capacity: 9000 Passengers per hour. F. Speed: 100 fpm (0.5 m/sec.) G. Main Power Supply: 480 VAC 3 Ph. 60 Hz. 2.5 STRUCTURE

A. The supporting structure of the central modules shall consist of two rolled galvanised steel sheet profiles along the moving walkway length, each of 3 mm thickness. These profiles shall be connected by cross beams and cross diagonals. The rolled galvanised steel sheet profiles at both upper and lower side shall also be used as the track system for the pallet band and shall be designed for a static load of 5000 N/m2. The maximum deflection under static load shall be not less than 1/750 of the support distance.

B. The structure shall have a factor of safety as prescribed by ANSI/ASME A17.1-2013 / CSA-

B44/13. It shall be designed for rigidity and strength to carry the passenger capacity load and machinery components including balustrade and the weight of the exterior cladding. The total weight of the exterior cladding (by Others) shall not exceed 5lbs/sq. ft. (25 kg/m2).

C. The entire moving walk structure shall be modular in design and mounted upon the finished

floor, without the requirement of an excavated pit anywhere along the length or width of the moving walk.

D. The modular design of the moving walk shall enable the Owner to re-locate the moving walk



Page 5 of 10

if required. The moving walk design shall permit shortening or lengthening of the unit to suit relocation conditions if required.

2.6 ISOLATION MOUNTING A. The support stands along the entire length of the moving walks shall feature isolation pads

to prevent transmission of noise and vibration to the building or surrounding structure. Support pockets on the contrete slab at either end are not permitted. Readjustment of the moving walk alignment shall be possible at any time by means of jack bolts at the support stands.

B. Noise levels. The moving walk noise level shall not exceed 68 dBA when measured at a

height of 3 feet above the comb-plate assembly. 2.7 DRIVE MACHINE A. A virtually noiseless moving walk drive machine shall be located within the drive end of the well. The complete drive unit including brake and speed governor must be easily accessible

without removal of pallets. The AC moving walk drive motor with flanged reduction gear shall be arranged horizontally. The connection between drive motor and reduction gear shall be via direct flexible coupling. The reduction gear shall be located in a mono-block housing. A coaxial spur gear (helical-design) shall be used as the reduction gear assembly. Circulating pumps for oil cooling are not permitted. Synthetic oil shall be used in order to prolong the intervals between oil changes. The machine’s drive sprocket shall be connected to the multi-axle direct drive system directly, without the use of drive chains. Lubrication-free handrail chains shall be provided. The minimum breaking strength of the duplex drive chain shall be not less than 170 kN. The minimum breaking strength of the handrail chain shall not be less than 60 kN.

B. The mechanical efficiency of the complete drive assembly shall have a power factor of not

less than 0.90. 2.8 MOTOR/VVVF DRIVE. A. The moving walk motor shall be of an ACVV foot mounted design, coupled to the reduction

gear. The motor shall be protected by electro-magnetic overload devices and thermistors at the motor windings. A fly-wheel shall be provided on the AC motor.

B. The asynchronous drive motor shall be protected to NEMA 4 or IP55 parameters as a

minimum. Starting current shall not exceed 6 times the running current. Motor rating shall be stated in the bid submission.

C. The drive motor shall operate at a maximum speed not to exceed a maximum of 1200 rpm

at a voltage frequency of 60Hz. D. A variable voltage, variable frequency drive shall be employed to provide a maintenance

speed and low-speed operation of 25 fpm (.125 m/sec). E. The drive shall be capable of providing variable speed operation for energy-savings.

Variable speed operation shall be per ASME A17.1-2013 Section 6.2.4.1.2



Page 6 of 10

2.9 BRAKE A. A dual circuit fail-safe brake system consisting of a brake release solenoid with two separate

lifting pins and brake shoes shall be provided on the drive motor shaft. Each brake shoe shall be able to stop the fully loaded pallet band. The maximum torque of the brake shall be no greater than 120 Nm.

2.10 CONTROLLER A. Main switch, motor protection, power section and control section/devices shall be installed in

a NEMA 4 rated cabinet that shall be located at the drive-end of the moving walk. The cabinets shall be supplied according to ANSI/ASME/CSA standards by the moving walk manufacturer. They shall be comprised of a steel enclosure with all required relays, automatic circuit breaker and terminals completely wired for the moving walk control. Fault annunciation shall be provided to identify activation of specific moving walk safety devices.

B. Variable speed operation shall be provided per ANSI/ASME A17.1-2013 / CSA-B44/13

Safety Code for Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks, section 6.2.4.1.2. Discrete radar modules shall be employed as the means of passenger detection.

C. The moving walk controller and fault diagnostic system shall include a clear text display in

English to allow immediate identification of the cause of a shutdown. The display shall be located in the handrail inlet assembly at the drive-end of the moving walk. The display system shall provide the necessary characters for displaying programmable messages and fault conditions.

D. Each moving walk shall be provided with a pendant style running button assembly to operate

the moving walk during maintenance. Plug-in connection devices for the pendant station shall be provided at both ends of the moving walk within the well space beneath the floor plates. The pendants shall include constant-pressure push buttons to operate the moving walk in either direction and must be equipped with a maintenance-operation stop button. A maximum length of 3m of cable shall be provided.

E. PLC for remote monitoring communications to connect all of the moving walks to a remote

SCADA system must be provided using the PLC Ethernet port. 2.11 REVERSING STATION-TENSION CARRIAGE

A. The tensioning station for the pallet band shall be located in the lower reversing station within the supporting structure. It shall be easily accessible through a fastened, removable cover plate.

B. Two adjustable compression springs shall ensure constant tension on the pallet band.

Return guides for the pallet band shall be constructed from steel and mounted on the tension rails. Tensioning station shall be designed to assure that the entrance / exit of the pallets at the combplate occurs without noise and friction.

2.12 COMBPLATES AND FLOORPLATES A. The height of the entire comb-plate shall not exceed 5/16” (8 mm) above the pallet tread to

mitigate against tripping hazards at either end of the moving walk. Each interchangeable combplate segment shall be constructed of extruded aluminium alloy and shall mesh with



Page 7 of 10

the ribbed tread design of the pallet. Comb-plate segment fasteners shall not be visible. B. Each comb-plate assembly shall be fitted with safety contacts to stop the moving walk if a

foreign object is caught between the comb teeth and the pallet. Combined vertical and horizontal safety switches shall be provided.

C. The floor plates covering the machinery spaces at each end shall be removable lightweight

plates of rigid construction and shall have a ribbed aluminium surface with anti-slip grooved surface.

D. The operating noise level of the moving walk shall not exceed 68 decibels when measured

at a height of three feet above the comb-plate assemblies.

F. Flush-mounted, RGB color changing continuous LED lighting located in the skirt panels along the entire length of the moving walk shall be provided. Remote controller to change skirt lighting colour settings must be provided.

2.13 CONTROL A. A control station at both ends shall be provided which includes a key actuated direction

starting safety switch and a key actuated stop switch. The control station shall be located in the newel end or outer decking at the ends of the balustrades.

B. A code-compliant emergency stop station shall be provided at each end of the moving walk.

The emergency stop shall be located in accordance with governing code requirements and shall be covered by a transparent cover and feature an 80 dBA alarm which will activate when the cover is lifted.

C. Starting of the moving walk in normal continuous operation mode shall only be possible

using a safety key switch. D. The moving walk shall be reversible. E. Thermostatically-controlled heating of the step band and comb plate areas of the moving

walk shall be provided. 500 watt heating elements shall be located at regular intervals along the length of the pallet band to prevent ice build-up.

2.14 HANDRAILS AND HANDRAIL DRIVES A. The two endless handrails shall consist of a black synthetic plastic compound NT9000 from

Escalator Handrail Company or approved equal with low-stretch steel cord reinforcing and side plies of static dissipative polyester fabric. The handrail entries at the newel ends shall be equipped with handrail inlet plates or brushes fitted with safety contacts. Handrail inlet devices shall be designed to activate when an obstruction enters the device reducing potential injury to the object entering the device. The handrails shall be driven synchronously with the pallet band via the main shaft. Handrails shall have a minimum breaking strength of 25 kN.

B. In order to reduce wear and specific strain, the handrail shall be pressed against the driving

wheel by means of a cluster roller assembly. Tension belts to provide pressure are not acceptable. The handrail drive system shall be situated at the drive-end of the moving walk.



Page 8 of 10

C. Newel ends shall be furnished with sealed rollers fitted with bearings to minimize handrail wear.

D. Handrails shall be centrally located on the balustrade.

E. Guide tracks to support the handrails shall be constructed of AISI 304 stainless steel.

2.15 PALLETS

A. Interchangeable pallets shall be constructed of die-cast aluminium and finished with silver powder coating. The pallets shall attach to one another to form an endless pallet band. A multi-driving axle system shall be used to drive the pallets without the use of pallet chains.

B. Pallet connection pins made of galvanized steel for outdoor exposure protection shall be

provided.

C. Sealed roller bearings for the pallets suitable for outdoor exposure shall be provided.

D. Powder-coating with anti-slip properties shall be provided on the pallets to ensure a

secure foothold when wet 2.16 BALUSTRADES

A. Balustrades shall be constructed of 12mm tempered safety glass per CAN. CGSB 12.1. A minimum gap between the glass panels of 2mm shall be provided. Cast iron glass support brackets shall be provided to ensure balustrade rigidity. Glass balustrade panels adjacent to the removable decorative building structure shall feature black tint.

B A formed, one-piece skirt panel/inner decking design shall be provided with a minimum thickness of 1.5mm. Complete assembly shall be finished in AISI 316 stainless steel.

C. No visible fasteners shall be located on the balustrade. 2.17 SAFETY DEVICES A. The moving walks shall be equipped, as a minimum, with the following safety devices: 1. Comb-plate assemblies shall be equipped with combined vertical and horizontal

safety contacts to stop the moving walk in the event an object is lodged between the pallet treads and the comb-plate.

2. Handrail-inlet safety devices at the entry-point of the handrail into the balustrades shall be provided. These switches when tripped shall stop the moving walk to avoid passenger injury or equipment damage.

3. Controller phase loss protection shall be provided. 4. Emergency stop buttons with spring-loaded transparent covers and audible 80 dBA

alarm located at each end of the moving walk in the newel or adjacent stanchion assembly shall be provided.

5. Maintenance cable sockets shall be provided in both wells. 6. Means for hand winding of the motor flywheel shall be provided in order to move the

pallet band manually if required. 7. Pallet monitoring devices within the pallet band with three (3) actuation points at



Page 9 of 10

each end of the moving walk shall be provided. System shall be designed to stop the moving walk if damage to the pallets or rollers occurs.

8. A speed governing system for the control of over-speed, under-speed and/or unintended reversal conditions shall be provided.

9. Pit stop switches located in both wells shall be provided. 10. Tension carriage switch assemblies shall be provided. 11 Protective maintenance guards at the pallet turn-around area shall be provided. 12. Provide missing pallet monitoring system. 13. Provide handrail speed monitoring device. 14. Provide lighting in both wells. 15. Ground lugs shall be provided to ground the truss to the building grounding system. 16. Voice annunciators system by Soundview Electronics or approved equal shall be

provided at both ends of the moving walk to warn passengers at the ingress end to ‘Please hold Handrail’ and to advise passengers at the egress end that ‘The end of the moving walk is approaching’. Announcement script to be confirmed by Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that the building conditions are suitable for the commencement of moving walk work

described in this Section. B. Verify building support dimensions are of correct size and within tolerances. C. Confirm electrical power is available and suitable for hook-up. D. Report defects or deficiencies. E. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Arrange for temporary electrical power to be available for installation work and testing of

moving walk components. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1-2013 / CSA-B44/13 and applicable local

codes. B. Install moving walk components as specified and required for a complete operating moving

walk system. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform periodic field inspection as work is performed to confirm installation in accordance

with project requirements. B. Perform system testing to verify that the required performance criteria have been met. C. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by jurisdictional authorities.



Page 10 of 10

3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Arrange for and perform a final check of moving walk operation with the owner or owner's

representative present prior to turning each moving walk over for use. Demonstrate that the complete system is operating properly.

END OF SECTION